AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV9 0 Usr

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
Users Guide
Version Number: V9
May 2016
Copyright (c) 2000-2016 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, the aspen leaf
logo, Plantelligence and Enterprise Optimization are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology,
Inc., Bedford, MA.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of
AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of
the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software
may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION,
ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Aspen Technology, Inc.

20 Crosby Drive
Bedford, MA 01730
USA
Phone: 781 221-6400
Toll Free: 888-996-7100
URL: http://www.aspentech.com
Contents
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................7
Main Features .................................................................................................. 7
Understanding Aspen Process Economic Analyzers Project Workflow ...................... 9
The Guide ..................................................................................................... 11
Related Documentation ................................................................................... 12
Technical Support .......................................................................................... 12
2 Getting Started ...................................................................................................15

Starting Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ........................................................ 15
Starting a Project Scenario .............................................................................. 16
Opening an Existing Project Scenario ................................................................ 24
Working with Templates .................................................................................. 26
Understanding the Icarus Interface .................................................................. 27
Working with Project Scenarios ........................................................................ 46
Preferences ................................................................................................... 51
3 Defining the Project Basis ..................................................................................57

Project Properties ........................................................................................... 57
General Project Data ...................................................................................... 58
Importing old Standard basis files .................................................................... 60
Basis for Capital Costs .................................................................................... 60
Process Design............................................................................................... 77
Investment Analysis ....................................................................................... 99
Developing Streams ..................................................................................... 111
Specification Libraries ................................................................................... 121
4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data .............................................................126

Overview..................................................................................................... 126
Preparing Simulation Reports ......................................................................... 126
Loading Simulation Data ............................................................................... 133
Working with Block Flow Diagrams ................................................................. 137
Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components .................................... 142
Tower Configurations .................................................................................... 149
Sizing Selection ........................................................................................... 162
Project Sizing Selection ................................................................................. 162
Contents iii
Specifying Additional Components .................................................................. 163
Working with Process Flow Diagrams .............................................................. 164
5 Defining Project Components ...........................................................................173

Adding an Area ............................................................................................ 174
Adding a Project Component .......................................................................... 174
Entering Component Specifications ................................................................. 178
Defining Installation Bulks ............................................................................. 180
Defining Area Specifications........................................................................... 195
Importing Areas and Components .................................................................. 196
Importing an Entire Scenario ......................................................................... 197
Copying Components .................................................................................... 198
Modifying Components .................................................................................. 199
Copying Areas ............................................................................................. 200
Deleting Components.................................................................................... 200
Deleting Areas ............................................................................................. 201
Using the Custom Model Tool ......................................................................... 201
6 Sizing Project Components ...............................................................................208

Overview..................................................................................................... 208
Creating Streams to Connect to Equipment Items ............................................ 210
Using the Interactive Sizing Form ................................................................... 214
Global Sizing Selection .................................................................................. 221
Sizing Areas ................................................................................................ 224
Sizing Requirements, Calculations, and Defaults .............................................. 225
7 Piping and Instrumentation Models .................................................................255

Interconnecting Volumetric P&ID Lines............................................................ 255
Mapping Streams to Piping Lines .................................................................... 260
8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries ................................................................265

Equipment Model Library (EML) ...................................................................... 265
Unit Cost Library (UCL) ................................................................................. 265
Developing and Using an Equipment Model Library (EML) .................................. 266
Developing and Using a Unit Cost Library (UCL) ............................................... 272
Working with Cost Libraries ........................................................................... 281
9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location ..............................................................287

Changing Plant Capacity................................................................................ 287
Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM) ................................................................... 289
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) ................................................................. 291
10 Analyzer Utility Modules .................................................................................304

Introduction ................................................................................................ 304
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water (AUM_Water) ............................... 306
AUM_Air ...................................................................................................... 332
Overview..................................................................................................... 332
General AUM_Air Workflow ............................................................................ 334
Using AUM_Air ............................................................................................. 334
Guide for the Air Utility Model (AUM) .............................................................. 340
iv Contents
Configuration of Air Utility Project Components ................................................ 344
Design Considerations .................................................................................. 348
Interactive Specs ......................................................................................... 354
Design Methods ........................................................................................... 360
Sample AUM_Air Worksheets ......................................................................... 362
11 Evaluating the Project ....................................................................................378

Running a Project Evaluation ......................................................................... 378
Reviewing and Revising Process Economics in the Analyzer Economics Module ..... 380
Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus Reporter ..................................................... 397
Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor .................................................................. 424
Reviewing Investment Analysis ...................................................................... 433
Item Evaluation ........................................................................................... 454
Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of Equipment Affected by Mapping .................457
Index ..................................................................................................................487
Contents v
vi Contents
1 Introduction
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, formerly known as Icarus Process Evaluator (IPE),
is designed to automate the preparation of detailed designs, estimates, investment
analysis and schedules from minimum scope definition, whether from process
simulation results or sized equipment lists. It lets you evaluate the financial viability of
process design concepts in minutes, so that you can get early, detailed answers to the
important questions of "How much?", "How long?" and, most importantly, "Why?".
Main Features
Links to Process Simulator Software
Programs
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, formerly known as Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator,
uses expert system links to effect the automatic transfer of your process simulator
output results. Links are available to process simulator programs from AspenTech,
Chemstations, Hyprotech, SimSci and others. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer can
link to virtually any commercial and proprietary process simulator program.
Mapping of Simulator Models to Process

Equipment Types
Mapping relates each process simulator model to one or more of Aspen Process
Economic Analyzers list of several hundred types of process equipment. A simulator
heat exchanger model might be mapped to a fin-tube type; a distillation model might
be mapped into several items, such as trayed tower, kettle-type reboiler, overhead
condenser, and horizontal drum. Aspen Process Economic Analyzers expert equipment
selection makes the mapping easy, allowing you to map one item at a time or all at
once.
Sizing of Equipment
Size of equipment is a prerequisite to costing and the results of size calculations
performed during process simulation are loaded automatically by Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer. With Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, you can revise sizes, enter
your values for unsized equipment or develop sizes using Aspen Process Economic
Analyzers built-in expert sizing programs.
1 Introduction 7
Capital Investment and Schedules:
Engineer-Procure-Construct
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer checks and prepares all of the necessary
specifications for detailed design, estimation, scheduling, and economic data. Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer contains built-in, up-to-date knowledge bases of:
Design, cost and scheduling data, methods and models.
Engineering, procurement and construction methods and procedures.
Critical path programming for development of design, procure and construct
schedules.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer comes with time-proven, field-tested,
industry-standard design and cost modeling and scheduling methods used by project
evaluators for projects worldwide. Aspen Process Economic Analyzers detailed results
are not based on factors. Aspen Process Economic Analyzers estimates and schedules
are consistent, being derived from your project scope definition.
Development of Operating Costs

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer develops operating costs in tune to your process
design. You can override Aspen Process Economic Analyzers values and with each
revision, you can see the impact of your choice on investment analysis measures of
profitability.
Investment Analysis and Aspen Process

Economic Analyzers Link to Your
Spreadsheets
In addition to Aspen Process Economic Analyzers basic measures such as return on
investment, payout time and discounted cash flow rate of return, your spreadsheet
programs can be linked to Aspen Process Economic Analyzers investment analysis
data.
Alternative Capacities and Locations

Analyzer lets you evaluate alternate plant capacities and locations. You can make a
percentage adjustment to the capacity, and Analyzer will automatically re-size all
project components and stream flows. You can change the plant location (choosing
from twenty-two different countries), and Analyzers plant relocation technology will
automatically revise the design and cost basis parameters, including parity exchange
rate, workforce rates, productivities, and construction practices.
Detailed, Interactive Process Economics

Analyzers detailed economics module lets you perform interactive economic scenarios.
It develops key economic measures, including payout time, interest rate of return, net
present value, and income and expenses on changing any economic premise. It
performs economic analyses over the time line of a project, from the strategic
planning phase through engineering, procurement and construction of the process
facility, into start-up and throughout the production life of the process facility. You can
study the impact of cyclic changes in market conditions and identify economic threats
8 1 Introduction
and opportunities upon changing costs of feedstocks, products and/or utilities for each
period in the life of a project.
Links to Project Evaluation Programs

After your evaluation and selection of the best design, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer can prepare a project specs file in SPECS format. Then, project evaluators
using these systems can easily develop detailed funding or bidding estimates and
schedules.
Understanding Aspen Process

Economic Analyzers Project
Workflow
Before using Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, it may be helpful to review the
recommended project workflow.
1 Introduction 9
Notes:
This workflow is recommended if you are bringing process simulator data
into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. However, Aspen Process Economic
10 1 Introduction
Analyzer lets you perform the same evaluation on a process comprised of
areas and components that you add in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,
rather than mapped from simulator models.
During the project workflow, you can go back to previous steps to refine
the project.
The Guide
Organization
This guide contains the following:
Chapter 1 Introduction an overview of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and the
user's guide, as well as a list of related documentation and information on technical
support.
Chapter 2 Getting Started instructions on how to start Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer, open a project, enter project specifications, and work with the Icarus
Interface.
Chapter 3 Defining the Project Basis instructions on defining specifications: units
of measure, standard basis, component map, design criteria, investment analysis, raw
material, product, operating unit costs, and utility.
Chapter 4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data instructions on preparing
different kinds of simulator reports for use in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,
loading simulator data, mapping simulator models to Icarus project components,
adding additional components to simulator models, and viewing and defining simulator
models in Block Flow Diagram (BFD) and Process Flow Diagram (PFD) view.
Chapter 5 Defining Project Components instructions on defining project
components, which are the pieces of the process plant that, when linked together,
complete a process.
Chapter 6 Sizing Project Components instructions on sizing project components.
Chapter 7 Piping and Instrumentation Models instructions on connection pipelines
between components and creating piping line list reports for connected lines.
Chapter 8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries instructions on developing cost
libraries and adding library items as project components.
Chapter 9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location instructions on modifying plant
capacity and locations, as well as details on the parameters affected by these
modifications.
Chapter 10 - Analyzer Utility Modules instructions on using Analyzer Utility Modules
for cooling water and air.
Chapter 11 - Evaluating the Project instructions on running a project and item
evaluations and reviewing capital costs, operating costs, and investment analysis
reports.
1 Introduction 11
Related Documentation
In addition to this document, a number of other documents are provided to help users
learn and use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. The documentation set consists of
the following:
Installation Notes
Aspen Engineering Suite V9 Installation Guide
Known Issues and Workarounds

Aspen Engineering Suite V9 Release Notes
New Features in Aspen Economic

Evaluation V9
Aspen Engineering Suite V9 Release Notes
Icarus Reference
Aspen Icarus Reference Guide, for Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings

IcarusPIDV9.0_Ref.PDF, for Icarus Piping and Instrumentation Drawings
Technical Support
Online Technical Support Center
AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance agreement can
register to access the Online Technical Support Center at:
https://support.aspentech.com
HTU UTH
You use the Online Technical Support Center to:

Access current product documentation.
Search for technical tips, solutions, and frequently asked questions
(FAQs).
Search for and download application examples.
Search for and download service packs and product updates.
Submit and track technical issues.
Search for and review known limitations.
Send suggestions.
12 1 Introduction
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support
e-Bulletins. These e-Bulletins proactively alert you to important technical support
information such as:
Technical advisories
Product updates
Service Pack announcements
Product release announcements
1 Introduction 13
14 1 Introduction
2 Getting Started
Starting Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer
After completing the installation, you can start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:

1 Click the Windows Start button, point to Programs, and then point to
AspenTech.
2 On the AspenTech menu, point to Economic Evaluation 9.0; then point
to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer starts. The Main window, empty because no project
is open, appears on the left. The Palette appears in the upper-right and the
Properties window appears in the lower-right.
2 Getting Started 15
You can change the position of these windows, as explained later in Customizing the
Icarus Interface (page 38). X
Starting a Project Scenario

Note: Viewing the sample project scenario provided with Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer before creating a new one will allow you to familiarize
yourself with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer without having to fill out
specifications. To open the sample project, follow the instructions under
Opening an Existing Project Scenario on page 21. X X
Creating a New Project Scenario

To create a new project scenario:
1 Do one of the following:
On the File menu, click New.
-or-
Click on the toolbar.

The Create New Project dialog box appears.
Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the default
one provided by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. See Preferences
Locations on page 53 for instructions on adding project directories.
X X
2 Either click an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter a

new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.
However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.
3 Enter the Scenario Name.
16 2 Getting Started
This is the name of the scenario within the project. As with the Project Name, long
filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, such as question
marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are not allowed.
If you do not enter a Scenario Name, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses
BaseCase as the default.
4 Click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears.
5 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500 characters in

length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. . The
description can be edited later by accessing Project Properties from the
Project Basis view (see page 58).
X X
6 In the Units of Measure section, you can keep the default basis of
Inch-Pound (IP) or select Metric. The Units of Measure selection cannot
be changed after creating the project scenario.
7 If desired, enter more details about the project scenario in the Remarks
field. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters in length and can be
comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. Remarks can be edited
later by accessing Project Properties from the Project Basis view (see
Project Properties, page 58).
X X
8 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Input Units of Measure
Specifications dialog box, which lets you customize the units of measure that appear
on specification forms.
For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of M/H (meters
per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis project, do the following:
9 Select Velocity and Flow Rate; then click Modify.
10 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter CM/H as the new unit
name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in
the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the
two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
11 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.
When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the General Project Data form, where
you can select a country base and currency.
The default country base is US and the default currency is Dollars (USD). Changing
the country base automatically changes the currency to that of the country base. You
can, however, enter a currency different than that of the country base. Just be sure to
also enter a currency conversion rate (the number of currency units per one country
base currency unit).
Country base affects various system default values. Chapter 36 of Icarus Reference
provides a table listing the default values used for each country base.
This is the only time you can enter country base and currency. Other specifications on
this form can be entered later by selecting General Project Data in the Project Basis
view (see page 58).
X X
12 Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.

The Main Window now displays Project Explorer and the List view. See
Understanding the Icarus Interface on page 27 for instructions on working with
X X
these and other features now available on the interface.
Importing an Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer 5.0/5.1 Project Scenario
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides an Import feature so that you can import
your Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0 or 5.1 project scenarios into Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer V9. You can also select an Analyzer 2.0B project scenario to
import.
The Import feature lets you use Additional Project Component files in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer V9. In order to do so, you must first import the Additional Project
Component file into an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 project scenario and
then import the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 project scenario into Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer V9.
To import an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 or

Analyzer 2.0B project scenario:
On the File menu, click New.
-or-

The Create New Project dialog box appears.
Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the default
one provided by Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator. See Preferences
Locations on page 53 for instructions.
X X
2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter

a new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.
However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.
3 Type the Scenario Name.
This is the name of the scenario within the project. The selected Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer 5.0 or Analyzer 2.0B project files project and component
specifications will be imported into this scenario.
Again, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, such
as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are not
allowed.
After making an entry in the Scenario Name field, the Import button becomes active.
4 Click Import.
The Select Import Type dialog box appears.
5 Select either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0 and 5.1 or Analyzer
2.0B; then click OK.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
6 Click the project scenario folder; then click OK.

The project scenarios settings will be imported into the new project scenario.
Importing Economic Evaluation Project

Files with .izp Extensions
To import an Economic Evaluation project file (with an
.izp extension) into APEA:
1 Select File | Open.
2 On the Open existing project dialog box, click the Import IZP button.
The Import Project dialog box appears. By default, the Browse button
is selected.
The Project Location drop-down list contains the default location, as well
as alternate project directories specified by selecting Tools | Options |
Preferences.
3 Click the Browse button to navigate to the desired .izp file.
4 In the Project Name field, specify the project name.

By default, the Scenario Name is the same as
5 Click OK. The imported project appears in the list of projects.
Opening an Existing Project
Scenario
To open an existing project scenario:
On the File menu, click Open.
-or-
The Open Existing Project dialog box appears.
The tree structure on the left side of the dialog box displays the projects in the default
project folder:
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V9.0\Data\Archives_Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer
Clicking + next to a project expands the view to display the scenarios under that
project.
2 Click a scenario; then click OK.
The project scenario opens. The Main Window now displays Project Explorer and the
List view. See Understanding the Icarus Interface on page 27 for instructions on
X X
working with these and other features now available on the interface.
Palette Shortcut
You can also open a project from the Palette, which appears to the right of the Main
Window in the default interface arrangement (it can also be floated in the Main
Window or dragged onto the Main Window and re-sized, as shown below).
To open a project from the Palette :

In the Projects view tab, right-click a scenario; then, on the menu that
appears, click Open.
This opens the selected scenario.
Working with Templates

Adding a Template.
To add a new template:
1 Click File | New Template.
The Create New Template dialog box appears.
2 On the Create New Template dialog box type the Scenario name.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Project Properties dialog box, enter:
o the project description
o the units of measure (IP or Metric)
o any (optional) remarks
5 Click OK.
The project is created. Note that the Title Bar indicates Templates (name you
entered for the scenario).
Creating a Project by Importing a Template

You can create a new project based on an existing template.
To do this:
1 Launch the Aspen Economic Evaluation application.
2 Click File | New.
3 On the Create New Project dialog box that appears, specify the project
and scenario name.
4 Click the Template button on the right of the dialog box.
The Import Template dialog box appears showing all available templates.
5 Click the template you want to import; then click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears, on which you can continue to enter
information for the new project.
Note: When opening a project from a template, or opening a template itself,

not all of the buttons on the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Toolbar are
available.
Understanding the Icarus

Interface
The Icarus interface lets you see multiple windows and documents. You can customize
the interface arrangement.
The following is the default interface arrangement, with a specifications form open in
the Main Window.
The Icarus interface includes the following features:

Title Bar - Displays the project file name and current Main Window view.
Menu Bar - Displays menu options.
Toolbar - Allows access to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer functions. See page 40. X X
Main Window - Provides workspace for all Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
documents, List view, specification forms, and other views. See page 29.
X X
Project Explorer - Organizes project items in tree format. See page 28. X X
Palette - Provides access to libraries, projects, and components. See page 33. X X
Status Bar - Displays Aspen Process Economic Analyzer system status.

Properties Window Describes the field selected on specifications form. See
page 33.
X X
Project Explorer
Project Explorer is a graphical representation of the project. It has three views:
Project Basis view
Process view
Project view
Each view organizes items in a tree format.
To switch views:
Click the appropriate tab at the bottom of Project Explorer. (Stretching the
width of the Project Explorer will display the full names on the tabs.)
The different views are described on page 28.
X X
To expand a tree level:

Click the PLUS SIGN next to the condensed level.
To condense a tree level:
Click the MINUS SIGN next to the expanded level.
Project Explorer Views

Project Basis View displays project basis specifications. Double-click a specification
to view and/or modify it. A red arrow on an icon in this view indicates that you can
right-click the icon for options.
Level Icon Description
2 Specifications folder
3 Specification
Process View displays simulator data information. In this view, simulator items can
be mapped to Icarus project components. Mapped items can then be sized, modified,
and/or deleted.
2 Main Project, containing a group of simulator areas

3 Process simulator area
4 Unmapped simulator block (yellow)
Mapped simulator block (green)
As in a process simulator, like Aspen Plus or HYSYS, blocks represent different

operations within the process. A block is sometimes referred to as a unit operation.
Project View displays project data information. In this view, mapped items can be
sized, modified, and/or deleted. In addition, new areas and Icarus project components
can be defined.
1 Main Project, containing the default Main Area and any

user-added areas
2 Area
3 Project component
Main Window
The Main Window is located to the right of Project Explorer by default. The Main
Window is a workspace for all Aspen Process Economic Analyzer documents, the List
view, and other views. The relative size of each window can be adjusted by clicking on
the division bar and dragging it to the desired location.
Here, the Main Window in Workbook mode displays several tabs because a
component specifications form and a project specifications form have been opened.
Workbook Mode
By default, the Main Window is in Workbook mode. In this mode, tabs are placed at
the bottom of the window. These tabs represent all windows open in the Main
Window. Clicking on a tab brings the associated window to the foreground.
Clicking Tile or Cascade on the Window menu displays all windows open in the Main
Window. Regardless of the window arrangement, the tabs are still at the bottom of the
Main Window when in Workbook mode. Clicking the maximize button ( ) on a
window returns all windows to full tab view. Clicking the condense button ( ) on the
menu bar displays all windows open in the Main Window as they were when last
condensed.
This is how the Main Window appears when in Workbook Mode with Cascade
selected as the condensed window arrangement.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets float Project Explorer, the Palette, and the
Properties Window in the Main window. When in this state, these windows behave
identically to other windows that are part of the Main Window. See Customizing the
Icarus Interface on page 38 for details.
X X
You can turn off Workbook Mode by unmarking Workbook Mode on the View menu.
When Workbook Mode is off, no tabs are displayed. In this Mode, to bring a window
to the front, you must click the desired window or select the desired window from the
Window menu.
List View
The List view in the Main Window displays details on items selected in Project
Explorer. For example, when you click an area in Project Explorers Project view, the
List view displays a list of all components in the area. This is referred to as the
area-level list (shown below), in which the components are displayed in rows with
component details in columns. When you click a component in Project Explorers
Project view, the List provides information only on the selected component, with
component details listed in rows. This is referred to as the component-level.
Note: In the interface arrangement pictured here, the Palette and the
Properties Window have been hidden to make room for the Main Window.
to press
hide or display the Palette ALT+1
hide or display the Properties Window ALT+2
hide or display Project Explorer ALT+0
Filtering Mechanism
You can limit area-level lists to a single category of component.
To limit area-level lists to a single category of component:

Click the drop-down arrow on the toolbar; then click a category.
For example, if you click ? Incomplete Items, the list will only include components
that still have specifications that need to be entered in order for the component to be
included in an evaluation.
Column Settings
You can select which columns appear on the area-level list and in which order.
To change column settings on the area-level list:

1 Right-click any of the column headings.
A pop-up menu lists all of the columns. Columns currently displayed are checked.
2 To simply hide/unhide a column, click it on the menu.

3 To change the order, click Settings on the menu.
The Settings dialog box appears.
To move a column to the right on the List view, click Move Down.
To move a column to the left, click Move Up.
To return the columns to the default setting (shown above), click Reset.
4 Click OK to save the settings.
When you restart Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, all columns will be displayed in
the default order unless Save Window States is selected in Preferences (by default,
Save Window States is selected). See Saving Window States on page 39 for more
X39
information.
Palette
The Palette contains elements that you can apply to the project scenario. If you think
of Project Explorer as a picture of the project scenario, you might think of the Palettes
contents as the pigments and dyes used to first sketch out and then color in that
picture.
For example, if you want to import areas or components from another scenario into
your current scenario, you can double-click the scenario in the Palette to get a listing
of its areas and components and then drag the area/component to the Project
Explorers Project View. (See Importing Areas and Components on 195.)
Likewise, the Palettes Libraries view contains libraries of Project Basis specification
files that, in Project Explorers Project Basis view, you can select to use. From the
Palette, you can develop the libraries by creating new files, modifying existing files,
and importing files. (See Specification Libraries on page 121.)
X X
Finally, when you add a component to the project scenario, you can choose from the
components listed in the Palettes Components view. Then, after you add the
component, it appears in Project Explorers Project view. (See Adding a Project
Component on page 174).
X X
In the default interface arrangement, the Palette appears on the right side of the
screen. Like Project Explorer, it can be displayed in a variety of ways. See
Customizing the Icarus Interface (page 38) for display options. To hide/display the
X X
Palette, press ALT+1 or used the checked command on the View menu.
As indicated previously, the Palette has four views: Projects, Libraries,
Components, and Templates. The Components view, shown below, has a scrollable
split window that displays details on equipment items. The division bar can be
adjusted to hide or expand the details section.
Note: The Palette pictured in this section has been dragged onto the Main
Window and re-sized.
In addition to allowing you to import the contents of other scenarios, the Projects view
provides options for opening scenarios, viewing scenario properties, and deleting
scenarios. Right-click a project scenario to access the pop-up menu of options. The
Projects view displays all projects in the default project folder and any other active
project folders. (See Preferences, particularly the Locations subsection on page 53,X X
for instructions.)
Properties Window
When you select a field on a specifications form, the Properties Window provides a
description of the field. The description often includes minimum, maximum, and
default values.
Here, the Properties Window (docked on the right side of the screen) displays
information on the Heat Transfer Area field, which is selected on the specifications
form.
Clicking on the Properties Window freezes and unfreezes the content. When the
content is frozen, you can move to another field while retaining the description of the
original field in the Properties Window.
Like the Palette and Project Explorer, the Properties Window can be displayed in a
variety of ways. See Customizing the Icarus Interface on page 38 for display
X X
options.
To hide/display the Properties Window, press ALT+2 or use the checked command on
the View menu.
Templates Tab
Use the Templates tab to access templates. Shown below are the ten templates
included in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. If you had created custom templates,
they would appear on this list.
Customizing the Icarus Interface

In the default interface arrangement, Project Explorer docks to the left edge and the
Palette and the Properties Window share the right. When docked, windows remain
attached to an edge and all other windows are sized to fit in the remaining space
available.
Clicking on a border of any of these three windows accesses a pop-up menu from
which you can select Allow Docking. When Allow Docking is marked, the window can
be docked to any edge.
Note: When the Float In Main window is selected on the pop-up menu, the
Allow Docking option is inactive.
To dock to a different edge:

1 Click the border that contains the Close button ( ) and hold down the
mouse button. A bounding outline will appear as you drag the window.
2 Drag the outline to the desired edge and release the mouse button.
When multiple windows are docked to the same edge, you can use the division bar to
adjust the relative sizes. You can also use the Contract/Expand ( / ) buttons to
either switch from one window to the other or split the side.
Undocking by Dragging onto Main Window

One way to undock the window is by dragging it onto the Main Window. Its size can
then be adjusted.
Float In Main Window Option
You can at any time select Float In Main Window on the pop-up menu. In this state,
the window behaves like the List view or a specifications form, with a tab at the
bottom of the Main Window.
Saving Window States

If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer will save
the interface arrangement. This way, when you open Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer the arrangement is the same as you left it.
You can also set the Preferences so that Aspen Process Economic Analyzer opens
displaying the default arrangement. See Preferences, particularly the subsection on
the General tab view (page 51), for more information.
X X
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer's Toolbar

By default, the toolbar is docked under the menu bar. However, you can float the
toolbar by clicking on a blank area of the toolbar and dragging it. You can also dock
the toolbar to the bottom of the screen or vertically to the edge of the Project
Explorer, Main Window, or the Palette. To do so, drag the toolbar over any one of
these areas until an outline of the toolbar appears. Release the mouse button when
the outline appears in the desired area.
The following toolbar buttons are available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:
Click to
this
Create a new project scenario. See Creating a New Project Scenario on

page 16. X X
Open an existing project scenario. See Opening an Existing Project

Scenario on page 21. X X
Save the current project. See Saving a Project Scenario on page 47. X X
Print.
Load simulator data. See Loading Simulator Data on page 133. X X
Map simulator items to corresponding Icarus project components and size

the component. See Mapping Simulator Items on page 142. X X
Run project evaluation. See page 378 for instructions.

X X
Load Capital Costs and other reports. See page 397 for instructions. X X
Load investment analysis results. See page 433 for instructions.

X X
Edit connectivity in Process Flow Diagram (PFD) view. See on Editing

Connectivity on page 167. X X
Add stream in PFD view. See Adding a Stream on page 169.

X X X X
Draw disconnected stream in PFD view. See Drawing a Disconnected

X
Stream on page 171.

X X X
Zoom in. Active in PFD and Block Flow Diagram (BFD) view.
Zoom out. Active in PFD and BFD view.
Hide/Display ports in PFD view.
Go back. Navigate back through previously viewed links.
Go forward. Navigate forward through previously viewed links.
Other buttons that appear on the toolbar are always inactive in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer. They are for use in other Icarus programs.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Menu Bar
File Menu
Click to
this
New Start a new project scenario. Details on page 16.

X X
New Start a new template.

Template
Open Open an existing project scenario. Details on page 24. X X
Open Open an existing template.

Template
Close Close the current project scenario.
Save Save the current project scenario. Details on page 47. X X
Save As Save the current project scenario as a different file. Details on page 47. X X
Save As Save the current project scenario as a template.

Template
Print Print the form or report currently active in the Main Window.
Print Preview how form or report will appear printed.
Preview
Print View and modify printer name and properties, paper size and source, and
Setup orientation.
Page Define page specifications.
Setup
Exit Close Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
Run Menu
Click this to
Load Data Load simulator data. See page 133 for details.
X X
Map Items Map simulator items to Icarus project components and size
components. See page 142 for details.
X X
Evaluate Run a project evaluation. See page 378 for details.

X X
Project
Develop This sub-menu contains commands for use in Aspen In-Plant Cost
Schedule Estimator only.
Scan for Scan for potential errors in the project evaluation.
Errors
Decision Accesses options for changing plant capacity and location.
Analyzer
Utility Model Specify a utility.
Map Stream Map a stream to lines.
to Lines
Regenerate Regenerate the Block Flow Diagram. If you have indicated that some
Block of the simulator streams are utility streams, the placement of blocks
Diagram will reflect this.
Regenerate Regenerate the Process Flow Diagram. See Working with Process
Process Flow Flow Diagrams, page 164, for details.
X X
Diagram
Reroute All Reroute all streams on the Process Flow Diagram.
Streams
Re-number Re-number project components or project areas so that the
numbering contains no gaps. Details on page 200. X X
View Menu
Click this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page 40 for description of the toolbar.
X X
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page 27 for description of the status
X X
bar.
Project View or hide Project Explorer. See page 28 for description of Project
X X
Explorer Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See page 33 for description of the Palette.
X X
Properties View or hide the Properties Window. See page 33 for a description of X X
Window the Properties Window.

Workbook Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page 29 for an explanation of X X
Mode Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for interactive reports (on-screen,
View HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation reports (.ccp). The
Project Evaluation needs to have already been run. See page 397 and X X
page 424 for details.

X X
Investment Display Investment Analysis spreadsheets. See Reviewing

Analysis View Investment Analysis on page 433 for details.
X X
Spreadsheet Specify which spreadsheet view to display. Areas, components, and

View so on.
Block Flow Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded simulator data. See
Diagram page 137 for details.
X X
Process Flow Display Process Flow Diagram. This command is not active until you
Diagram have mapped the simulator items. See page 164 for details. X X
Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-derived stream properties in a

spreadsheet. You can customize some of the features of the
spreadsheet (which stream properties to display, whether to display
names of the properties, and the display style of the property values)
by editing the stream list template file:
...\ Economic Evaluation V9.0\Data\ICS\strlist.fil
Error Display error messages found in the last Capital Costs evaluation.
Messages
Tools Menu
Click this to
Report Editor Launch Icarus Editor. See Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor on
page 424 for instructions.
X X
External Access the simulator link for importing simulation data. See page 131X X
Simulation for instructions on using this tool with HYSYS.

Import Tool
Options Access Options sub-menu. See below.
Options Sub-Menu of Tools Menu
Click this to
View Have the results normally reported in Icarus spreadsheets exported to

Spreadsheets Excel. The following Excel workbook, containing some Excel macros,
in Excel is provided as a sample:
...\ Economic Evaluation V9.0\Data\ICS\IpeWb.xls
A copy of this workbook also resides in each project directory. When
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer needs to report the results (that is,
when you click the Investment Analysis button), the results will be
exported to ASCII delimited files and loaded into IpeWb.xls. The
macro contained in the workbook will also be run.
Reporting Access the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box, where you can
Assistant create your own customized report spreadsheets, combining
information from all other Icarus generated spreadsheets. See
pages 448 through 448 for details.
X X X X
Custom Tasks See the Application Programming Interface (API) and Object
Definitions guide available from the Help Documentation menu.
Custom Tasks are only available in ACCE and APEA.
Preferences Access Preferences. See page 51 for details.
X X
Window Menu
Click this to
Cascade View the Main Window contents in Cascade mode. See page 29. X X
Tile View the Main Window contents in Tile mode. See page 29.X X
Arrange Icons Return all minimized windows to the bottom of the Main Window.
# XXX View opened window in the Main Window.
Help Menu
Click this to
Contents Access Aspen Icarus Online Help.

Whats New? Access Whats New for this release.
Show Cost Display the cost basis for this release.
Basis
Documentation Display list of available documentation.
Training Display training information.
Product Display product support information.
Support on the
Web
About Display program information and copyright.
Working with Project Scenarios

This section explains how to save, delete, salvage, and unlock project scenarios.
Saving Project Scenarios
To save a project scenario:
Click on the toolbar or click Save on the File menu.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer saves any changes.
If you are using the default Preferences settings, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
will ask if you want to save any changes when you close the project scenario.
You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see page 51).
X X
To save the scenario with a new name:

1 Click Save As on the File menu.
Save As is useful when studying alternatives.
Note: You can save scenarios to project directories other than the default
one provided by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. See Preferences,
particularly the Locations subsection on page 53, for instructions.
X X
2 Specify a Project Name and Scenario Name and click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer saves the scenario as specified.
Deleting Project Scenarios
Delete project scenarios when they are no longer needed. Deleting old scenarios opens
free disk space and makes working with scenarios easier.
To delete a project scenario:

1 In the project directory, right-click the scenario within and, on the menu
that appears, click Delete.
A dialog box asks you to confirm deletion.
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see
page 51).
X X
2 Click Yes to delete the project scenario.

-or-
Click No to retain the project scenario.
Salvaging Project Scenarios

If you exit Aspen Process Economic Analyzer abnormally without being able to save
the current project scenario, you can salvage the project scenario from cached project
information.
To salvage a project scenario

1 Restart Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
A window appears asking if you want to save the cached information found in storage.
2 Click Yes.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Salvage Project As dialog box.
3 Specify a project and scenario name.

You cannot overwrite the scenario being salvaged. Y you must specify a project and
scenario name different from that of the original scenario.
4 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the new scenario. Except in name, this
project scenario is identical to the scenario that was open when Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer was abnormally exited. After creating the new scenario, Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer asks if you want to open it.
Unlocking Project Scenarios

If Aspen Process Economic Analyzer crashes while you have a project scenario open,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer remembers that you have the project scenario
checked out. When you re-open Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, you will have to
unlock the project scenario before opening it.
Anyone trying to open a locked project is denied access and provided with a message
that states the time the project scenario was checked out, the user name of the
person who checked it out, and the computer on which it was checked out.
A project can only be unlocked by the user who checked it out or by an administrator.
To unlock a project scenario

Right-click the project scenario in the Palette and click Unlock on the
pop-up menu.
You can now open the project scenario as you normally would.
Copying Project Directories

Within a project directory, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates an independent
folder for each project and also creates, within a project folder, an independent folder
for each project scenario. This makes it easy to move project scenario files from one
computer to another on the same network. Simply copy and paste the folder in
Windows Explorer.
You can also copy an entire project directory with multiple project and project scenario
folders. Doing so creates an identical set of folders and files in the new location.
Note: You can copy project directories only in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer V9. To use an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 project
scenario, you must import it first (see page 19 for instructions).
X X
See Preferences, particularly the Locations subsection on page 54, for information
X
on adding project directories and setting a new default project directory.
Preferences
The settings in Preferences allow you to specify how Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer will act each time it is used.
To access Preferences:
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.
2 On the menu that appears, click Preferences.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Preferences dialog box.
Click To do this
OK Save changes and close the Preferences.

Apply Save changes without closing Preferences.
Cancel Close Preferences without saving changes. (Clicking Apply and then
immediately clicking Cancel would have the same effect as clicking OK.)
General
In the General tab, you can select the following:
Prompts
Select which prompts appear.
Close Project prompt to save any changes when closing project.
Overwrite Project prompt to confirm overwriting project that has the same name as
the one being created.
Delete Project prompt to confirm deletion of project.
Delete Area prompt to confirm deletion of area.
Delete Component prompt to confirm deletion of component.
Cancel Component Edit prompt to save changes when you click Cancel after editing
a Component Specifications form.
Delete Library prompt to confirm deletion of library.
Delete Report Group prompt to confirm deletion of Report Group in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator. Does not apply to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
Evaluation
Display results after evaluation - mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer open
a detailed results report after you run an evaluation.
Scan for Errors before evaluation mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
scan for errors before evaluation.
Item Report
Select which type of report you want to display when generating an Item Report.
HTML Item Report mark to display the HTML Item Report, like the one shown on
page 454, in the Main Window
X X
Capital Cost Report mark to display the Capital Cost Report in Icarus Editor.
Reporter Report mark to display the Single Component Summary, exported from
Aspen Icarus Reporter, in the Main Window.
Display
Save Window States mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer save the
position of Project Explorer, the Main Window, the Palette, and the Properties Window,
as well as selected columns on the List view. Unmark to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer open with the default interface arrangement (shown on page 27). X X
Display Aspen Capital Cost Estimator & Analyzer Choice Dialog on Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ask you at startup
whether to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and/or Analyzer in the Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer environment. This option is included here because
Preference selections (except for file locations) made in one product affects all other
Aspen Icarus products in the AES suite.
Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator mark to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator display Report Groups.
Forms
The Forms tab view provides options related to Component Specification and
Installation Bulk forms.
Display P&I Installation Bulks in Grid mark to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer display all items on the Installation Bulk specification forms for Pipe and
Instrumentation. If you unmark the checkbox, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets
you select, when opening the form, the items to include.
Use OK Button in Installation Bulks Form to Go to Main Component Form
mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer return you to the main Component
Specifications form when you click OK at an Installation Bulks form. Otherwise,
clicking OK simply closes the Component specifications.
Save Component When Switching to Different Installation Bulk or Main
Component Form mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer save the
Component specifications when you switch to a different form on the Components
Options menu.
Backup/Recovery
The Backup/Recovery tab lets you select when backups are to be performed. You
can select both options.
Automatic Task Backup select this check box to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer perform a backup before executing major tasks, such as a project evaluation.
Timed Backup (Interval, in minutes) select this check box to have Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer perform a backup at a specified interval. Specify the
interval in the box provided.
Timed Recovery (Interval, in minutes) - select this check box to have Aspen
Economic Evaluation write a recoverable file at the specified interval. Specify the
interval in the box provided. If an Economic Evaluation application crashes, when you
open the Aspen Economic Evaluation application that crashed, you are be prompted to
recover your file and save it with a new name.
Note: After a project has crashed and been recovered (under the new name),
the original project that crashed should be deleted as it may no longer be in a
stable state.
After deleting the crashed project, you can rename the recovered project to
the previous name if you want.
You can also select to either have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer overwrite the
project backups or create unique backups.
Overwrite Project Backups select this check box to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer overwrite the previous backup every time the program performs a backup.
Unique Project Backups select this check box to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer retain previous backups by creating a unique backup each time. Depending
on the frequency of backups (see task and timed backup options above), selecting
Unique Project Backups could result in large amounts of disk space being consumed by
backups.
Process
The Process tab view provides options for importing from an external project.
Import Connected Streams select this check box to include connected streams
when importing an external project.
Import Installation Bulks select this check box to include installation bulks when
importing an external project.
The Process tab also provides options for unsupported simulator models and custom
model tool activation.
Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item select this check box to have
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer map, by default, unsupported simulator models to
quoted cost items.
Unsupported Models refer to models not listed in the Project Component Map
Specifications dialog box shown on page 80. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer does
X X
not recognize them and, therefore, cannot map them to Icarus project components. If
this option is left unselected, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer will not map
unsupported models. As a result, a unit operation could appear disconnected in the
Process Flow Diagram (PFD).
Quoted cost items are not project components, but act as place markers to ensure
that unit operations remain connected in the PFD.
Note: Selecting this option does not affect the mapping of supported simulator
models. If a simulator model is listed in the Project Component Map Specification
dialog box, then the specified mapping is used. Further, if a simulator model is listed
and has no default mapping (that is, Current Map List section is blank), then it is
assumed that you do not want to map such simulator models to any Icarus project
components.
For example, if this option is selected, a USER unit operation in Aspen Plus can be
mapped to a quoted cost item. This ensures that the unit operation remains connected
in the PFD.
Activate Custom Model select this check box to activate the Custom Model tool
explained on pages 201 through 207.
X X X X
Locations
In the Locations tab view, you can select:
Project Directories
Add/remove alternate project directories and set the default project
directory. See Adding Project Directories on page 54 for instructions.
X X
Other Locations Specifications
To specify the location of various specification files and
data:
1 Click an item in the list to display its description and location.
2 Click the Browse button to select a new location.
Notes:
In some cases the description warns against changing the location.
Make sure to create the IP and MET subfolder structure when changing
the source locations for library files that are units dependent (for example,
Basis for Capital Cost, EML, UML, Custom Piping Specs, and so on).
Adding Project Directories

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer comes set up with two project directories:
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V9.0\data\My Econ_Process Projects
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V9.0\data\Archives_Econ_Process
These directories, by default, are the sole choices of project directory when opening or
saving a new project, as well as the only directories displayed on the Palettes
Projects view.
To add a project directory and set a new default

1 On the Locations tab of the Preferences dialog, click Add.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2 Select the folder you want to add as an alternate directory and click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the directory to the Alternate Project
Directories list.
3 To set an alternate project directory as the default, select it and click Set
Default.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt asking you to confirm the change.
4 Click Yes to set the new default.
If the old default location is not on the list of alternate project directories, Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer displays another prompt asking if you want to add it to the
list.
5 Click Yes or No.
Note: Adding the old default directory to the alternate project directory list
lets you easily revert to it.
6 Click OK to save the changes to Preferences.
Before the added project directory appears on the Create New Project dialog box
and elsewhere, you will need to either restart Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
else right-click the current project in the Palette and click refresh on the pop-up menu.
Unit Costs
Use the Unit Costs tab to access external unit cost data from either Aspen
Richardsons WinRace software or a users third party data source. This data can be
used in Aspen Icarus as Unit Cost Library (UCL) items.
Notes:
To access unit cost data from Aspen Richardsons WinRace database, you must
install and configure a licensed copy of the WinRace software, and then select
the desired unit cost line items from the WinRace database.
For information on installing Aspen Richardsons WinRace software, see the
Aspen Richardsons WinRace Installation Guide.
For detailed information on using the Unit Costs tab, see Accessing External
Unit Cost Data in the Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator User Guide.
Miscellaneous Page
Use the Miscellaneous tab view to customize the News feed tab name and the Start
Page news channel on the Start page. You can also specify to have the page show on
startup and the interval at which to download content.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator users can also set a path for a default Estimate
Plan Document. A default copy is installed in the path shown in the dialog.
3 Defining the Project Basis
The Project Basis defines specifications that pertain to the overall project scenario.
These specifications influence the design and cost estimate by defining system
defaults and environmental variables.
Project Basis Specifications are accessed from the Project Basis view in Project
Explorer.
A red arrow on an icon indicates that you can right-click the item to access a pop-up
menu.
This chapter describes the different Project Basis specifications, as well as how to
customize specification libraries.
Project Properties
Project Properties are initially specified when creating a new project.
3 Defining the Project Basis 57

To access Project Properties:
In the main Project Basis folder, right-click Project Properties; then
click Edit.
You cannot edit:

Project Name
Scenario Name
Units of Measure
You can specify these only when creating a new project.
You can edit the following:
Project Description: The description entered here appears as the Project
Description on the Project Summary spreadsheet and as the Brief
Description on the Executive Summary spreadsheet. The project
description is shared by all scenarios that are under the project. The
description can be up to 500 characters in length and can be comprised of
letters, numbers, and punctuation.
Remarks: Any remarks entered will appear immediately after the Title
Page of evaluation reports in Icarus Editor. Remarks can be up to 6,000
characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and
punctuation. Remarks might include, for example, the intended purpose of
the estimate, executive summary of results, or an explanation of
assumptions.
General Project Data

General Project Data is initially specified when creating a project.
To access General Project Data:

1 In the main Project Basis folder, right-click General Project Data.
2 In the menu that appears, click Edit.
58 3 Defining the Project Basis

The Standard Basis Input File Specifications form appears.
You cannot edit:

Units of Measure
Country Base
Currency Symbol
These can only be specified when creating a new project.
You can edit the following:
Currency Conversion Rate: The number of currency units per one
country base currency unit. This is for when you are using a currency
other than that of the country base.
Project Title: Appears as the project title on reports in Aspen Icarus
Reporter and Icarus Editor and appears as the Scenario Description on the
Project Summary spreadsheet.
Estimate Class: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Intended to
indicate the purpose of specifications (for example, budget).
Job Number: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
Prepared By: Appears at the top of reports generated by Aspen Icarus
Reporter and on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
Estimate Date: Appears immediately under the project title at the top of
the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Reports generated by Aspen Icarus

Reporter also include an Estimate Date; however, the Estimate Date
shown in Aspen Icarus Reporter is the date on which the project
evaluation was run.
Importing old Standard basis

files
1 Open your Aspen Icarus Project Evaluator Software.
2 Go to the Libraries tab.
3 Click Basis for Capital Costs.
4 Right-click either Inch-Pound or Metric.
5 Click IMPORT.
The dialog that appears defaults to looking for the .D01 files for your Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer project.
6 Browse to the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project you want to
import.
7 Click the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project file to import.
Your Aspen Process Economic Analyzer template (standard basis file) is now in the
new Aspen Icarus Project Evaluator system.
Basis for Capital Costs

The Basis for Capital Costs folder includes:
Units of measure customization.
General specs affecting capital and operating costs, including contingency
(based on specified process description, process complexity, and project
type) , process control, location, engineering start date, soil conditions,
vessel design code, and level of instrumentation.
Workforce wage rates (for both the overall project and by craft),
productivities, and workweek definition.
Indexing of material costs and man-hours by COA.
Input Units of Measure Customization

Input Units of Measure Customization lets you customize the units of measure that
appear on specification forms.
To customize input units of measure:

1 With no project open, expand the Basis for Capital Costs folder in the
Palettes Libraries view.
2 Expand the appropriate units of measure basis folder Inch-Pound or
Metric.
3 Right-click the specification file you want to customize; then click Modify.

Note: If you are modifying a file you will need to later select the file in the
project. To do so, right-click Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Explorers
Project Basis view, click Select, and select the file.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Basis for Capital Costs library in
Project Explorer.
4 In the Units of Measure Customization folder, right-click Input and, on

the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.
5 If, for example, you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of
M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis
project, click Velocity and Flow Rate; then click Modify.
6 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter CM/H as the new unit
name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in
the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the
two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.

8 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.
Output (Reports) Units of Measure

Customization
Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization let you customize the units of
measure that appear on Capital Costs and other reports.
To customize output units of measure

1 Right-click Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization in the
Basis for Capital Costs folder in Project Explorers Project Basis view; then
click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Output Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.
You can change the basis for all output units of measure by selecting a different basis
in the Unit of Measure Basis section; however, note that this voids all previous
customizations.
2 To customize only individual units, such as velocity and flow rate units,
select the unit type and click Modify. Then, for each unit you want to
change, enter the new unit name and the conversion factor (between the
old and new units).
In this example, centimeters per hour (CM/H) replaces meters per hour (M/H). A
conversion factor of 100 has been entered because 100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
3 For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of
M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis
project, enter CM/H as the new unit name for M/H. Then, enter the
conversion factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In this
example, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because 100
CM/H = 1 M/H.
5 When finished modifying output units of measure, click Close.

General Specs
General Specs greatly affect the total capital and operating cost of the project.
To access General Specs:

1 In the Project Basis views Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click
General Specs
2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.
The section of the Standard Basis file containing General Specs appears in a
specification form.
Process Description, Process Complexity, and Project Type combine to generate

contingency (as a percent of total project cost). They are interdependent, and the final
value is a nonlinear combination of the individual contribution. As an example of the
various rule-based deductions used, consider the selections made in the Standard
Basis file pictured above:
Process Description: New and unproven process
Process Complexity: Highly complex
Project Type: Grass roots/Clear field
Since the process is new and unproven, contingency value is made high compared to
the base condition. Also, since the process complexity is high, the contingency is
raised again. The Grass roots/Clear field project type lowers the contingency
because of reduced site constraints.

Note: You must clear the Contingency Percent field for the system to
calculate the contingency based on your changes.
Field Description
Process Also drives the design allowances for all
Description equipment whose material cost is system-
generated. User-entered costs are not affected.
A new and unproven process has a higher
design allowance compared with a proven
process. This is applied against all non-quoted
equipment
Process Used to adjust contingency. Highly complex
Complexity implies high temperature/pressure and more
instrumentation and controllers (for example,
batch), whereas simplicity implies offsites.
Process Control You can provide either digital, analog or
distributed control system for the project and
the process control strategy is fixed with this
choice.
Project Information
Project Location Adjusts the various location dependent cost
fields based on the actual geographical location
of the project site. The system calculates values
such as freight (domestic and ocean),
taxes/duties, wage rates and workforce
productivities.
Project Type Used to determine the configuration of the
projects electrical power distribution and
process control systems.
Contingency This field will have the value of the contingency
Percent percentage calculated by the standard basis
expert based on user specification of project
information. This lets you modify the value
estimated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
This value represents:
Construction Contingency
Material Contingency
Engineering Contingency
Estimated Start These three fields show the year, month, and
Year/Month/Day day that the basic engineering will begin. Refer
of Basic to Icarus Reference, Chapter 31: Engineering,
Engineering for a definition of engineering functions.
Soil Conditions Specifies the nature of the soil most prevalent
Around Site around the construction site. This impacts the
development of all foundations, the amount of
pilings developed, any excavation and trenching
work items, and construction rental
requirements. Icarus Reference, Chapter 19:
Civil, provides soil type definitions.

Field Description
Equipment Specification
Pressure Vessel Specifies the design code used for pressure
Design Code vessels design. The following design codes can
be chosen:
ASME = ASME code, Section VIII, Div 1
BS5500 = British code, BS5500
JIS = Japanese code, B8243
DIN = German Code, AD Merkblatt
EN 133445 = European code, EN 13445
GB 150 = Chinese code, GB 150-1998
Vessel Diameter Specifies the vessel dimension in the
Specification component specification form as inside
diameter (ID) or outside diameter (OD).
P and I Design Specifies the level of instrumentation provided
Level for the equipment. The P and I may be
standard instrumentation (STD) or highly
instrumented (FULL). Refer to the Piping and
Instrumentation Drawings for instrumentation
on specific equipment.
Data Affected by General Specs

The following is a detailed description of the data affected by the General Specs and
the magnitude of their effect depending on the different selections.
Domestic Freight (% of material)
Specifies cost of domestic freight as a percentage of material costs. The value for this
field depends on the project location selected in the standard basis.
Domestic freight percentages for the different locations are:
o North America = 4
o South America = 5
o Central America = 5
o Europe = 1
o Asia = 1
o Africa = 4
o Australia =
Ocean Freight (% of material)
Specifies cost of ocean freight as a percentage of material costs. The value for this
field depends on the project location selected in the standard basis. Ocean freight for
the different locations is adjusted based on the percentage of plant material that can
be purchased locally. The percent adjustments for the different locations are:
o North America = 0
o South America = 8

o Europe = 0
o Asia = 0
o Africa = 8
o Australia = 12
The final value of the field is calculated by the following formula:
O.F (%) = % Adjust * (100 - % material locally purchased) / 100
Taxes/Duty (% of material)
Specifies taxes as a percentage of total material costs. The value used in the capital
cost evaluation depends on the project location chosen in the file. They are:
o North America = 6.25
o South America = 4.00
o Central America = 4.00
o Europe = 0.00
o Asia = 6.00
o Africa = 4.00
o Australia = 7.00
Contingency (%)
Specifies allowance for contingencies as a percentage of the bare plant cost. This field
depends on the selection made for the following fields in the standard basis file:
o Process Description
o Process Complexity
o Project Type
You must clear the Contingency Percent field for the system to calculate the
contingency based on your changes.
The following data defines the general design conditions to be applied to the entire
project being estimated; this information is used to reflect the desired project design
methodology.
Equipment Design Allowance (%)
Specifies percent allowance for design changes for system developed equipment costs.
The value depends on the selection made in the Process Description field. The
following values are selected for the different project conditions:
o New and unproven process = 15
o New process = 10
o Redesigned process = 7
o Licensed process = 5
o Proven process = 3
Equipment Rotating Spares (%)
Specifies a percentage of the purchase cost of all rotating equipment in the estimate
to allow for spare rotors, seals and parts. The allowance for spares is developed based
upon-0 purchased equipment cost values for pumps, compressors, drivers and
generators. The following value is chosen for the above field based on the project
location:
o North America = 7
o South America = 10

o Europe = 7
o Asia = 10
o Africa = 15
o Australia = 7
Soil Condition at Site
Specifies the soil type used to develop data for civil work throughout the project.
Based on the soil type chosen, soil loading and soil density are selected. Icarus
Reference, Chapter 19, provides a complete definition for all the soil types. Once the
soil type is selected, the system automatically selects the type of piles used in the
project. The following pile types will be selected:
Soil Type Pile Type
Soft clay Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Firm clay Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Wet sand Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Sand+clay Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Dry sand Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Sand Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Gravel Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Soft rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Hardpan Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Med-rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Hard rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Pile foundations are designated according to the country base default capacities and
spacing. Pile foundations are provided for equipment and structures whose weight
(including concrete) exceeds one-half the pile compression capacity.
Power Distribution
The type of project is used to configure the electrical power distribution system inside
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. The power distribution specification generated by
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides the means of designating MAIN and UNIT
substations and the cabling between them
Note that no transmission LINE is provided for any of the different choices of Project
Type.
Components Included
Project Type MAIN Substation UNIT

Grass roots/Clear Transformers, MCC, SW
field Switchgears Transformer
Plant addition - Switchgear MCC
adjacent to existing
plant
Plant addition - Switchgear MCC
inside existing
plant
Plant addition - None Added None Added
suppressed
infrastructure

Plant Modifications Switchgear MCC
/ Revamps
In addition, for plant modifications/revamps, the capital cost excludes cable costs
related to connecting the main substation with the unit; in contrast, for the remaining
project types, a default distance of 1,000 FEET [300 M] (excluding hook-up allowance)
is used to cost the power distribution components.
Process Control
Specifies the desired type of control scheme: Analog, DDCTL (Distributed Digital), or
PLC (Programmable Logic Controllers)
Components Included
Project
Schedule Project Type Operator Center Control Center
The system Grass roots/Clear field YES YES

develops a project Plant addition - NO NO
schedule based suppressed
upon the estimate infrastructure
scope of work
All others NO YES
including dates
and durations for design engineering, procurement, delivery of materials and
equipment, site development and construction. The construction schedule is integrated
with the cost estimate to provide the basis for estimation of schedule-dependent costs
such as equipment rental requirements, field supervision and construction
management.
The schedule commences at the start of basic engineering, as indicated by the date for
basic engineering in the standard basis file.
In addition, the General Specs provide defaults for various general design conditions
that control project design methodology. This in turn affects costs for equipment,
material and manpower, and the overall project schedules. These defaults are not
editable in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. The following defaults (based on their
major categories) are used by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to convey
specifications for the project design data:

Item Defaults
Equipment Remote shop fabrication maximum
dimensions:
Maximum diameter: 14.5 FEET [4.5 M]
Maximum length: 100 FEET [30 M]
Maximum weight: 250 TONS [225 TON]
Piping Pipe Fabrication: Remote shop fabricated

piping
Specifies the general method of pipe
fabrication for the project.
Civil Concrete Mix type: READY - Ready mix
(purchased)
Steel Steel finish type: PT painted steel
Project Schedule Start engineering phase: BASIC Basic

engineering phase
Delivery Schedule Adjust (%): 100
Specifies an adjustment, as a percentage, to
the schedule durations developed by the
system for delivery of equipment items, bulk
materials, control system. This adjustment
applies to receipt of vendor data and
fabricate/ship lead times.
Construction Schedule Adjust (%):100
Specifies an adjustment, as a percentage, to
the schedule durations developed by the
system for all construction manpower.
Bar Symbol: *
Specifies the symbol to be used to print
summary activity bars.
Gap Symbol: -
Specifies the symbol to print the gaps within
activity bars.
Critical path symbol: c
Specifies the symbol to be used to print the
critical path.
User bar symbol: x
Symbol for printing user-defined bars on bar
charts.
Engineering % man-hour: 100

Adjustment for Basic
Adjustment of the duration of the basic

Engineering Phase engineering phase. A value less than 100%
will shorten the duration. A value greater
than 100% will increase the duration.
Engineering % man-hour: 100
Adjustment for
Adjustment of the duration of detail
Detailed engineering
engineering. A value less than 100% will
Phase
shorten the duration. A value greater than
100% will increase the duration.
Contracts Contract number: 1

(scope/definition)
Specifies the number used to reference this
contract, its description, scope of effort and
profile of indirects, overheads, fee,
contingency, and so on.
Company title: PRIME CONTRACTOR
Specifies the description of the contract. This
description is used as the title in appropriate
reports.
Construction Workforce
Construction Workforce specifications are divided into General Rates and Craft Rates.
General Rates
The General Wage Rates information globally sets wage rates and productivities for all
crafts.
To access:
1 Right-click General Wage Rates in the Project Basis views Basis for
Construction Workforce folder.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Wage General Info specifications
form in the Main Window.

Descriptions of the General Wage Rate specifications follow.
Field Description
Number of Number of shifts used during construction. If any
shifts premium pay is involved with second and third
shift work (beyond overtime pay), such premium
should be indicated by a properly averaged craft
rate per shift.
Productivity Specifies whether to use multi-shift /workweek
adjustment adjustments or not.
Indirects If wage rates are to be treated as all-inclusive,
the indirects may be deleted for this workforce by
specifying -. Selecting an all-in rate suppresses
all construction indirects: fringes, burdens, small
tools, construction rental equipment, and so on.
All Crafts Percent of Base

Workforce Enter B for system base. (Reference to a
reference base previously defined workforce number applies to
Icarus 2000 only.)
Wage Rate Wage rates for all crafts as a percentage of
percent of base reference base wage rates.
Productivity Productivities for all crafts as a percentage of
percent of base reference base wage rates.
All Crafts Fixed Rates

This input may be used to globally set the wage rates and
productivities of all crafts in this workforce to fixed values.
Wage rate all Specifies the fixed wage rate (in the project
crafts currency) for all crafts in the workforce. See
discussion in Icarus Reference.
Productivity all Specifies the fixed productivity value for all crafts
crafts in this workforce. See discussion in Icarus
Reference. If no value is specified, the system
defaults to 100%.
Work week per Refer to the description of workforces in Icarus
shift Reference for the effect of changing the work
week and number of shifts upon productivity and

Field Description
job duration. The standard workweek plus
overtime must not exceed 84 hours per week per
shift.
Standard work Specifies number of standard hours per week per
week man per shift.
Overtime Specifies number of overtime hours per week per
man per shift.
Overtime rate Specifies overtime pay expressed as a percentage
percent of standard pay (for example, time and one half
standard = 150%).
General Craft Wages

The general craft wages are for crafts that could appear in most
crews and whose productivities and/or wage rates are dependent on
the type of crew.
Helper wage rate UK Base only. Specifies wage rate for craft help
as a fixed rate to be used in all crews.
Helper wage UK Base only. Specifies the wage rate for craft
percent craft rate help as a percent of the principal craft in the
crew. This value must be less than 100%.
Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foremen as a fixed
rate rate to be used in all crews. Default: 110% of
rate of highest paid craft in crew.
Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foreman as a percent
percent craft rate of the highest paid craft in crew. This value must
be greater than or equal to 100%. Default:
110% of rate of highest paid craft in crew.
Craft Rates
Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity individually for each craft.
To access:
1 Right-click Craft Rates in the Project Basis views Basis for Capital
Costs\Construction Workforce folder.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Wage Rate Info specifications form in
the Main Window.

3 To add multiple definitions to Craft Wage Rates, click the Add button on
the button bar.
4 Use these fields to set the wage rate and productivity individually for each
craft.
Field Description
Craft wages/prod. Wage rates and productivities may be
assigned to individual crafts. Those crafts
not referenced are assigned wage rates and
productivities specified in General Wage
Rate or the system default values.
Craft code Identifies the craft to which the following
wage rate and productivity apply.
The craft code must be an existing system
craft code.
Wage rate/mh Specifies the wage rate (in the project

Field Description
currency) for this craft for standard hours.
Productivity Specifies the productivity of this craft as a

percentage of the systems base. (See
discussion in Icarus Reference.)
Indexing
The Material and Man-hour specification forms in the Indexing folder allow you to
manipulate the material and/or man-hour costs for process equipment and installation
bulks. You can also adjust these indexes by location by using the Location specification
form.
For example, you could specify to increase the material costs associated with a type of
process equipment.
Indexing is used to tailor Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to mimic your work
methods and costs. If your equipment costs for a category are consistently offset from
Aspen Process Economic Analyzers values, use Indexing to correct that.
To adjust the Material or Man-hour index

1 Right-click Material or Man-hour and click Edit.
2 To adjust the index for all equipment or for all of one of the installation
bulks, enter the index value in the box provided. For example, entering
200 in the Equipment box will double the material costs for all items
under the equipment account group.
To adjust the index for a sub-category, click the arrow-button in the box. This
accesses a similar form listing sub-categories corresponding to the Code of
Accounts (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, for a complete list). Adjustments
to a sub-category override adjustments to the account-group.
3 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.

To adjust by location
1 Right-click Location and click Edit.
2 Type the location description.

3 Type the Code of Account (COA) to indicate the start of the COA range, or
click the red arrow and then click Select by the subcategory on the COA
Subcategory Selection window.
The Equipment COA Selection window appears.
4 Click Select again by the COA.

The COA is entered on the form.
5 Do the same to indicate the end of the COA range.
6 Enter the amount to escalate material costs and/or the amount to escalate
man-hour costs.
7 To escalate another range, click Add.

8 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.
Process Design
The Process Design specifications are used in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
projects that contain a simulator input. These specs allow Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer to map simulator models into Icarus project components. For example, a
distillation column model in a simulator may be mapped to a combination of
equipment such as a double diameter tower, an air-cooler (for a condenser), a
horizontal tank (for a reflux drum), a general service pump (for a reflux pump) and a
thermosiphon reboiler.
The Process Design Specifications indicate the default settings that the system uses
for mapping all models of the same class. These specs can be customized in files and
used in many projects.
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name

Simulator Type and Simulator File Name are described under Loading Simulator Data
on page 133.
X X
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs

The Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs are used in mapping simulator units to
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units, serving as the cross-reference.
To access:
1 Right-click Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs in the Project Basis
views Process Design folder.

The Units of Measure Specification dialog box appears.
Note: Each simulator cross-reference UOM file contains a basis (which may
be METRIC or I-P). The basis indicates the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
base units set to which simulator units will be converted.
The left side of the screen displays the simulation output units. The right side of the
screen displays the corresponding Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units. The
conversion factors between the two units are entered in the lower-center section of
the screen.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides a set of common simulator units and their
conversions to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units. You can modify and/or add
units to these files.
Specifying the Mapping for a Simulator Unit
To specify the mapping for a simulator unit:

1 Select the simulation unit from the Units Used list in the Simulation
Output section. In the example below, the simulation unit is CM/HR
(Centimeters/Hour).
2 Select the appropriate units category from Units Category list in the Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer section. In the example below, the units
category is Velocity.
3 Select the appropriate Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit from Units
list in the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer section. In the example
below, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is M/H (Meters/Hour).
Note: If an equivalent Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is not found,

select Miscellaneous as the Units Category and map the simulator unit to
Other in the Units window.

4 Enter the conversion factor between the two units (the simulation unit and
the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit) in the Conversion Factor box.
In the example below, the conversion factor between 100 CM/HR = 1 M/H
5 Click Save to save the mapping.

When a unit has been mapped and saved, a green box appears next to the simulation
unit. A yellow box indicates the unit is not mapped.
Deleting a Mapping
To delete a mapping
Select the simulator unit; then click Delete.
Removing a Unit
To remove a particular unit from the simulation units list

Select the unit; then click Remove.
Adding a Unit
To add a new unit to the list, enter the new unit symbol in the New Units to Add box in
the Simulation Output section and click Add. Changes will not affect existing project
components.
Changing Existing Components
To change existing components:

1 Unsize the item or unmap the items and then re-map and re-size.

2 Once all of the units have been specified, click OK to store and save the
specifications.
It is critical that all simulator units of measure be mapped into Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer units. When the simulator output is loaded, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer identifies all units of measure in the file. Any units not mapped in
the projects current simulator cross-reference UOM specification are automatically
added to the list and you are alerted to the need to define the mapping and re-load
the file.
You must correct this in order to continue without problems. Complete the steps above
to specify the mapping for a simulator unit. Scroll through the Units Used list for any
yellow-tagged units. Map all these, save the file, and re-load the simulator data.
Project Component Map Specifications

The Project Component Map Specifications dialog box contains a list of models for the
selected simulator and a list of the corresponding Icarus project components to which
the simulator models will map.
To access:
1 Right-click Project Component Map Specifications in the Project Basis
views Process Design folder.
Models that are mapped in the current file are marked with an asterisk (*). If no
asterisk is present, then that model will not generate any project components when
loaded, mapped, and sized.
3 Exclude simulator models from the mapping process by selecting the
simulator item and then clicking Delete All Mappings.
You can select a simulator item and review the mapping(s) for that item.

To change one of the mappings:
1 Click an item in the Current Map List.
2 Click Delete One Mapping
3 Create a new mapping.
To create a new mapping:

Click New Mapping; then select an appropriate Icarus project
component.
For simulator column models, an additional specification can be made. Since a column
may be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
requires an identification for each of these mappings. Refer to Mapping Simulator
Models in Chapter 4 for tower/column configuration mapping identifications.
Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer map unsupported simulator models (that is,, models not included in
the list of simulator models on the Project Component Map Specifications
dialog box) to quoted cost items. See page 53 for instructions.
X X
Default Simulator Mapping Specs

The following tables list models that are mapped to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
project components. Models that are not supported can be mapped to a quoted item if
you mark Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item in Preferences, Process
tab (see page 53).
X X
AspenTechs Aspen Plus Map Specs
Model Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Default

Name
CCD Countercurrent Rotary drum filter

decanter
CFUGE Centrifuge filter Centrifuge SOLID-BOWL
COMPR Compressor/turbine Centrifugal gas compressor / Gas turbine with
combustion chamber
CRUSHER Solids crusher Jaw crusher
CYCLONE Solid-gas cyclone Cyclone Dust collector
DECANTER Liquid-liquid decanter Vertical vessel process
DISTL Shortcut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
rating
DSTWU Shortcut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
design
ESP Electrostatic Low voltage electrical precipitator
precipitator
FABFL Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse
FILTER Continuous rotary Rotary drum filter
vacuum
FLASH2 Two-outlet flash Vertical vessel process
FLASH3 Three-outlet flash Vertical vessel process
FSPLIT Stream splitter

HEATER TEMA Shell and Tube Floating head heat exchanger
Exchanger
HEATX TEMA Shell and Tube Floating head heat exchanger
Exchanger
HYCYC Solid-liquid Water only cyclones - mineral
hydrocyclone
PUMP Pump/hydraulic Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
turbine
RADFRAC TEMA Shell and Tube Single-diameter trayed tower (column)
Exchanger Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)
U-tube reboiler (reboiler)
Horizontal drum (accumulator)
Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (reflux
pump)
PETROFAC TEMA Shell and Tube Single-diameter trayed tower (column)
Exchanger Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)
Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (reflux
pump)
Furnace block
RBATCH Batch reactor Agitated Tank enclosed, jacketed

RCSTR Continuous stirred Agitated Tank enclosed, reactor jacketed
tank
REQUIL Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Equilibrium reactor- Agitated Tank enclosed, energy jacketed
gibbs minimization
RPLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
RSTOIC Stoichiometer reactor Agitated Tank enclosed, jacketed
RYIELD Yield reactor Agitated Tank enclosed, jacketed
SCFRAC Short-cut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
SCREEN Wet or dry screen Vibrating system
separator
SWASH Single-stage solids Rotary drum filter
washer
VSCRUB Venturi scrubber Washer dust collector
ChemCAD V Map Specs
Model Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Default
BAGH Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse dust collector

COMP Adiabatic (isentropic) or polytopic Centrifugal Axial Gas Compressor
Compression
CFUG Basket centrifugal filter Atmospheric suspended basket
centrifuge
CRYS Crystallizer or melting by Batch vacuum crystallizer

cooling/heating
CSED Solid-wall basket centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge
separating solids from liq slurry
CYCL Gas-solid cyclone separator Cyclone dust collector
DRYE Dryer Direct rotary dryer
EREA Equilibrium reactor Agitated tank reactor
ESPT Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator
FIRE Fired heater Floating head heat exchanger
FLAS Multipurpose flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
FLTR Vacuum or constant-pressure filter Rotary disk filter
GIBS Gibbs reactor Agitated tank reactor
HCYC Hydrocyclone Water cyclone (separation
equipment)
HTXR Heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
KREA Kinetic reactor (plug flow or Agitated tank reactor
continuous stirred tank reactors)
LLVF Vapor/liquid/liquid flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
MIXE Stream mixer (flash calculation at Vertical cylindrical vessel
output pressure)
PUMP Liquid pump (to increase pressure of Centrifugal pump
liquid stream)
REAC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated tank reactor
SCDS Simultaneous correction rigorous Single diameter trayed tower
fractionation (single column) Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump (reflux pump)
SCRE Screen Single deck rectangular vibrating
screen
TOWR Inside/out rigorous fractionation Single diameter trayed tower
(single column) Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
pump (reflux pump)
WASH Washer Washer dust collector
Hysim Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Default
BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay

COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
Centrifugal single or multi-
stage pump (reflux pump)
COMPRESSOR Compressor Centrifugal gas compressor
CSTR Continuous stirred-tank Agitated Tank - enclosed,
jacketed
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral
separation
PIPING Pipeline
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower
and others
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump
RATEHEATEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed,
jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed,
jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed,
jacketed
SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector
HYSYS Map Specs

Model Name Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
Default
AIR COOLER Air cooler Free standing or rack mounted air

cooler
BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay
COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
CSTR Continuous stirred- Agitated Tank enclosed, jacketed
tank
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
EXPANDER Expander Turbo expander
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER TEMA Shell and Tube Floating head heat exchanger
Exchanger
HEATX TEMA Shell and Tube Floating head heat exchanger

Exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid Water only cyclones mineral
hydrocyclone separation
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and
others
pump
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank enclosed, jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank enclosed, jacketed
SEP Separator HT Drum horizontal drum
TANK Tank VT Storage flat-bottom storage
tank, optional roof
SimSci's Pro/II with PROVISION SimScis Pro/II Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer Default
CENTRIFUGE Centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge

COLUMN UNITS Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
pump (reflux pump)
CRYSTAL Crystallizer Oslo growth type crystallizer
CSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
DECANTER Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter
DEPRESSURE Non-steady-state depressure Vertical vessel - process
DRYER Solids dryer Atmospheric tray dryer
EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine
FLASH FLASH Vertical vessel - process
HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
pump
REACTOR Reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RIGHTEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
ROTDRUM Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
SHORTCUT Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower

Design Criteria
After the simulator model is loaded into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, mapping
and sizing of the items can be performed. If an item is already sized inside the
simulator, the sizing parameters are automatically brought into Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer and used.
Items not sized by the simulator can be sized following the instructions in Chapter 6.
In addition to process information obtained from the simulator, certain design
specifications may be required before sizing can be accomplished.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzers Sizing Expert uses design values based on the
user-defined field values on specification forms in the Design Criteria sub-folder. The
values on these forms provide the basis for developing design specifications from
operating conditions for all equipment to be sized.
You can enter design conditions (design pressure and temperature) for all equipment
(using the Common form) and also enter design conditions for types of equipment.
(Conditions entered on the equipment type forms override those on the Common
form).
Common
Design pressure and temperature entered on the Common specifications form applies
to all equipment except equipment for which you have separately specified these
design conditions.
Design Pressure
Click the Design Pressure field to open the Design Pressure Specifications
form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for calculating the design
pressure based on the range in which the operating pressure falls. The design
pressure is calculated from the operating pressure using the formula shown on the
form. You can modify the pressure limit (upper and lower limit) as well as
parameters A and B.

Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the Design
Pressure Multiplier field was used. This field has now been replaced by
the Design Pressure Specifications form. If projects created using these
earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A and B are
automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified. This
ensures that old projects can be carried over using the same design
criteria.
Design Temperature
Click the Design Temperature field to open the Design Temperature
Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for calculating
the design temperature based on the range in which the operating temperature
falls. The design pressure is calculated from the operating temperature using the
formula shown on the form. You can modify the temperature ranges (upper and
lower limit) as well as parameters A and B.
Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the Design

Temperature - Increase field was used. This field has now been replaced
by the Design Temperature Specifications form. If projects created using
these earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A and B are
automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified.
Pumps
In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for pumps:
X X

Pump Overdesign Factor
The pump overdesign factor is used by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to
increase the volumetric throughput of the pump and the power requirement of the
pump. The total volumetric flow rate calculated from the simulator information is
multiplied by the value provided in this field to estimate the design flow rate for
the equipment.
For example:
o Operation flow rate: 250 GPM
o Pump overdesign factor: 1.1
o Calculated design capacity: 250 X 1.1 = 275 GPM
Compressors
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for compressors:
X X
Driver Type
Specifies the driver type used for compressors. The default value is None. The
selections are NONE, GAS ENGINE, MOTOR, TURBINE.
Heat Exchangers
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for heat exchangers:
X X
Furnace Fractional Efficiency

The furnace duty obtained from the simulator is the absorbed duty. Total fired
duty is obtained by dividing the absorbed duty by fractional efficiency. This value
should be <1.0.
Fuel Heating Value
The Lower Heating Value (LHV) used to estimate the fuel consumption by fired
furnaces.
Air Cooler Inlet Temperature
This field represents the default value that shall be used as the inlet air
temperature in the case of Air Coolers.
Air Cooler Exit Temperature
Air Cooler Exit Temperature is used when estimating the surface area of air cooled
heat exchangers. The value given in this field is used as the exit temperature for
the air cooler.
If the field is empty or has value of 0.0, then the Sizing Expert assigns the exit air
temperature value to be 10.0 DEG F greater than the inlet air temperature.
For example, if the Air Cooler Inlet Temperature is 77.0 DEG F and you do not
enter the Air Cooler Exit Temperature, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses 87.0
DEG F as the default value.
Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure
In the design of shell and tube heat exchangers, design engineers sometimes
apply the 2/3rd rule in calculating the design pressure. As per ASME heat
P
P
exchanger code, if the design pressure of the lower-pressure side (either tube or
shell) is at least 2/3rd the design pressure on the high-pressure side, then

overpressure in the high-pressure side will not result in rupture in the
lower-pressure side (provided relief devices have been properly sized).
When specified, the 2/3 rule will increase the design pressure of the low pressure
side to at least 67% of the design pressure of the high pressure side, even when
the operating pressure on the low pressure side could result in a lower design
pressure as per the Design Pressure field.
Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor
The calculated heat transfer area is multiplied by the value given in the field.
The mechanical design is performed for the final heat transfer area.
For example:
o Calculated surface area = 1000 SF
o Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor = 1.1
o Surface area used for mechanical design: 1000 X 1.1 = 1100
SF
Note: The final surface area in general is greater than the calculated
value because of mechanical considerations.
Towers
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria on the Towers form
X X
(applies to all towers):

Bottom Sump Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that required for
separation is provided at the bottom for liquid level and reboiler return.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.
R/R-Minimum (For SHORTCUT model in Pro/II)
The SimSci simulator shortcut distillation model calculates the number of
theoretical stages required for different ratios of operating reflux ratio (R) to
minimum reflux ratio (R-Minimum).
The number of stages should be available in the simulator report for the ratio
chosen.
Vapor Disengagement Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that required for
separation is provided at the top for vapor disengagement before passing to the
condenser.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.
Packed Towers
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for packed towers:
X X
Packing Type
Two types of packings, random and structured, are used in packed towers. The
type of packing affects the flood point pressure drop estimation and the packing
efficiency (HETP) value.

The value in this field is used by the Sizing Expert in the calculation of the tower
diameter and height.
Packing Factor for Packings
Packing factor is used in the Kister and Gill correlation to estimate pressure drop
at the flood point. Once the pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated
using the latest versions of the generalized pressure drop correlation (GPDC)
charts for both the random and structured packings.
Packed Tower Derating Factor
With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predict higher
flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such discrepancies, an
empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating factor is multiplied by the
predicted flood vapor load or liquid load obtained from the traditional equation to
obtain the actual or derated flood load for the given system.
The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of the
system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating factor.
If you do not enter a value, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses 1.0 as the
derating factor.
Packed Tower Flooding Factor
Packed towers are usually designed for 70 to 80 percent of the flood point velocity.
This allows a sufficient margin for uncertainties associated with the flood point
concept and prediction and to keep the design point away from the region at which
efficiency rapidly diminishes (just below the flood point).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided value is not
available.
HETP
The concept of HETP (height equivalent of a theoretical plate) enables comparison
of efficiency between packed and plate columns. Because there are only a few
variables that significantly affect HETP and due to the unreliability of even the best
mass transfer models, rules of thumb for HETP successfully compete with the
mass transfer models.
For the packing types available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (given in the
Icarus Reference), Aspen Process Economic Analyzer estimates the HETP value
based on the packing shape, dimensions and type of material. If a user-provided
value is available, then the Sizing Expert uses the value in the above field for
calculating the height of the packed tower.
Packed Section Height
The value represents the height of each packed section and is used in the design
of packed towers to estimate the number of packed sections.
Surface Area Per Unit Volume
Higher specific surface areas (surface area per unit volume) increases vapor-liquid
contact area and therefore, efficiency. For structured packings, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer determines this value empirically and uses it in estimating
HETP if you have not already specified an HETP value.
A default value of 75 SF/CF is used in the absence of a user-entered value.
Trayed Towers
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for trayed towers:
X X
Trayed Tower Flooding Factor

Flooding is the condition where pressure drop across a tray is sufficient to cause
the dynamic liquid head to be equivalent to the tray spacing plus the weir height.
At this point, the liquid backup in the downcomer is just at the point of overflowing
the weir on the plate above. When this happens, the column fills with a foamy
liquid and becomes inoperable.
The flood factor is the fractional velocity approach to flooding, that is,, (Actual
Vapor Velocity)/(Vapor velocity at the point of flooding).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided value is not
available.
Foaming Tendency
Vapor disengagement is easy in non-foaming, low-pressure systems. However,
vapor disengagement from downcomer liquid in foaming systems is difficult as the
liquid hangs on to the entrained vapor. Sufficient residence time must be provided
in the downcomer to allow adequate disengagement of vapor from the descending
liquid. Industrial practice has created a guideline for the mum downcomer velocity
of clear liquids based on their foaming tendency.
The following values for the downcomer liquid velocity are used based on the
choice for the above field.
Downcomer Liquid Velocity, (FPS)

Tray Spacing, INCHES
Foaming
18 24 30
Tendency
Low 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7
Moderate 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 - 0.6
High 0.2 0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 - 0.3

flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such discrepancies, an
The trayed derating factors are often related to the foaming tendency of the
system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating factor. If the
user-specified value is not available, a derating factor is selected based on the
value of foaming tendency.
The default value for foaming tendency is Moderate.
Trayed Tower Derating Factor
flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such a discrepancy, an
The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of the
system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating factor.
If the user-provided value is not available, or the value 0.0 is entered in the field,
then the derating factor is selected based on the foaming tendency of the liquids in
the column.
Relative Volatility of Key Components

The number of theoretical stages for a trayed tower is obtained from the simulator
report. The actual number of trays is calculated by using the tray efficiency value
provided by the user in the design criteria file.
However, if the field is empty or has a 0.0 value, the tray efficiency for the
separation is estimated by using the correlation of relative volatility of key
components with tray efficiency. The OConnell correlation is used to estimate the
overall tray efficiency.
Tray Efficiency
Overall column efficiency is defined by:
E_oc = N_t/ N_a
where:
N_t = Number of theoretical stages required for the separation minus the
sum of theoretical stages provided by the reboiler, condenser, and intermediate
heat exchangers.
N_a = Number of actual trays in the column.
Several empirical correlations are available in the literature. Also, rigorous
theoretical predictions based on gas and liquid film resistances are available to
assist in predicting the tray efficiency.
If the user specification is not available for the field, then the value is estimated
using empirical correlations from the literature.
Configurations Towers
Use this form to specify design criteria for tower configurations.
Vessels
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria on the Vessels form
X X
(applies to all process vessels):

Residence Time
The amount of liquid holdup in the vessel is estimated by the liquid volumetric flow
through a vessel in a specified amount of time. The vessel volume divided by
volumetric flow rate is defined as the residence time for the vessel.
For example:
o Liquid flow through the vessel: 100 CFM
o Residence time: 5 MIN
o Calculated liquid volume in the vessel: 100 CFM X 5 = 500 CF.
Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio (For Vertical and
Horizontal Vessel Design)
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer defaults for this field are used if the field is
empty or has the value of 0.0. The Aspen Process Economic Analyzer defaults
depend on the operating conditions for the vessel. Based on the operating
pressure of the vessel obtained from the simulator report, the following values are
used:
Pressure (PSIA) Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
0 250 3
250 500 4

> 500 5
For example:
o Vessel operation pressure: <250 PSIA
o Diameter: 6 FEET
o Calculated vessel height: 6 X 3 = 18 FEET
o Residence time overrides Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio.
Minimum Vessel Diameter
The Minimum Vessel Diameter field is used if the vessel diameter calculated by
the sizing routines is less than this value.
Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method
When sizing vertical and horizontal vapor liquid separators, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer computes the maximum allowable vapor velocity using the
method selected in this field.
o Liquid Entrainment Method:
This is an empirical correlation developed by Watkins and is a
function of vapor and liquid densities, and the parameter Kv,
which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid flows
and densities.
o Particle size separation method:
This method estimates the disengagement velocity of the liquid
droplet in the continuous vapor phase. The design velocity is
determined as a percentage of the disengagement velocity.
Average Liquid Particle Diameter (For particle size separation
method)
This field specifies the default average liquid droplet diameter. This value is used
in the design of horizontal and vertical vessels by the particle size separation
method (which can be selected in the Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method
field right above this field).
Design Factor Multiplier for Disengagement Velocity (For particle
size separation method)
This field is used in the calculation of the maximum allowable design velocity,
which is a percentage of the disengagement velocity.
For example:
o Disengagement velocity : 10 FEET/SECOND
o Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity: 0.5
o Maximum allowable design velocity: 10 X 0.5 = 5
FEET/SECOND
Separation Factor (For liquid entrainment method)
In the liquid entrainment method, the separation factor is used to determine the
maximum allowable vapor velocity. The separation factor is either entered by the
user in this field or computed by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer using the
relation described in the vessel sizing design procedure.
Agitated Vessels
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for agitated vessels:
X X

Agitator Type
The various types of agitators that can be chosen for design are described in the
Icarus Reference. The type of agitator selected determines the default driver
power and impeller speed. This is used to estimate the agitation requirements in
tanks.
Storage Vessels
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for storage vessels:
X X
Number of Holding Days

Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid required for
a certain period of operation. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses this field to
determine the liquid volume stored in the vessel.
For example:
o Inlet flow rate: 500 CF per day.
o Number of holding days: 30 (specified by user).
o Liquid volume inside the storage vessel: 500 X 30 = 1,500 CF.
Holding Hours in a Day
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid required for
a certain period of operation. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses this field to
determine the liquid volume required per day.
For example:
o Inlet flow rate: 500 CFH.
o Holding Hours in a Day: 24 (specified by user).
o Final volume per day : 500 X 24 = 12,000 CF/day.
Storage Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
Once the volume of the storage vessel is determined based on the process
fluid flow rate and design conditions, the actual dimensions (height and
diameter) of the equipment must be estimated. You can specify the
dimensional requirements of the equipment using this field.
A default is used if the field is empty or has value 0.0. The default depends on
the operating conditions for the vessel.
Vapor Free Space (% of Total Storage Vessel Volume)
A percent volume of the sized vessel in excess of the required liquid
volume.
Horizontal Vessels
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for horizontal vessels:
X X
Vapor Area /Cross-Sectional Area

Once Aspen Process Economic Analyzer calculates the maximum vapor velocity,
the velocity and flow rate are used to determine the vapor space required. The
vapor space is then divided by the vapor area /cross-sectional area to get the total
required cross-sectional area.

The process vessel height to diameter ratio overrides this field.
Separation Factor Multiplier
For horizontal vessels, the separation factor is normally higher under similar
operating conditions than for vertical vessels. Therefore, the calculated separation
factor is multiplied by the separation factor multiplier.
Minimum Boot Length
When horizontal vessels are used for three phase separations, the heavy second
liquid phase is removed in the drip leg situated at the bottom of the vessel.
Minimum Boot Diameter
This field represents diameter of the boot leg which is designed to remove the
heavy second liquid.
Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
The bootleg cross-sectional area is estimated using the liquid velocity field
specified in this field and the process vessel height to diameter ratio.
Vertical Vessels
Common, page 86), you can enter the following design criteria for vertical vessels:
X X
Minimum Disengagement Height

This is the height from the liquid level to the mist eliminator.
Minimum Height Above the Mist Eliminator
Used in the calculation of the total vessel height.
Height of Mist Eliminator
Height of mist eliminator section.
Minimum Ht. Btw Low and High Liquid Level Taps
The liquid level based on residence time should meet this minimum specification.
(Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
Ht. Btw Inlet Nozzle and High Liquid Level Tap
Represents the height between the inlet nozzle (center line) and the high liquid
level tap. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
Ht. Btw Low Liquid Level Tap and Tangent Line
Represents the height between the low liquid level tap and the tangent line. (Field
is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
Miscellaneous
Vibrating Screen Feed Material
This field specifies the solid material type used by solids handling equipment. The
material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined as the amount of
solids (TPH) flowing through one square foot of screen cloth based on material,
having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50% or more open area; 85%
screen efficiency.
Based on the choice made for this field and the screen opening size, the screen
unit capacity is estimated.
The following choices are available for this field:

o Sand and Gravel
o Limestone/Crushed Stones
o Coal
o Cinders
o Coke
o Wood
Cyclone Inlet Linear Velocity
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity of 150
FPS. You can enter a different velocity here.
Configurations Flash
Use this form to specify design criteria for flash configurations.
Utility Specifications
Most chemical processes require heating or cooling process utility fluids to operate. In
many cases, the choice of which utilities are used plays an important role in
determining the total project cost by defining heat transfer equipment sizing. In
addition, utility costs form an important part of the operating costs of the plant.
In the design of heat exchangers and reboilers, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
permits you to select appropriate process utility fluids for the application. You can
select utility fluids from the list already present in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
can create your own based on utility fluid classes allowed by Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. Once the utility resource for the equipment is selected either by you or by
the Sizing Expert, then an actual utility process stream is created for the equipment.
The utility stream contains the amount of utility used by the equipment. During the
operating cost evaluation, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer processes all the utility
streams connected to the equipment to determine the utility cost for every utility
resource used in the project.
You can override these selections by a combination of disabling/enabling appropriate
utilities and re-mapping and re-sizing the equipment items. Alternately, you can
specify the desired utility in the interactive Sizing Expert. This method is available
even if the utility has been disabled.
To modify or create a utility stream:
1 Right-click Utility Specifications in the Project Basis views Process Design
folder.
The Develop Utility Specifications dialog box appears.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides 11 default utility streams resources:
Cooling Water
High Temp Heating Oil *
Low Temp Heating Oil **
Refrigerant Ethane
Refrigerant - Ethylene
Refrigerant - Freon 12
Refrigerant - Propane
Refrigerant - Propylene
Steam @165 PSI
Steam @100 PSI
Steam @400 PSI
* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E.
To modify an existing utility stream:

Highlight it on the Modify Existing Stream list and click Modify.
To create a new utility stream:

1 Click Create in the Option section.
2 In the Create New Utility Stream section, type the name and select one
of the following fluid classes:
High Temp Heating Oil *
Low Temp Heating Oil **

Refrigerant Ethane
Refrigerant Ethylene
Refrigerant Freon 12
Refrigerant Propane
Refrigerant Propylene
Refrigerant 50 Utility
Steam
Water
* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E.
3 Click Create.
4 Enter or modify the specifications on the Utility Specifications form.
The form contains the following fields:

Description:
Describes the utility fluid resource in the sizing report generated by Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer. Also, the field value is used to represent the utility fluid usage and
its related cost on the Project Summary investment analysis spreadsheet
(PROJSUM.ICS).
Fluid:
Determines the type of utility fluid described by the current specification. The fluid
class is used to determine the heat transfer coefficient, fouling tendency and related
thermal and transport properties used by Sizing Expert.
Design Temperature
Specifies the temperature, which will be considered in the estimation of the design
temperature for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.
Design Pressure:
Specifies the pressure, which will be considered in the estimation of the design
pressure for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.
Inlet temperature:
Provides the inlet temperature for the utility fluid.

Exit temperature:
Provides the exit temperature condition for the utility fluid.
Pressure:
Provides the operating pressure for the utility fluid.
Energy transfer per unit mass:
Specifies the amount of energy provided or removed by the utility fluid over the
specified temperature range. The value in this field is used to estimate the amount of
utility required for the given process conditions.
Unit Cost:
Provides the cost value used to estimate the utility cost for the project.
Unit Cost Units:
Provides the units for the value provided in the unit cost field.
When you specify a new utility fluid resource, all the information on the specification
form must be provided; otherwise, the Sizing Expert will not be able to use the utility
fluid resource properly.
Using the utility specification form, you can specify a maximum of 20 utility fluids.
If different utility fluid resource was used by simulation, then it is added to the utility
resource in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
Utility type:
Describes the usage of the utility fluid. Select either Heat source or Heat sink.
Click OK when done entering the utility specifications.
Investment Analysis
Investment Parameters
To specify parameters required for investment analysis:
1 Right-click Investment Parameters in the Project Basis views
Investment Analysis folder.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Investment Parameters in the Main
Window.
A description of the parameters follows.
General Investment Parameters
Period Description
This field lets you enter text indicating the name/description of a period. The period is
defined in Number of Weeks per Period. The period description is used in the display
of some of the results in the spreadsheets.
Number of Weeks per Period

The period used for investment analysis is defined in terms of number of weeks.
Number of Periods for Analysis

The number of periods to include in the cashflow and other project totals and
calculations.
Tax Rate
The tax rate for investment analysis, in terms of percent per period, is used to
calculate the percentage of earnings before taxes that must be paid to the
government.
Desired Rate of Return

The desired rate of return, in percent per period, for the investment.

Economic Life of Project
This field indicates the length of time in terms of periods over which capital costs will
be depreciated.
Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)

This number indicates the approximate worth of capital costs at the end of the
Economic Life of Project. The number is expressed as a percent of initial capital cost.
Depreciation Method
There are four depreciation methods allowed in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. The
description of each follows:
Straight Line The straight line method is used most commonly. In this method, the
Salvage Value is subtracted from the Total Project Cost. This result is then divided by
the Economic Life of Project, so that the project is depreciated evenly over its
economic life.
Sum of the Digits When this method is used, the Depreciation Expense decreases
during each period of the Economic Life of Project. Therefore, the highest value for the
depreciation occurs in the first period and decreases every period thereafter. The sum
of the digits multiplier is n/((N(N+1))/2), where N is the Economic amount is the Total
Project Cost less its Salvage Value. For the duration of the projects economic life, this
factor is multiplied by the depreciable amount.
Double Declining (Balance) When this method is used, the project is depreciated in
geometric increments. The multiplier for the first period is 2/N, where N is the
Economic Life of Project. For the second period the depreciation rate, D2, is (1-D1)D1
where D1 is 2/N. For the third period, the depreciation rate, D3, is (1-D1)D2. For the
fourth period, the depreciation rate is (1-D1)D3. These factors are multiplied by the
Total Project Cost. This process (multiplying the factor by the capital cost) continues
until the Straight Line Method produces a higher value for the depreciation. When the
Straight Line Method produces a higher value, this higher value is used for the
remaining depreciation calculations.
Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS) The ACRS approach assumes that
operations begin during the second half of the first period and stop during the first half
of the last period. Therefore, as a result of the two half-periods (one at the beginning
and one at the end of the operating cycle), it takes 6 periods to depreciate a project
which has an Economic Life of 5 periods. The ACRS adapts the Double Declining
Balance Method to the half-life system. The depreciation rate for the first period, D1,
is 2/N, where N is the Economic Life of Project. However, the half-life convention
reduces this factor to 1/N. For the second period the depreciation rate, D2, is D1(1-1/
N). For the third period the depreciation rate, D3, is D1(1-1/N-D2). This process
(multiplying the factor by the Total Project Cost continues until the Straight Line
Method produces a higher value for the depreciation. When the Straight Line Method
produces a higher value, this higher value is used for the remaining depreciation
calculations.
Escalation Parameters
Project Capital Escalation

This number indicates the rate at which project capital expenses may increase
expressed in percent per period. If the addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)
period and start-up period is greater than one whole period, Project Capital Escalation
is used to escalate the capital expenses for periods beyond the first period.

Products Escalation
This is the rate at which the sales revenue from products of the facility is to be
escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
Raw Material Escalation

This is the rate at which the raw material costs of the facility are to be escalated
(increased) in terms of percent per period.
Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation

This is the rate at which the operating and maintenance costs of the facility are to be
escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period. The operating labor costs include
operators per shift and supervisory costs.
Utilities Escalation
User-entered percentages reflecting the anticipated utility price increase each period.
Project Capital Parameter
Working Capital Percentage

The working capital expressed as a percentage of total capital expense per period
indicates the amount required to operate the facility until the revenue from product
sales is sufficient to cover costs. It includes current assets such as cash, accounts
receivable and inventories. When the facility starts producing revenue, this cost item
can be covered by the product sales.
Operating Costs Parameters
Operating Supplies
This field indicates the cost of miscellaneous items that are required in order to run
the plant in terms of cost per period.
Laboratory Charges
This is a cost per period indicating the cost of having product analyzed each period.
Operating Charges
This includes operating supplies and laboratory charges. It is specified as a percentage
of the operating labor costs. (If you specify a value for either Operating Supplies or
Laboratory Charges, the system will add the two entered values and calculate the
percentage of Operating Labor Costs. (This is done for compatibility with earlier
releases of the system.)
Plant Overhead
This field consists of charges during production for services, facilities, payroll
overhead, and so on. This number is specified as a percent of operating labor and
maintenance costs. This number should not be used for the construction of the facility,
only for operation after start-up.

G and A Expenses
This represents general and administrative costs incurred during production such as
administrative salaries/expenses, R&D, product distribution and sales costs. Specify
this number as a percentage of subtotal operating costs.
Facility Operation Parameters
Facility Type
This field defines the facility type. The following types are currently available:
Chemical Processing Facility
Food Processing Facility
Oil Refining Facility
Petrochemical Processing Facility
Pharmaceutical Facility
Pulp and/or Paper Processing Facility
Specialty Chemical Processing Facility (A specialty chemical is defined as a chemical
which is produced in low quantity and has a usually high price per unit.)
The type of facility affects the number of operators/shift and maintenance costs of
facility equipment.
Operating Mode
This refers to the operating mode of the facility. The available options are:
Continuous Processing - 24 Hours/Day
Continuous Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
Batch Processing - 24 Hours/Day
Batch Processing - 1 Batch per Shift
Batch Processing - More than 1 Batch per Shift
Intermittent Processing - 24 Hours/Day
Intermittent Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
The operating mode of the facility affects the number of operators/shift and
maintenance costs of facility equipment.
Length of Start-up Period

After the facility has been constructed (that is,, gone through engineering,
procurement and construction), the plant must go through the owners start-up period
until it starts producing the product to be sold. This period is referred to as Length of
Start-up Period in weeks and is added into the EPC duration.
Operating Hours per Period

This field refers to the number of hours per period that the plant will be operating.

Process Fluids
Process Fluids indicate the types of fluids involved in the process. The selection affects
operating and maintenance costs. The selections are:
Liquids
Liquids and Gases
Liquids and Solids
Liquids, Gases, and Solids
Gases
Gases and Solids
Solids
Operating Unit Costs

To specify operating unit costs:
1 Right-click Operating Unit Costs in the Project Basis views Investment
Analysis folder.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Operating Unit Costs in the Main
Window.
The Operating Unit Cost form specifies Labor Unit Costs and non-heat transfer Utility
Unit Costs.
Labor Unit Costs are given for Operators and Supervisors. The total cost of operating
labor is calculated by:
Determining the total number of operators and supervisors necessary to run the
facility for a certain number of hours.

Adjusting that number for the number of hours the facility operates per period.
Multiplying that number by the respective Labor Unit Costs and adding them together.
Labor Unit Costs
Operator
The loaded wage rate paid for operating the facility in terms of the cost per operator
per hour. Operator labor includes labor that is associated with operating the facility.
Supervisor
The loaded wage rate paid for supervision in terms of the cost per supervisor per hour.
Supervision includes all labor associated with overseeing personnel who operate the
facility.
Utility Unit Costs

The non-heat transfer utility unit costs are also specified in this file as over the fence
costs. Utilities used for process heating and cooling are given in the Utility
Specifications File.
Electricity
The unit cost per KWH of electricity used for the facility.
Potable Water
The potable water unit cost per MMGAL or MB used for the plant.
Fuel
The fuel unit cost per MMBTH or MEGAWH used for the plant.
Instrument Air
The instrument air unit cost per KCF or MB.
Raw Material Specifications

An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to provide an accurate figure
for total project expenditure. Since operating costs are usually a large part of this cost,
it is important to accurately account for all raw materials consumed in the process.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you identify simulator streams as raw materials
for the process.
The raw material costs will be directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS spreadsheet for use
in cash flow analyses.
To develop raw material specifications:

1 Right-click Raw Material Specifications in the Project Basis views
Investment Analysis folder.

The Develop Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
3 In the Option section, click the Create option button.

4 In the Create New Stream section, type a name for the stream.
5 Select the Basis and the Phase for the stream.
6 Click Create.
The Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
The following input information is required in order to estimate the raw material costs
during the evaluation of the operating costs for the project: Process Stream (or
none if user-defined); Rate (do not specify a rate if a process stream is selected);
and Cost Per Unit.
In addition to the above minimum information, you have to specify certain field values
for the raw material fluid program to estimate the raw material rate necessary for the
cost estimate.
If you specify none in the Process Stream field, then the value for the Rate field
must be specified in the appropriate units. If you specify a process stream, then the
program determines the raw material rate in the desired Specification Basis and units.
You can specify a maximum of 150 raw material streams.
The Raw Material Specifications form contains the following fields:

Description
The value you provide in this field will be used to describe the raw material in the
Project Summary investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS)
Specification Basis
This field describes the raw material properties from the following list:
Mass, Gas
Mass, Liquid
Mass, Solid
Volume, Gas
Volume, Liquid
Volume, Solid
Energy
Process Stream
This field provides a list of fluid streams present in the current project. You can select
any stream to represent the raw material. Also, there is a provision in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer for you to provide actual value for the raw material rate if none of
the process streams represent the raw materials for the project. In this case, you
must specify the field value as none.
Rate
This field gives the total rate of raw materials consumed for the process in the desired
rate units.
When a new raw material fluid is specified, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer checks
whether enough information has been specified to estimate the raw material cost.
Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current raw material. The choices
available for the field vary with the selection made for Specification Basis and your
choice of Base UOM:
Specification Basis I-P METRIC
Mass, Gas LB/H KG/H

KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Liquid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Solid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Volume, Gas GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH

Volume, Liquid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Solid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Energy BTU/H W
MMBTU/H KW
MEGAW
CAL/H
Unit Cost
This field provides the cost value per unit mass, volume or energy used to estimate
the raw material cost for the project.
7 When you are done entering raw material specifications, click OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop Raw Materials
Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150 raw material streams
using this dialog box. When done, click Close.
Product Specifications
An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to include an accurate figure
for the projects total revenue. In order to do so, it is very important to accurately
account for all the products obtained from the process.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you identify simulation streams as product
materials for the process. Once the simulation stream is defined, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer determines the necessary amount of product materials generated
based on the information provided in the product material specification file.
The product material costs are directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS spreadsheet, where
they are used for further cashflow analyses.
To develop product specifications:

1 Right-click Product Specifications in the Project Basis views Investment
Analysis folder.

The Develop Product Specifications dialog box appears.
3 Select the Create check box in the Options section.

4 Enter a new stream name, select a basis and phase.
5 Click Create.
The Product Specifications form appears.
The following input information is needed for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to
estimate the product material costs during the evaluation of the operating costs for
the project:
Description
The value specified in this field is used to describe the product material fluid in the
investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
Specification Basis
This field describes the product material properties from the following list:
Mass, Gas
Mass, Liquid
Mass, Solid
Volume, Gas

Volume, Liquid
Volume, Solid
Energy
Process Stream
This field provides a list of streams present in the current project. You can select any
of the streams to represent the product material. Also, there is a provision in Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer for providing an actual value for the product material rate
if none of the process streams represent the product materials for the project. In this
case, you must specify the field value as none.
Rate
This field defines the total rate of product materials obtained for the process in the
desired rate units. Do not enter a value if you have specified a process stream.
When a new product material is specified, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer checks
whether the minimum information necessary to estimate the product material cost has
been specified.
The following minimum information must be present before Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer can proceed with the estimate.
Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current product material. The choices
available for the field vary with the selection made for Specification Basis and your
choice of Base UOM:
Mass, Gas LB/H KG/H

KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Liquid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Solid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Volume, Gas GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Liquid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Solid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH

Energy BTU/H W
MMBTU/H KW
MEGAW
CAL/H
Unit Cost
The field provides the cost value used to estimate the product material cost for the
project.
6 When you are done entering product specifications, click OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop Product
Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150 product material streams
using this dialog box. When done, click Close.
Developing Streams
After opening a project, new streams can be developed. You have the option to
develop completely new streams or use an existing stream as a base. When an
existing stream is used as a base, the new stream can be either copied from the
existing stream (Absolute Basis mode) or copied from and linked dynamically to the
existing stream (Relative Basis mode).
To develop streams:
1 Right-click Streams in the Project Basis views main folder (at the
bottom).
2 On the menu that appears, click Edit..
The Develop Streams dialog box appears.

Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream
3 To view or modify an existing stream, select the stream on the Modify
tab. You may need to use the scrollbar(s) to locate a stream if a large
number of streams exist in the project. With the desired stream
highlighted, click Modify to have the stream information displayed in a
specifications form.
The functions of the six buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form are
explained below:
Click To do this:
OK Perform a check on the information currently present in the Develop

Click To do this:
Stream specifications form to ensure that all information needed to
specify the stream is completed. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
generates error messages indicating missing data.
Generate estimates for any specifications not entered.
Save the information in the Develop Stream specifications form. The
Develop Stream specifications form closes and the Develop Streams
dialog box re-appears.
Apply Same as clicking OK, but does not exit the Develop Stream specifications
form. This lets you review the estimates and revise the data.
Update Same as clicking Apply, except that if the Primary Fluid Component, the
Temperature, and/or the Pressure were changed, then all the physical
properties of the stream will be estimated using these new values.
Cancel Exit the Develop Stream specifications form without making checks and
does not save or change any information in the database.
Reset Reset the information in the Develop Stream specifications form to the
values previously saved into the database. Any changes have been made
since opening the form will be lost.
Mixture Define a stream as a mixture. Opens the Mixture Information dialog box
discussed below.
Most Develop Stream specifications need no further explanation. Those that do are
described below.
Primary Fluid Component
One of the most important specifications in this form is Primary Fluid Component,
which is classifies the chemical components of a stream. The fluid selected here is
used as the basis for any properties that are unavailable and need to be estimated to
complete the specifications for the stream. The available general fluid classifications
are:
Alcohol Medium Hydrocarbon Liquid
Aromatic Liquid Miscellaneous Inorganic Liquid
Halogenated Gas Miscellaneous Organic Gas
Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid Organic Acid
Hydrocarbon Gas Very Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid
Inorganic Gas Solid
Light Hydrocarbon Liquid
The following pure components are also available for selection as the Primary Fluid
Component of a stream:
Acetic Acid Glycerol Phosphoric Acid
Ammonia Hydrogen Propane
Argon Isopropyl Alcohol Propanol
Carbon Monoxide Methane Propylene
Carbon Dioxide Methanol Steam
Ethane N-Butanol Sulfuric Acid
Ethanol Nitric Acid Toluene
Ethyl Benzene Nitrogen Water

Ethylene Oxygen
If the Primary Fluid Component is specified, the other needed information will be filled
in with default values. This feature is only apparent when no temperature or pressure
is entered into the Develop Stream specifications form and the Primary Fluid
Component is changed. After changing the Primary Fluid Component, either press
Enter or click another field and the default values will be loaded. If either the pressure
or temperature value is changed from the default value, clicking OK, Apply, or Update
will estimate the properties at the new condition(s).
Base Stream
The Base Stream field contains the name of the stream on which the displayed stream
was based. This cannot be changed.
If the name begins with the character $, the stream was created using Absolute
Basis and the stream name following this character is that of the parent stream. A
stream created using Absolute Basis uses the data from the parent stream; however,
if the parent steams data changes afterward, the Absolute Basis stream is not
updated.
If the value begins with the character @, the stream was created using the Relative
Basis and the stream name following this character is that of the parent stream. A
stream created using Relative Basis is updated when its parent streams data changes.
Description
Select information from the menu to describe the particular stream. For example, you
can indicate the source component of the stream (for example, From Pump P-103) or
tag it with one of the available utility stream names.
Mass Flow
The Mass Flow fields are used to determine the phase of the stream. For instance, if
the stream has only Liquid Mass Flow specified, the stream is totally liquid; therefore,
it will have no vapor properties estimated for it. The reverse is true for a case with
only a Vapor Mass Flow specified. For cases with both types of flow, all properties will
be estimated and the Primary Fluid Component will belong to the phase of the largest
mass flow.
Note: Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically calculates Total Mass

Flow from the individual mass flow values.
Density
The Density fields are required information. Thus, if a particular phase has a mass flow
rate specified, then the corresponding density must also be specified. Clicking Update
will estimate any required density fields based on the flow rate, except in the case of
Solid Mass Density. It is recommended that you enter a Liquid Mass Density if one is
available.
Mixture Specs Dialog Box

Clicking Mixture on the Develop Stream specifications form accesses the Mixture
Specs dialog box.

After you click Apply, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer normalizes the Fraction
values to total a sum of one.
The values shown above would change into the values shown on the next page.
The mixture information specified in this dialog box is used to estimate properties as a
mixture of the specified composition. If no mixture information is present, the stream
is assumed to be pure Primary Fluid Component. The fraction information can be
entered on either a Mass or Mole Fraction Basis, as specified in the Fraction Basis
section.
The Cancel and Reset buttons behave in a similar manner as their respective buttons
on the Develop Stream specifications form.
The OK and Apply buttons also behave in a similar manner as their respective buttons
on the Develop Stream specifications form, except the checking is different. Here, a
check is made to ensure that the fractions have a total sum of one. If not, the values
are normalized to give a total sum of one, as indicated below.
The check also combines duplicate entries into one entry by combining the two
fraction specifications.

After the check is done, the components are sorted in order of decreasing fractional
amount, as shown above. When you click OK, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer loads
into the specifications form the name of the fluid with the highest fraction and the
properties of the mixture generated from the contributions of the individual
components.
Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting

Costs in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
Utility usage estimation is based on the stream information. All the streams that are
present in the project are taken into consideration for the estimation of the utility
usage for the project. This includes all utility streams, user-defined streams, simulator
streams, and pre-map Streams. The Description field on the Develop Stream
spreadsheet can be used to designate streams as utilities. If the Description field for a
stream exactly matches (exact text characters and spaces) the Description field for
any utility resource as given on the Utility Specifications spreadsheet, then that stream
is included in the utility usage calculation. If you change the description field of any of
the simulator or pre-map streams, then the new description you provided is used for
this calculation.
Also, stream connectivity information is used to identify the nature of the stream. If
the stream is being generated then it is considered to be revenue for the project, and
if it is being consumed it is considered an expense. (Note: Streams that are connected
at both ends to process equipment are ignored in estimating the utility usage costs.
Also, utility streams that have a zero unit cost do not show up in the final report.)
User-defined streams that are not connected to any equipment (do not show up in the
PFD) are considered as input streams, that is,, consumption.
System-generated utility streams are included in the utility usage calculation as long
as they are connected to equipment. A case where they would be disconnected would
be if you manually disconnect these streams or if the equipment to which these
streams are connected is deleted.
Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users:
Cooling Water utility resources that need to be accounted in the Analyzer Utility
Model (AUM) should be named as either Cooling Water or Cooling Water xx where
xx can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99, for example, Cooling Water 01.
User-created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example, CW, Sea
Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling water streams and will be
excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.
Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will be assigned to
the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areas assigned to two or more
circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flow rate will be assigned to the first
area in the circuit handling the largest circuit flow rate.
Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dew point of
ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradient will determine
the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure that your specified cooling
water utility resource streams can be made, review the limits for the two cooling water
models (CTWCOOLING and CTWPACKAGED).
Stream Connectivity
Process streams are connected to project components in a real way. You can see this
in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD) that you can display after loading and mapping
simulator blocks. Each stream has a Source end and a Sink end. The Source end

connects to an Outlet port on a component and the Sink end to an Inlet as depicted
below:
In the PFD view, when you Edit Connectivity (see page 167) for the Sink end of a
X X
stream and move the mouse over a component, only Inlet port(s) turn green, thereby
indicating their availability for making a connection to a Sink end.
The same concept also carries into the Interactive Sizing form (see page 214). Only
X X
streams whose Sink ends are not connected are listed in the pulldown for any Inlet.
This explains why the Inlet and Outlet pulldowns will include different streams.
Since the connectivity in the PFD and the Interactive Sizing form are two ways of
looking at the same information, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer tracks your
changes and synchronizes them in both views. Thus, if you change the connectivity in
one view, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically changes it in the other
view.
When you first map and size components, the streams in the simulator will be
connected to the project components and the underlying process conditions of those
streams are available for further use. For example, you may create new streams
based on the properties of any stream, connected or not, then use these new streams
as Sources/Sinks for connecting new components (you might do this to set up spares).
You may also add a New Mapping to an item already mapped and the newly mapped
and sized item utilizes the underlying stream properties.
Creating A New Stream

Streams can be created from scratch or by using a base stream.
To create a stream from scratch:

1 Go to the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box. Without
selecting a stream from the Base Streams list, click Create. (The Basis
selection will not matter.)
The Create Stream dialog box appears.

2 Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream dialog box. This
name must not be the same as any existing streams in the project.
3 Click OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears.
Note: See page 112 and 113 for descriptions of the buttons and fields on this
X X X X
form.
Enter values for the new stream. See page 113 for descriptions of the different fields.
X X
4 When done, click OK.
To create a stream based on an existing stream:

1 On the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box, click the
stream to be used as the base.

Select the Basis mode. If the Basis mode is Relative, the data from the two streams
will be linked so that when the base stream is changed the new stream will inherit
these changes. If the Basis mode is Absolute, the data from the base stream is copied
to the new stream at the time the new stream is created. Changes in a base stream
will not affect a new stream created via Absolute basis.
2 Click Create.
3 Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream window. This name
must not be the same as any existing streams in the project. Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the specifications form for the newly
created stream. The data is that of the Base Stream. Data appears gray (dimmed) to
indicate that it is relative to a referenced Base Stream.

Note: See pages 112 and 113 for descriptions of the buttons and fields on
X X X X
this form.
Even in a Relative Stream, you may override any value with a manual entry. If you do
so, the text turns black, indicating that that value is absolute and therefore no longer
references a Base Stream.
4 Make modifications to the data and click OK.
Deleting a Stream
Note: Only user-added streams and streams added by the Sizing Expert as
utilities can be deleted.
To delete a stream:
1 At the Delete tab view, select the stream to be deleted. You may need to
use the scrollbars to locate a stream if a large number of streams exist in
the currently opened project.
2 Click Delete.
A dialog box will appear asking for confirmation of the delete action.

3 Click OK to delete the stream.
or
Click Cancel to retain the stream.
Specification Libraries
The default specifications are derived from files that you can access, when outside of a
project, from the Palettes Libraries view.
It includes specification files for the following:

Basis for Capital Costs
Cost Libraries (see Chapter 7, Developing and Using Cost Libraries)
Design Criteria
Investment Parameters
Operating Unit Costs
Product Specifications
Project Component Map Specifications
Raw Material Specifications
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs
Utility Specifications
When you create a project scenario, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer selects the
specification file to use based upon the selected units of measure basis. However, you
can right-click any of the above Project Basis specification categories in Project
Explorer, click Select on the pop-up menu, and select a different file from which to
derive the default specifications.
Customizing Specification Libraries

When no project is open, you can create your own specification files or edit existing
files. Then, when in a project, you can select your specification files. For example, if

you frequently created project scenarios that used the same design basis, you could
create a Basis for Capital Costs specification file with those design basis specifications.
Then you could just select this file, instead of entering the specifications every time.
If, after making modifications to your libraries, you want to revert to the original
libraries, you can copy or import the copy of the installed libraries provided in the
following folder:
\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V9.0\Program\Sys\Libraries
Creating a File
To create a specification file:

1 With no project open, go to the Libraries tab view in the Palette and
expand the desired specification category.
2 Except for Investment Parameters and Project Component Map
Specifications, right-click the units of measure basis folder Inch-Pound
or Metric. For Investment Parameters, right-click the Investment
Parameters folder. For Project Component Map Specifications, right-click
the simulator type folder.
3 On the pop-up menu, click New.
The New [Specification Category] dialog box appears.
4 Enter a file name and, if desired, a file description.

5 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the file and displays the specifications in a
separate window.
6 Edit the specifications just as in a project.
7 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file is
open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.
See page 124 for instructions on selecting the newly created specification file to use in
X X
a project.
Modifying a File
To modify an existing specification file:

1 Right-click it in the Palette (Libraries view).
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify.

Importing a File
You can import specification files from elsewhere on your computer or network.
To import a file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), expand the library to which you want to
import a file.
2 Except for Investment Parameters and Project Component Map
Specifications, right-click the units of measure basis folder Inch-Pound
or Metric. For Investment Parameters, right-click the Investment
Parameters folder. For Project Component Map Specifications, right-click
the simulator type folder.
3 On the pop-up menu, click Import.
4 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, locate the file and then click
Open.
The file is copied to the appropriate sub-folder.
Duplicating a File
To duplicate a file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the file you want to duplicate,
and then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.
2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new file.

3 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the file and displays the specifications in a
separate window.
4 Edit the specifications just as in a project.
5 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file is
open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.
Deleting a File
To delete a specification file:

In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the file to be deleted, and then
click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Note: You cannot delete files named Default, only modify them.
Selecting to Use a Different Specification

File
After creating a new specification file, you still need to select it in Project Explorer for
Analyzer to use its specifications.
To select a specification file:

1 In Project Explorer (Project Basis view), right- on the specification
category for which you want to select a new file. On the pop-up menu,
click Select.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a dialog box listing the files available for
the selected category.
2 Select a new file from which to derive default specifications and click OK.
Changing File Directory Location

If you decide to store specification library files in a directory other than the default,
move the default files to the new location and recreate the same sub-folder
arrangement. Otherwise, Icarus will generate an error when you point to the new
location.

4 Loading and Mapping
Simulation Data
Overview
If the process you want to evaluate in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer is based on a
simulator file report from a process simulator software program, the first step, after
creating a project scenario and defining the Design Basis, is to load and map
simulation data.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer supports reports from the following simulators:
AspenTechs Aspen Plus V9
AspenTechs Aspen HYSYS V9
Chemstations ChemCAD for Windows Version 5.3.2
HYSIM Version STD/C.271
SimScis PRO/II with PROVISION Version 5.61
Pacific Simulations WINGEMS 2.0
WinSims DESIGN II for Windows Version 8.17
Preparing Simulation Reports

For Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to load the simulation data, an appropriate
ASCII output report needs to be generated from the simulator. Most simulators
describe the various steps needed to generate ASCII reports. This section provides
additional procedures to generate reports in an Analyzer-compatible format.
Aspen Plus Utilities

If a unit operation block has a utility specified, the utility resource specifications and
usage data will be transferred into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. After loading the
simulator data, a preference screen will appear. Specify any missing data for the
Aspen Plus utilities in order for the Aspen Plus utility to be properly handled. The
Aspen Plus utilities will appear as new utility resources. The appropriate project
components will use the specified utility resource, based on the Aspen Plus utility used
in the simulation.
A message box will appear if utility resources are modified or deleted from the Aspen
Plus simulation prior to a reload of data into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. You
126 4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data

can choose to delete the old imported Aspen Plus utility resources in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer, or just add/update existing imported utilities in Aspen Plus.
Aspen Plus Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer Simulator link
A link from Aspen Plus to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you load changes into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are changed in Aspen Plus.
To load simulator data through the APEA link into a new

project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in Aspen Plus.
Note: If the Activation dialog box appears, click Close. Use the Activation
dialog box to stay in Aspen Plus instead of transferring to Aspen Process
Economic Evaluator.
2 On the ribbon, click Economics | Send to Economics.
When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project name will be
designated to be the name of the simulation file from Aspen Plus. Aspen Plus will
designate the scenario name. If the scenario name is changed, any future attempts to
run the link for the same project will result in a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
project being created. It is recommended that the scenario name designated by Aspen
Plus be left as it is for maximum usability.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of Measure.
5 Click OK.
6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click OK.
The General Project Data dialog box appears.
7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator Data.
8 Click OK.
If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appear to do so.
Define all Aspen Plus units with those available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To load simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into

an existing project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in Aspen Plus.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.
3 Click OK.
Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping and sizing can
be performed at this time.
4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data 127

ChemCAD Report Generation
These instructions apply to both ChemCAD for Windows, Version 5.3.2, and for
previous versions of ChemCAD. The specifications are the same for all versions.
1 On the main menu, on the Output menu, click Report.
Note: In ChemCAD for Windows, just click the Output menu from the menu
bar.
2 Specify the following for report options:
Select Streams
Print All Streams: Y
Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows

Select Unit Operations
Print All Unit Operations: Y
Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows.

Stream Properties
3 Select or deselect the following stream properties as indicated below:
Property Select De-Select
OVERALL PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Temperature X
Pressure X
Mole Vap frac X
Enthalpy X
Molecular wt. X
Total act.dens X
VAPOR PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Vap. Act. Dens X
Vap. Viscosity X
Vap. Cp X
Vap. Thrm. Cond X
Liq. Surf. Tens. X
LIQUID PROPERTIES
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Liq. act. Dens X
Liq. Viscosity X
Liq. Cp X
Liq. Thrm. Cond. X

Property Select De-Select
SOLID PROPERTIES*
Mass flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Density X
PSD X
DISTILLATION OPTIONS
Tray profile X
Tray properties X
Tray sizing X
Packed column sizing X
TRAY COMPOSITIONS
Mass flow rate X
* Solid properties are located on Page 2 of Stream Properties in ChemCAD for

Windows.
The component mass flow rates for individual streams must be included in the output
report.
4 Navigate to the Stream Flowrate/Composition menu under the
Reports/Output menu.
5 Pick Mass Flowrate.
If you want Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to use tray sizing information from the
simulator, then you must include the appropriate sizing information.
6 To do this, go to Distillation Summaries under the Reports/Output
menu; then select the appropriate sizing section (packed or trayed).
7 After the completion of all these specifications, generate the output report
by selecting Calculate and Give Results. This should generate an output
report. You can rename it if you want. This is the file to be used as input
for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
HYSIM Report Generation

1 Copy the following .spc files from the \Program\Load\Hysim directory
to your HYSIM working directory before generating output inside the
simulator.
o MIXER.SPC
o TEE.SPC
o HTXRATE.SPC
o BALANCE.SPC
o CALC.SPC
o MASSBAL.SPC
o MOLEBAL.SPC
For all other operations, use the default .spc files provided by Hyprotech.
2 For HYSIM version 386|C2.12 or earlier, copy the stream format file
STRSUM.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer/Docs directory of your HYSIM working directory. If you have
HYSIM version STD:C2.63 and above, copy the stream format file
STRSUM2.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer/Docs directory to your HYSIM working directory and rename it
STRSUM.FMT. You must either delete or rename the existing
STRSUM.FMT file to perform this.
The output report generated from HYSIM should contain operation output (defined
as spec_sheet in HYSIM) and the complete stream summary. Both of these outputs
must be saved under the same file name. The information is appended to the file and
does not get overwritten.
To generate the operation output and stream summary

(Required):
1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
o operation output
o stream summary
2 On the main menu, click Print.
3 On the print option, click File; then press Enter.
4 Select the same file (file_name) as above; then press Enter.
5 Click the Print option; then press Enter.
6 Select the Stream option; then press Enter.
7 Inside the Stream option, select Summary; then press Enter.
8 The list of streams present in the current project is displayed. Click the <-
> option for all the streams to be written in file_name.
The procedure creates the required report (file_name), which can be loaded into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and used for project evaluation.
If sizing operations are performed inside the simulator and you want the information
to be carried over to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the following steps must be
performed in addition to the above procedure:
1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
sizing summary
2 On the main menu, click Size.
3 Inside the size option, choose the unit operation desired; then press
Enter.
4 Select the particular equipment (for example, col-101) ; then press Enter.
5 Select auto_section or user_section; then press Enter.
6 After the sizing calculations are performed, select Print.
7 Select File; then press Enter.
8 Select the same file name (file_name) ; then press Enter.
9 Click Summary; then press Enter.
Important:
The operation names and stream names cannot contain the following
characters:
+, -, *, or spaces

The ASCII report has to be created in the default units specified by HYSIM
for the ENGLISH and the SI modes of operation. You can run a simulation
in any simulator-provided units. However, prior to creating the report file,
you must convert the units to the default specifications provided by
HYSIM.
During the sizing procedure for the column operation, if user_section is
chosen, care should be taken to check that the stage numbers are not
repeated in the different sections of the same column operation. The
following two examples demonstrate the correct and incorrect
specifications.
Correct Incorrect
user_section_1 : (start stage) 1 user_section_1 : (start stage) 1

(end stage) 10 (end stage) 10
user_section_2: (start stage) 11 user_section_2 : (start stage) 3
(end stage) 15 (end stage) 15
The user_section name should not contain the following characters:

+, -, *
The report format should be such that the width of the report should be
less than or equal to 4 streams wide. This can be accomplished from the
format option provided in HYSIM.
Stream summary should follow the operation output in the report, that
is, the order should be maintained.
HYSYS Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Simulator link
A link from HYSYS to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you load changes into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are changed in HYSYS.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer link into a new Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in HYSYS.
Note: If the Activation dialog box appears, click Close. Use the Activation
dialog box to stay in HYSYS instead of transferring to Aspen Process Economic
Evaluator.
When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project name will be
designated to be the name of the simulation file from HYSYS. HYSYS will designate the
scenario name. If the scenario name is changed, any future attempts to run the link
for the same project will result in a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
being created. It is recommended that the scenario name designated by HYSYS be left
as it is for maximum usability.
3 Click OK.

4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of Measure.
5 Click OK.
6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click OK.
The General Project Data dialog box appears.
7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator Data.
8 Click OK.
If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appear to do so.
Define all HYSYS units with those available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus

link into an existing project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in HYSYS.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.
3 Click OK.
Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping and sizing can
be performed at this time.
SimScis PRO/II with PROVISION Report

Generation
Two methods can be used for generating reports from PRO/II with PROVISION.
You can change the input keyword file (*.inp) to include the required
print options using keywords for those using PRO/II directly
-or-
You can change the print options from within the PROVISION user
interface.
For either method, the operation names and stream names should not contain the
following characters:
+
*
Note: When specifying sidestrippers, each sidestripper must be identified by

a unique four-character name. Currently, sidestrippers are not always
identified by their full user-given names in PRO/II with PROVISION report
files. Sometimes, they are identified by only the first four characters of the
user-given names. Therefore, to properly load sidestripper information into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, sidestripper Unit identifiers (UIDs) must
be used, which are only four characters long.
To prepare the SimSci report in PROVISION:

1 On the Input menu, select Problem Description. Make sure that the
Problem Identifier field is not blank; something must be entered.

2 On the Output menu, select Report Format.
3 On the Report Format menu, select Miscellaneous Data.
4 Set the Report Width field to 80 Columns (the PROVISION default
value).
5 On the Report Format menu, select Stream Properties.
6 Select Molar Flowrate and Weight Fraction.
7 On the Report Format menu select Unit Operations.
8 For each column unit operation:
A On the Unit Operations list, select Column.
B Click the Print Options button while unit is highlighted.
C Select Molar Basis from the Column Summary list.
D From their respective column print options window, select:
o Molecular Weights
o Actual Densities
o Actual Volumetric Flowrates
o Transport Properties
o Flowing Enthalpies
o Standard Liquid Densities
E Click OK.
F Repeat for each remaining COLUMN unit operation in list.
Note: See the note in the KEYWORD section regarding COLUMN sidestrippers
UIDs.
9 Click Close to finish.
10 Use the default options for remaining unit operations.
Using Keywords
For General Print Options, use the following keywords:
Print INPUT = ALL
STREAM = ALL
RATE =M
WIDTH = 80
For COLUMN operations, use the following keyword:
Print PROPTABLES = PART or ALL
Loading Simulation Data

The following loading procedure translates the specified process simulator report file
into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

To load process simulator data:
1 In Project Explorer, Project Basis view, right-click Simulator Type in
the Process Design folder; then click Edit.
The Select Simulator Type dialog box appears.
2 Click a type from the list; then click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a message saying what the new simulator
type is.
3 Click OK.
4 In the Process Design folder, right-click Simulator File Name; then
click Edit.
The Open dialog box appears, showing all simulator files in the Report folder. You
can browse other drives and folders as well.

5 Select a file; then click Open.
Note: The List view now displays the pathname of the selected simulator file
when you select Simulator File Name in Project Explorer.
On the toolbar, click .

-or-
On the Run menu, click Load Data.
A confirmation window appears.
7 Click Yes.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer loads the simulator data.
When the loading of the data is finished, the Process view of Project Explorer is
populated with simulator areas and simulator blocks.

Viewing Data Derived from Simulator
To access simulator-derived data (read-only):
1 Right-click a block, and on the menu that appears, click Modify.

2 Click Cancel to close.
Working with Block Flow

Diagrams
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically generates a Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
from a loaded simulator report. Providing a graphical representation of the process,
the BFD displays computational blocks and their connections.
The blocks in the diagram correspond to tree items displayed in the Project Explorers
Process view. Color-coding of the blocks in both the Process view and the BFD agree;
mapped items are displayed green and unmapped items are displayed yellow.
Displaying the Block Flow Diagram

To display the Block Flow Diagram:
On the View menu, click Block Flow Diagram.

The BFD appears in the Main Window.
Note: You can move a block by clicking on the center of the block and
dragging it to the desired location. This will also move the streams connected
to the block. If the simulator data is reloaded, the block and stream locations
will be regenerated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
In addition to the blocks displayed in the Process view, the BFD displays streams,
direction of stream flows, inlets, and outlets.
The commands on the View menu change when the BFD is active.
The Drag & Find Feature

There is a quick and easy way to find a block on the BFD.
Drag the block from the Project Explorers Process view and drop it anywhere in the
BFD. The part of the BFD displayed changes so that the block you want to find appears
in the upper-left corner of the Main Window.

Drag a block from Project Explorer (Process view) to the BFD
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer finds the block on the diagram
Accessing Commands in the Block Flow

Diagram
Right-clicking on blocks in the BFD accesses the same commands available when you
right-click a block in Project Explorers Process view.
Block commands
Clicking View accesses simulator-derived data (read-only), as shown on page 136.

X X
The Map command and Delete Mappings command are explained in the next
section, Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components, starting on page 147.
Alteration of mapping will alter the blocks' color based on its status.

Stream commands
You can double-click a stream to access the Develop Stream specifications form. This
form is explained on page 112.
X X
Zooming
You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to increase or decrease the
magnification by degrees:
You can also select an exact magnification by using the Zoom dialog box.
To use the Zoom dialog box:

1 On the View menu, click Zoom.
The Zoom dialog box appears.
2 Click the desired magnification, or click Custom and type a percentage

between 10 and 1,000.
3 Click OK to change magnification and close the dialog box.
-or-
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing magnification.
The Zoom dialog box also has two options that affect printing:
Fit into one page
Mark this box to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer re-size the BFD to fit onto one
page when printed. This automatically selects the next option, What-You-See-Is-What-
You-Get, since the screen image will reflect the size required to fit on one printed
page.
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG)
When WYSIWYG is cleared, zooming in or out will only affect the magnification factor
on the screen, while the printer always prints at 100%. However, if WYSIWYG is
selected, the magnification factor on the printer will be changed so that the printed
image will have the same size as the image appearing on the screen.

BlockFlow Diagram View Menu
The View menu contains some options that are only displayed when the Block Flow
Diagram is active
Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page 40 forX X
descriptions of toolbar buttons.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page 27 X X
for description of the status bar.

Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See
page 28 for description of Project
X X
Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See page 33 for
X X
description of the Palette

Properties Window View or hide the Properties Window. See
page 33 for a description of the Properties
X X
Window.
Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See
page 29 for an explanation of Workbook
X X
Mode.
Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for
interactive reports (on-screen, HTML, or

Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation
reports (.ccp). The Project Evaluation
needs to have already been run. See
page 397 and page 424 for details.
X X X X
Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis

spreadsheets. See Reviewing Investment
Analysis on page 433 for instructions.
X X
Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded

simulator data.
Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram. This
command is not active until you have
mapped the simulator items.
Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-
derived stream properties in a
spreadsheet. You can customize some of
the features of the spreadsheet (which
stream properties to display, whether to
display names of the properties, and the
display style of the property values) by
editing the stream list template file:
...\Economic Evaluation
V9.0\Data\ICS\strlist.fil
Grid Visible View or hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments corresponding
to the grid lines when dragging to new
location.
Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation lines. When
displayed, you can see where page breaks
will be when printing.
Ports Visible View or hide ports in the Process Flow
Diagram. Does not apply to Block Flow
Diagram.
Zoom Access Zoom dialog box. See page 140.X X
Mapping Simulator Items to

Icarus Project Components
Mapping is the process of converting each simulator block (that is, model or unit
operation) into one or more Icarus project components.
To map simulator items:

1 If you want to map all items, access the Map dialog box by doing one of
the following:

-or-
On the Run menu, click Map Items.
2 If you want to map a single block or all blocks in an area, do one of the
following:

In Process view, right-click a block or area; then click Map on the
menu that appears.
-or-
In the Block Flow Diagram, right-click a block then click Map on the
menu that appears.
Note: If an item is mapped, its icon is green. If an item is not mapped, its
icon is yellow.
The Map Options dialog box appears.
Select the desired mapping options.

Option Description
Source
Map Selected Unit Map the selected simulator block or the simulator blocks in
Operations(s) the selected simulator area.
Map All Unit Map all simulator items in the project.
Operations
Basis
Last Mapping Map a block according to the last time it was mapped. This

Option Description
option retains only the type of Icarus project component(s)
to which the block was last mapped.
Default Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis, but
override the mapping using specific data in the simulator.
There are several examples where this applies:
1. If this option is selected and a reboiler type is
specified in the unit op, an equivalent reboiler type
will be used in the mapping.
2. If a compressor unit operation is used to model a
turboexpander in Aspen Plus or Aspen HYSYS, the
turboexpander model will be selected during
mapping instead of a compressor.
3. Mapping of Aspen Plus or Aspen HYSYS distillation
columns is based on the section definitions in the
unit op. Thus, if multiple sections are defined in
the unit op, an equivalent column type (for
example, double or multi-diameter) will be used in
the mapping. If only a single section is defined, a
single diameter column will be used in the
mapping.
Users are encouraged to review these recommendations
and either accept them or select a different equipment type
based on their knowledge of their processes and practices.
Options
Size Icarus Project Size the mapped Icarus project component(s).

Component(s) If you are mapping a single item to a single component
that can be sized using the interactive Sizing Expert, the
Interactive Sizing form will appear after mapping.
Otherwise, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses its
automatic sizing.
Although the Sizing Expert is unavailable when sizing
multiple components, you can still use it later (assuming
the component is one of those that can be sized
interactively). Just right-click the mapped component and
click Re-Size on the pop-up menu.
Note: See Chapter 6 for instructions on using the

Sizing Expert.
Custom Sizing If selected, the sizing selection preview appears after the
mapping preview screen so you can edit how the project
components are sized.
Auto Map Streams to The mapped streams and lines will be displayed in the
Lines Mapping list.
3 Click OK.

The Map Preview dialog box appears.
Note: All simulator items are displayed because Map all Items was selected
at the previous dialog box. Those components being mapped have asterisks
next to them.
If you selected Map Selected Unit Operations(s) on the Map Options dialog box,
the Unit Operations list displays just the selected simulator block(s). If you selected
Map all Unit Operations(s), the Unit Operations list displays all simulator blocks.
The Current Map List displays any components that are already mapped to the
simulator block highlighted on the Simulation List.
The Configuration option box is active only for blocks representing column models.

You must use the arrow scroll buttons to see all 12 possible configurations. Selecting a
configuration type automatically fills in the Current Map List with the components
required for that configuration type. See Tower Configurations for more information.
Click Tower Suffixes To indicate
bottoms split bottoms splitter

bot exchanger bottoms exchanger
bottoms pump bottoms pump
cond condenser for the tower
cond acc condenser accumulator
ovhd exchanger Overhead exchanger
overhead split Overhead splitter
ovhd pump Overhead pump
precooler first heat exchanger in split configuration
reb reboiler for the tower
reflux pump reflux pump
Tower main tower
Trim second heat exchanger in split configuration
Other user selectable.
spray cond Spray condenser
spray cond exit pump Pump for recirculating the spray condenser exit
sc tot recycle splitter Splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration that generates
the total recycle stream
sc cooler Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle stream
sc tot recycle trim splitter Trim splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration 2
sc trim Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle stream
4 Select a component.
The Map Preview dialog box now displays the component category's item symbol,
equipment type, and description.

Each component mapped from the block must have a unique name; if another
component already has the default component name, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer prompts you to enter a unique name after you select another component.
5 Click OK to complete the mapping.
If you selected to size the mapped component(s), Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
also performs automatic sizing or, in cases in which a single item is being mapped to a
single component for which interactive sizing is available, the Interactive Sizing form
appears. See Chapter 6, Sizing Project Components, page 208, for information on this
feature.

With the block now mapped, the List view displays the components mapped from the
simulator block.
Component Status
You may notice a "?" in the Status column of a project component mapped from the
simulator block. This indicates that there are still specifications that need to be
entered for the component.
To enter the specifications:

1 Right-click the component.
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify Item.
Entering specifications in the required fields will change the status to OK. Required
fields are indicated by color-coding explained on page 178, under Entering Component
X X
Specifications.
If you do not enter the specifications and the "?" remains in the Status column, the
item will not be included in the project evaluation and will have "0" cost associated
with it. It will not cause SCAN messages.
Deleting Mappings
To delete mappings:
Right-click in the simulator area or simulator block in Process view; then,
on the menu that appears, click Delete.

Tower Configurations
Because a column can be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer requires that you select a tower configuration on the Map Preview
dialog box.
Note: Not applicable to HYSYS columns.
You can select from among twelve possible configurations:

Standard Single

Standard Total
Standard Total w/Circ.
Standard Split
Standard Split Total
Standard Split Total w/Circ.
Full Single
Full Single w.Circ.
Full Split
Full Split w/Circ.
SprayCond Config1 w/Circ.
SprayCond Config2 w/Circ
This term means
Single Tower has one condenser.
Split Tower has multiple condensers.
Total the reflux pump handles the total outlet liquid flow from
the accumulator. In such configurations, the splitting into
a reflux and overhead liquid product occurs after the
reflux pump.
Circ. there is a pump between the bottoms splitter and the
reboiler giving a forced circulation configuration around
the reboiler.
Note: Full configurations include the following equipment not found in

Standard configurations:
overhead pump
overhead product heat exchanger
bottoms product pump
bottoms product heat exchanger
Based on the tower configuration selected, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
automatically creates a model for each tower block and then maps the model to an
Icarus project component. In addition, you can specify how the condenser
requirements should be split between the Precooler and the Trim cooler on the
Design Criteria specifications form.
If subcooling is present, the precooler will completely condense the overhead vapor
and the trim cooler will perform the subcooling; the split specification on the Design
Criteria specifications form will be ignored when subcooling is present.
The following figures display the ten possible configurations. The default item
description suffixes (see page 146) are used to identify the configuration parts, each
X X
of which is mapped to an Icarus project component.

Figure 1: Standard Single

Figure 2 : Standard Total

Figure 3: Standard Total w/Circ

Figure 4: Standard Split

Figure 5: Standard Split Total

Figure 6: Standard Split Total w/Circ.

Figure 7: Full Single

Figure 8: Full Single w/Circ.
Figure 9: Full Split

Figure 10: Full Split w/Circ.

Figure 11: Spray Condenser Configuration 1 w/Circ.
Note: Flow rate of the Spray Cond Total Recycle (SCTR) stream is calculated
using Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates = mSCTR / (mOVH
LIQ PROD+ mREFLUX). Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates
is an input specified in the Design Criteria.
mSCTR = mass flow rate of the SCTR stream.
mOVH LIQ PROD = mass flow rate of the Overhead Liquid Product stream.
mREFLUX = mass flow rate of the Reflux stream.

Figure 12: Spray Condenser Configuration 2 w/Circ.
The duty for the SC COOLER and SC TRIM exchangers are calculated using
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty = QSCTRIM / QCONDENSER B B B
QCONDENSER = QSCTRIM + QSCCOOLER

B B B B B B
where:
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty is an input specified in the Design Criteria
QSCTRIM
B B = Spray Condenser Cooler Duty
QSCCOOLER
B B = Spray Condenser Trim Duty
QCONDENSER
B B = Total Overhead Condenser Duty, obtained from
Simulator Data
Then the temperatures of the streams exiting the Spray Condenser Cooler and Spray
Condenser Trim exchangers are calculated using:
a Q = mCpDeltaT calculation.
Flow rate of the streams exiting the SC Tot Recycle Trim Splitter are determined
using:
SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio = mSCRTSEx1 / mSCCEx B B B B
mSCCEx = (mSCRTSEx1 + mSCRTSEx2)

B B B B B B

SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio is an input specified in the Design Criteria
mSCCE
B B = mass flow rate of the SC Cooler Exit Stream
mSCRTSEx1
B B = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex1
Stream
(this is the one that subsequently goes through the SC TRIM exchanger)
mSCRTSEx2
B B = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex2
Stream
Sizing Selection
This section outlines the workflow of the sizing selection feature available in Aspen
Icarus Process Evaluator. Sizing selection is a mechanism that lets you pre-define
and/or define sizing rules for project components. Specifically, you can set rules on
equipment models or specific project components to be sized with one or more custom
models.
Project Sizing Selection

Typically, you load data from a simulation and then choose to map the simulator unit
operations. In the mapping screen that appears, there is a check box to Review
Sizing Selection. If selected (the default is based on the Tools | Options |
Preferences | Process | Sizing selection on the item-size menu), the sizing
selection appears.
You select any custom model for sizing the project components listed.
If an item is selected, the sizing preview screen appears during a size or
re-size performed on one or more project component(s).
If an item is not selected, the mapping preview screen does not appear for
editing during these steps, but the sizing selection specifications is applied
to the selected project component(s).

Figure 13: Mapping with option to size equipment
If selected, you will see the MapPreview dialog box for a chance to edit how the
project components are sized (see Figure 14).
Figure 14: Sizing Selection preview for specified project components

You can specify the sizing routines (System Sizing and custom models) for each
project component (created by mapping from a simulator or manual creation) that will
be applied during the size-all step.
If a custom model is specified in the current sizing list for a project component, the
project component will be sized in the order shown in the Current Sizing List (see
Figure 14). Any custom models listed will be sized using the custom model tool
automatically without any user-interaction required. After sizing is complete, the
system returns to a ready-state for you to perform additional project tasks.
For Global Sizing Selection information, see page 214.
X X
Specifying Additional
Components
Icarus project components can be added to areas mapped from a simulator report.
However, these project components must initially be added in a user-added area. You
can later rearrange the components in Project Explorers Project view, drag
components from a user-added area to an area mapped from the simulator report.
Follow the instructions for adding a project component on page 174.
X X
If the component you add is process equipment, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
adds an icon representing the new equipment item in the upper left-hand corner of the
Process Flow Diagram (PFD). The next section, Working with Process Flow Diagrams,
includes instructions (see Editing Connectivity on page 167) for connecting an added
X167
component to a stream in PFD view.

Working with Process Flow
Diagrams
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) provide graphical representations of Icarus process
equipment mapped from simulator blocks and the interconnecting streams. You can
edit the layout and connectivity of the mapped items from PFD view. You can also add
streams. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides intelligent port selection, so that
when drawing a stream you see the candidate ports highlighted in green as the mouse
is moved over them.
To access PFD view:

1 On the View menu, click Process Flow Diagram.
2 Use the Drag-and-Find feature to locate any equipment item on the PFD.
3 Drag an equipment item from Project Explorer (Project view) and drop it
on the PFD.
The icon in the PFD that corresponds to the selected equipment will be positioned in
the upper left-hand corner (regardless of magnification).
Editing the Layout

To change the position of an item:
Use your mouse to drag the item to its new position.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer reroutes any streams connected to the item.
To change the route of a stream:

Click the stream; then drag the stream to straighten it or to create an
elbow bend.
Note: If you eventually select Reroute All Streams on the Run menu,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer chooses the most logical routes for all
streams.

Process Flow Diagram View Menu
Note: The View menu contains some options that are displayed only when
the Block Flow Diagram is active.
Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See

page 40 for descriptions of toolbar
X X
buttons.
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See
page 27 for a description of the
X X
status bar.
Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See
page 28 for a description of
X X
Project Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See
page 33 for a description of the
X X
Palette.
Properties Window View or hide the Properties
window. See page 33 for a X X
description of the Properties

window.
Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and
off. See page 29 for an X X
explanation of Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for
interactive reports (on-screen,
HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor
for evaluation reports (.ccp). The
Project Evaluation needs to have
already been run. See page 397 X X
and page 424 for details.

X X
Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis

spreadsheets. See Reviewing
Investment Analysis on
X X
Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of

the loaded simulator data.
Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram.
This command is not active until
you have mapped the simulator
items.
Streams List Display a read-only list of all
simulator-derived stream
properties in a spreadsheet. You
can customize some of the
features of the spreadsheet
(which stream properties to
display, whether to display names
of the properties, and the display
style of the property values) by

editing the stream list template
file:
...\Economic Evaluation
V9.0\Data\ICS\strlist.fil
Grid Settings Access Grid Properties dialog
box, where you can set the grid
increments and select to view or
hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments
corresponding to the grid lines
when dragging to new location.
Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation
lines. When displayed, you can
see where page breaks will be
when printing.
Ports Visible View or hide ports.
Zoom Access Zoom tool. This is the
same as in the Block Flow
Diagram (see page 140). X X
Add Stream Access the Develop Streams

dialog box. See Adding A
Stream, page 169, for details.
X X
Draw Disconnected Stream Access the Disconnected Streams

dialog box. See Drawing a
Disconnected Stream, page 171, X X
for details.
Edit Connectivity Activate the Edit Connectivity
feature. See Editing
Connectivity, page 167, for
X X
details.
Setting Grid Properties

You can select to display grids of any increments. In addition, you can select the color
of the grids and whether to be in Snap to Grid mode.
To set grid properties:

1 On the View menu, click Grid Settings.

The Grid Properties dialog box appears.
2 Set the Across and Down grid increments in the Increments section.
Specify in the Units section whether the specified increments are in
inches or centimeters.
3 Select the Snap to Grid check box to turn on Snap to Grid mode. When
you drag a block in this mode, the blocks bounding outline moves in
increments corresponding to the grid.
4 Click Color to select a grid color.
5 Finally, in the Visibility section, click whether to show or hide the grid.
6 Click OK to apply the settings.
Editing Connectivity
The Edit Connectivity feature lets you make changes to the layout of items in the PFD.
Because this involves connecting and disconnecting streams to ports, the Ports
Visible option should be on, as it is by default.
If the ports are not visible, click the Ports Visible button .
Connecting a Stream to Different Inlet Port

To connect a stream to a different inlet port:
On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or-
On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.
2 Place the cursor over the end of the stream you want to connect to a
different inlet port.
The cursor becomes an arrow.

3 Click the end of the stream.
The cursor now appears as a crosshairs.
4 Move the cursor to another inlet port.
When the cursor is in close proximity to a component, the component's available inlet
ports display green.
5 Click the new inlet port.
Connecting an Added Project Component to a Stream

Project components that you add to the project appear in the upper left-hand corner of
the PFD and are not connected to any streams.
To connect an added project component to a stream:

On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or-
On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.
2 Place the cursor over the added project component that you want to insert
into an existing stream.
The cursor becomes a hand.

3 Click the component.
A bounding outline, representing the component, appears around the cursor.
4 Move the cursor over a stream. Click when you have placed the cursor
over the desired stream.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer disconnects the Sink end of the stream from the
inlet port on the current component, then automatically re-connects it to the inlet port
on the inserted component.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer also creates a new stream, which appears white and
has properties relative to the initial stream. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer connects
the Source end of this new stream to the outlet port of the inserted item and the Sink
and to the inlet port of the original.
The added item can now be sized manually or using the Size Item option, which
either automatically sizes the item or, if interactive sizing is available, accesses the
Sizing Expert. The Sizing Expert, explained in Chapter 6, will utilize the newly
connected streams.
Adding a Stream
From PFD view, you can create a new stream and specify its connectivity. The process
of developing streams is explained in detail under Developing Streams, page 111. X X
To add a stream:
On the toolbar, click the Add Stream button .

-or-
On the View menu, click Add Stream.


To create a stream from scratch, click Create and proceed to Step 3.
-or-
To create a stream based on an existing stream, in the Base Stream
section, click the existing stream; and then click a Basis:
o Absolute If the Basis Mode is Absolute, the data from the base
stream is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is
created. If the data of the base stream is altered at any time after
this point, the data of the new stream remains unchanged.
o Relative If the Basis Mode is Relative, the new streams data is
dynamically linked to that of the stream on which its based. This
means that alterations to the data of the base stream immediately
affect the new stream.
3 Click Create.
4 Type a name in the Stream Name field; then click OK.

The Develop Streams specifications dialog box appears.

5 Make any desired modifications; then click OK.
6 Move the cursor, which appears as a square, to an outlet port.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides intelligent port selection, highlighting the
candidate ports in green.
7 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired outlet port.
8 Move the cursor, which now appears as crosshairs, to an inlet port.
9 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired inlet port.
Drawing a Disconnected Stream

To draw a disconnected stream:
On the toolbar, click the Draw Disconnected Stream button .

-or-
On the View menu, click Draw Disconnected Stream.
The Disconnected Streams dialog box appears.

2 Click a stream; then click OK.
3 Draw the stream as described in the previous instructions for Adding a
Stream.
Working with Streams

Right-clicking a stream accesses a pop-up menu with the following commands.
Use this to
Modify Access the Develop Stream dialog box listing the streams
specifications, which you can modify.
Disconnect Erase the stream from the screen and store it, so that you
can select it when using the Draw Disconnected Stream
feature (see page 171).
X X
Reconnect Source Reconnect the stream to a new outlet port.

Reconnect Sink Reconnect the stream to a new inlet port.
Delete Delete the stream.

5 Defining Project
Components
When developing an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project, you can add project
components in Project view to user-defined areas (areas not mapped from the
simulation report). Once added, you can drag them to different areas. Components are
categorized as follows:
Note: See ICARUS Reference Guide for information on individual components.

Category To define
Process Equipment Equipment for gas, liquids and solids
handling and off-site/packaged systems.
Plant Bulks Material commodities that service a section
of the plant or the whole plant. Plant bulks
are divided into categories: Piping, Civil,
Steel, Instrumentation, Electrical,
Insulation and Paint.
Site Development Modifications that must be done to the site.
Site development items are divided into
categories: Demolition, Drainage,
Earthwork, Fencing, Landscaping,
Roads-Slabs-Paving, Piling and Railroads.
Buildings Civil structures directly involved in the
process or for off-site use.
Quoted Equipment A way to enter special equipment not
found in Process Equipment above.
Unit Cost Library Items from a Unit Cost Library. See
Chapter 7.
Equipment Model Library Items from an Equipment Model Library.
See Chapter 7.
5 Defining Project Components 173

Adding an Area
To add an area:
1 In Project Explorers Project view, right-click the Main Project folder.
2 On the menu that appears, click Add Area.

The Area Information dialog box appears.
3 Define the area, including name, type, and dimensions.

The Area Type determines how equipment will be installed in the area. See Chapter 36
of Icarus Reference Guide for information.
4 Click OK.
Project Explorer now displays the new area.
Adding a Project Component

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides two methods for adding a project
component:
174 5 Defining Project Components

Drag-and-drop
Drag a component from the Palette to an area on Project Explorers Project view and
enter an item description. This adds the component to the area without displaying the
Component Specifications form; the specifications are left to be entered at your
convenience.
Pop-up menu
Right-click an area and click Add Project Component from the pop-up menu; then
select a component from the Project Component Selection dialog box and enter an
item description. This adds the component and also displays the Component
Specifications form, where you can complete the component definition right away.
Method 1: Dragging a Component from the

Palette
To add a component using the drag-and-drop method:
1 With the Palette (Components view) and Project Explorer (Project view)
displayed, drag a component from the components list to an area on the
Project Explorer.
Note: The Recent Items folder in the Components view stores the last 10
project component selections.
2 To drag, click the component and hold down the mouse button.
3 Move the cursor until over the area where you want to place the
component.
4 Release the mouse button.

The New Component Information dialog box appears.
5 Enter an item description (required) and User Tag Number (optional);

then click OK.
The component is added. Project Explorer displays a block for the component under
the selected area. The List view displays general information. You may notice a
question mark (?) in the Status column on the List view. This indicates that there are
still specifications that need to be entered for the component. To enter the
specifications, follow the instructions under Entering Component Specifications on
page 178.
X X
Method 2: Using the Pop-Up Menu

To add a component using the pop-up menu:
1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click a non-simulator area and, on
the menu that appears, click Add Project Component.

The Project Component Selection dialog box appears.
2 Type the Project Component Name.

3 Highlight the category to which the desired equipment belongs (process
equipment, plant bulks, site development, buildings, quoted equipment);
then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a list of sub-categories.
4 Continue to narrow down the selection to a specific component. Click OK.
5 The component is added to the area.
The Component Specifications form is automatically displayed. You can either
complete the definition of the equipment item now or later.

Entering Component
Specifications
After adding a component, you still need to enter at least some component
specifications to complete the components definition. Many component specifications
have default values used when no value is entered, but most component specifications
require further input. If a component added still has any specifications requiring input,
a question mark (?) appears in the status column of the List view for that component.
You do not have to enter specifications immediately upon adding a component; you
may want to wait until more information about a project becomes available.
As more information about a project becomes available, you may also want to modify
previously entered component specifications. The following instructions apply as well
to modifying previously entered specifications.
To enter or modify component specifications:

If the Component Specifications form is not already displayed in the Main Window,
display the form by right-clicking the component and clicking Modify Item on the
pop-up menu. You can right-click the component in either Project Explorer (Project
view) or List view (Area level)
Double-clicking the component also displays the Specifications form.
Color coding
Red Border: An entry must be made in the field. All specifications forms
have at least one required entry field.
Green Borders and Thick Gray Borders: An entry must be made in
either the field with the thick gray border or in the two fields with the

green borders. The field with the thick gray borders and the fields with the
green borders are mutually exclusive. In the form pictured to the right,
either the pump size must be selected or the fluid head and liquid flow
rate must be entered. The Properties Window notes this in the
Description.
Enter the specifications.
Note: While on either the component or installation bulks specifications form,

you can quickly determine the net effect of all your changes by clicking the
Evaluate button and reviewing the resulting report. See page 454 for X X
more information
Fields with red borders are required. If theres a combination of two fields with green
borders and one with a thick gray border, an entry must be made either in the two
fields with the green borders or in the field with the thick gray border.
To define installation bulks for the component:
1 Click the Options drop-down and select the type of bulks to define.
See Defining Installation Bulks on page 180 for a complete description of

X X
installation bulks.
2 After defining the component and installation bulks, save the
specifications form by clicking OK.

Defining Installation Bulks
Installation bulks are items directly associated with the component being defined and
are used to complete the installation of the item, for example, a foundation for a
vessel. The difference between an installation bulk and a plant bulk is that an
installation bulk is associated with a component, whereas a plant bulk services the
whole plant or mill.
You can define Installation bulks when entering or modifying equipment or plant bulk
specifications. Most components are automatically outfitted with installation bulks, so
this feature is typically used to adjust, modify, or delete selected bulks. However,
because quoted equipment is not automatically outfitted with installation bulks, this
feature also serves as the method for defining all installation bulks required for quoted
equipment.
To access installation bulk specifications:
1 Display the Component Specifications form.
2 Click the down-arrow on the Options button .
3 Click the type of installation bulks you want to view or define.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the specifications form for the selected
installation bulk items. See the subsections that follow for descriptions of the different
types of installation bulks.
4 When you are done defining the installation bulk, save your changes in
either of two ways, depending on what you intend to do next:
o If you want to continue modifying this components installation
bulks or component specifications, click Apply to save the
changes. You can now select either Project Component or
another type of installation bulks from the Options menu.

o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to
the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and
close the specifications.

Analyzer return you to the main Component Specifications form after you
click OK (see page 52).X X
Matl/Man-hours Adjustments
Using Matl/Man-hours Adjustments, you can specify percent adjustments of
system-calculated values as follows:
Category Percent adjustment for
Equipment Material cost (COA 100-299)

Setting Man-hours (COA 100-299)
Piping Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 300-399)
Civil Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 400-499)
Steel Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 500-599)
Instrumentation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 600-699)
Electrical Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 700-799)
Insulation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 800-899)
Paint Material costs and/or man-hours. (COA 900-999)
These adjustments compound material and man-hour indexing applied to the same
COAs. User-entered material costs and man-hours (entered using either Quoted
Equipment or Matl/Man-hours% Additions) are not affected by these
adjustments.
A special options section at the bottom of this form lets you specify non-default
installations for the item, including demolition (that is, dismantlement) of the
component and its installation bulks.
For example, to demolish a component item:
To demolish a component:
1 On the Component Specifications form, on the Installation Option
list, click DEML.
Note: Starting with the V8.4 Release of Economic Evaluation, the Installation
Option can be accessed from the main component form. The functionality
remains the same.

Note: The form shown above applies to V7.3.2 and earlier.

Note: The form shown above applies to V8.4 and later.
Selecting the demolition (DEML) option causes the following changes to the
component:
Material costs are set to zero.
Man-hours and labor costs are charged to demolition COAs (for example,
109, 309, 409, and so on)
Piping and civil man-hours are down-adjusted:
o Shop fab man-hours are removed from piping man-hours.
o Civil formwork/bracing man-hours are removed.

2 Go back to the Matl/Man-hour Adjustments form and make the proper
adjustments to account for the relative difficulty of demolition versus new
build.
For example, if you know unsetting the component is 15% easier than initially setting
it, then enter 85% in the Setting labor adjustment field.
3 Save your changes in either of two ways, depending on what you intend
to do next:
o If you want to continue modifying this components installation
bulk or component specifications, click Apply to save the
changes to the Matl Man-hour Adjustments. You can now select
either Project Component or another installation bulk from the
Options menu.
o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to
the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and
close the specifications window.

Analyzer return you to the main Component Specifications form after you
click OK (see page 52).
X X
Matl/Man-hours Additions
Using Matl/Man-hours Additions, you can add lump sum material costs and/or
man-hours to a specified COA. All additions are reported as is. Additions are neither
indexed nor adjusted by Matl/Man-hours Adjustments. Up to 20 additions can be
defined per component.
Pipe General Specs

Use Pipe General Specs to define the rules for developing all installation piping on
the selected component. You can use many fields to define general piping
specifications, such as:
Material
Pressure
Temperature
Installation - above or below grade
Fluid or electric tracing
Flange class and type
Stress relief
Insulation type
Insulation jacket type
Paint treatment
Pipe Item Details

Use Pipe Item Details to specify individual runs of piping and associated fittings,
tracing, paint and insulation. The line is developed using the rules defined in Pipe
General Specs unless they are re-defined with Pipe Item Details. Up to 98 lines
can be defined/adjusted for each component.

Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple items have
been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If Display P&I
Installation Items is cleared on the Preferences General tab , selecting
Pipe Item Details displays a dialog box from which you can select the
item you want to edit or select to add a new item. See page 51 for X X
instructions on entering Preferences.

The component starts with piping depicted in the Piping and Instrumentation Drawings
manual. You can also display the components piping and instrumentation drawing by
clicking the P&ID button on the Component Specifications form.
It displays the piping you are adjusting on the Pipe Details Installation Bulk form.
You can revise the pipe volumetric model for a component line-by-line. Specifications
on the Pipe Item Details Installation Bulk form override the project-, area- and
component-level specifications that otherwise determine the design of all lines of pipe.
For example, area dimensions determine all lengths of lines generated by volumetric
models except those lines for which you enter a specific length.
The Piping Volumetric Model field offers the following options:
blank - Specified pipe only, no volum. model

This option should rarely be used. It is a rapid way to discard the complete piping
model for this item; however, in addition to discarding all of the automatically
generated lines of pipe, this also discards all the associated drains/vents and pipe-
associated instrumentation. The system now generates only piping, drains/vents and
on-/in-line instrumentation for those lines that you subsequently define. Once you
have used this option, the other options below cannot be used because the model is
already discarded. If you subsequently re-create a line that the volumetric model

would have automatically created, the associated on-/in-line instrumentation is
automatically re-created.
A - Add line to pipe volumetric model

This option is used to add a new line of pipe to a component. The number of the new
line must be higher than any other automatically created or user-defined line. For
example, if a component generates lines 1 to 6, then an added line may have the
number 7 to 98. The area dimensions will have no effect on the length of these lines.
It is not necessary to add line numbers in numeric order; however, they will be
generated and reported in numeric order. To associate instrumentation with a new
line, specify that a sensor or control element location is this line number. Line 99 is
reserved for drains/vents.
C - Change lines on pipe volumetric model

This is a commonly used option. It is used to modify automatically generated lines of
pipe; user-specified lines are not changed. The line is generated exactly at it would
have been in the absence of your specifications, except for the items which you
change. You may use this to change only the metallurgy, diameter or length of a run,
or only the valves and fittings (including setting the quantity to 0) or any combination
of these.
D - Delete line on pipe volumetric model

This option deletes a single line of automatically generated pipe and its associated
drains/vents and instrumentation.
R - Replace line on pipe volumetric model

This option replaces the automatically generated line completely with the exact line
that you specify. If you do not define something for this line, you do not get it. For
example, if you specify a line of fixed length containing no valves or fittings, then you
only get the straight-run of pipe.
To make more than one specification for Pipe Item Details:
Click Add.
This adds an item specs column to this form.

To delete any unwanted or unused column(s):
Click any cell in that column (or drag for a range of columns). Click Delete.
Note: Incompletely specified columns must be either completed or deleted

before saving.

Duct
Duct installation bulk items specify individual runs of process ductwork and associated
fittings and insulation. Up to 5 duct lines may be specified for each component. Use
the same methods described for multiple lines of pipe.
Civil
Civil installation bulk items specify bulk excavation and up to three different
foundation types/sizes. The available foundation types are listed in the Icarus
Reference.
From the specified foundation types and volumes, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
calculates:
Excavation and backfill
Form work (plywood/backup lumber with reuse)
Rebar
Sand mat (or ring wall foundation types only)
Grout
Anchor bolts/embedments
Steel
The Steel installation bulk specifies the following:
Ladders
Stairs
Platforms
In addition, up to eight different steel items may be specified.
Instrumentation
Instrument installation bulk items specify individual instrumentation loops or parts of
loops with associated sensors, transmitters and signal cabling. Up to 99 loops can be
defined for each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple instrument
items have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If
Display P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preferences General tab
view, selecting Instrumentation will display a dialog box from which you can
select the item you want to edit or select to add a new item. See page 51 for X X
instructions on accessing and entering Preferences.

The component starts with instrumentation depicted in the Piping and Instrumentation
Drawings manual. You can also display the components piping and instrumentation
drawing by clicking the P&ID button on the Component Specifications form.

It displays the instrumentation you are adjusting on the Instrumentation Installation
Bulk form.
You can revise the instrument volumetric model for a component loop-by-loop.
Specifications entered on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form override the

project-, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise determine the
design of all instrument loops.
The Instrument Volumetric Model field offers the following options:

blank - Specified loop only, no volum. model
This option should rarely be used, It is a rapid way to discard the complete instrument
model for this item. The system now generates instrumentation for those loops that
you subsequently define. To define new loops, you continue to use this blank option
for each successive loop. Once you have used this option, the other options below
cannot be used because the model is already discarded.
A - Add loop to instr. volum. model
This option is used to add a new loop to a component. The number of the new loop
must be higher than any other automatically created or user-defined loop. It is not
necessary to add loop numbers in numeric order; however, they will be generated and
reported in numeric order. For example, if a component generates loops 1 to 6, then
an added loop can have the number 7 to 99.
D - Delete loop on instr. volum. model
This option deletes a single loop, including sensor, transmitter, cable, control center
connections and final control element.
R - Replace loop on instr. volum. model
This option replaces the automatically-generated loop completely with the exact loop
that you specify. If you do not define something for this loop, or you selectively delete
a part, you do not get it. For example, if you specify a sensor and transmitter only,
then you only get the signal generated and sent to the control center.
+ - Append to previous loop w/same no.
This option is used to append extra sensors or control valves to the immediately
preceding, user-defined loop (you must also correctly specify the loop number of the
preceding loop). It may not be used to append items to automatically generated loops;
to do this, you should first use the replace option to redefine the loop, then use the
+ option. Whether you are appending a sensor or control element, you should make
entries for both the sensor and control valve locations.

To define more than one adjustment, use the same methods described earlier for Pipe
Item Details (page 186).
X X
Instrument Loop Adjustment

On the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form, there are eight Loop Modification fields,
which allow you to remove different elements of the instrument loop from the project.
Select - from the drop-down menu to remove an element.
Two of the elements, sensor and control valve, can also be specified as quoted (Q)
or vendor-provided (V) equipment. When either Q or V is selected, the system
includes installation manhours for the element but not material costs.
Deleting the process connection removes all of the instrument piping.

The indicating signal and control signal runs are reported together, so removing one
would decrease the amount of cable and supports by half.
The following diagram shows how the eight adjustable loop elements fit into the loop
design:

Notes:
(A) Junction boxes can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,
JUNC-BOX.
(B) Multi-core runs can be found under PLANT BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION, ELECTRONIC SIGNAL WIRE. You can specify it with or
without the junction box.
(C) Control centers can be found under PLANT BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION, MULTIFUNCTION CONTROLLERS (electronic) or PLANT
BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION, INSTRUMENT PANEL ANALOG (pneumatic).
Electrical
The Electrical installation bulk specifies local equipment lighting, control wiring and
power/cable and motor starters for up to three different types of electrical loads.
Communication and Alarm Systems include:
Note: In Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Communication and Alarm

Systems can be specified only at the Plant Bulk level.
Paging and General Alarm Systems (PAGA)
Telephone Systems
Closed Circuit TV Systems (CCTV)
Area Networking (LAN)
Radio Systems
Access Control Systems
Intrusion Detection Systems
Meteorological Monitoring Systems
The estimate for each system includes:
Equipment Cabinets
Cable Runs
Raceways (Cable Trays)
Junction Boxes if necessary
Field Devices
Monitors if necessary
Mounting Poles if necessary
Public Address and General Alarm Defaults:

Description Defaults used by AspenTech at Project level and Area
level
Public Address General Alarm

(PAGA)
PAGA - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per 150 total devices
PAGA - Raceway Length 30% of the cable length (3 cables per tray)

PAGA - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
made in the LAST AREA electrical specs
PAGA - Cable Run per Item Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
the JB to the field device. 100 + 50 = 150 feet
PAGA - Junction Boxes 1 each per 10 speakers and strobes combined.
PAGA - Outdoor speakers 1 per every 60 ft X 60 ft per level

PAGA - Indoor speakers 1 per every 40 ft X 40 ft per level
PAGA - Outdoor Strobes 1 per every 80 ft X 90 ft per level
PAGA - Indoor Strobes 1 per every 80 ft X 80 ft per level

PAGA - Outdoor Handsets 1 per every 120 ft X 120 ft per level
PAGA - Indoor Handsets 1 per every 20 ft X 20 ft per level will not be estimated if the area
has a Telephone system. (since its already estimated in the
Telephone system)
PAGA - Acoustic Hoods 1 per each outdoor handset
PAGA - Poles 1 pole per 2 outdoor speakers and 1 strobe

Closed Circuit Television
(CCTV)
CCTV - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per project
CCTV - Raceway Length 30% of the cable length (3 cables per tray)
CCTV - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
CCTV - Cable Run per Item Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
CCTV - Junction Boxes 1 JB per camera
CCTV - Cameras 1 camera per area

CCTV - Monitors 1 monitor per 4 cameras (calculated at the LAST area from the
number of total monitors)
CCTV - Poles 1 pole per camera
Telephone System
Telephone - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per project
Telephone - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (8 cables per tray)
Telephone - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Telephone - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Telephone - Junction Boxes 0

Telephone - Outdoor Phones 1 per every 120 ft X 120 ft per level. Will not be estimated if the
area has a PAGA system. (since its already estimated in the
PAGA system)
Telephone - Indoor Phones 1 per every 20 ft X 20 ft per level.
Telephone - Video Conference 1 per administration building (ONLY 1 for the whole project).
Area Network System
(LAN/WAN)
Area Network - Equipment 1 cabinet per project
Cabinets
Area Network - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Area Network - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Area Network - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Area Network - Junction Boxes 0

Area Network - Switches 1 per building
Radio Systems
Radio Systems - Equipment 1 cabinet per project
Cabinets
Radio Systems - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length and 1 cable per tray
Radio Systems - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Radio Systems - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Radio Systems - Plant Radios 6 radios per area

Radio Systems - Marine Radios 0
Radio Systems - Aviation Radios 0
Radio Systems - Antenna/Towers 1 per project
Access Control System
Access Control - Equipment 1 cabinet per project
Cabinets
Access Control - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Access Control - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Access Control - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Access Control - Junction Boxes 1 each per card reader/door operator/controller
Access Control - Workstations 2 per each area

Access Control - Card Readers 2 per building
Access Control - Controllers 1 per gate
Access Control - Door/Turnstile 2 per gate
Operators

Intrusion Detection
Intrusion Detection - Equipment 1 cabinet per project
Cabinets
Intrusion Detection - Raceway None
Length
Intrusion Detection - Raceway None
Width
Intrusion Detection - Cable run per Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
item the JB to the field device. 100 + 50 = 150 feet. Will be always
buried type.
Intrusion Detection - Junction 1 per each pole
Boxes
Intrusion Detection - Workstations 1 per 45 cameras
Intrusion Detection - Detectors 1 per 350 feet of fence

Intrusion Detection - Cameras 1 per 100 feet of fence
Intrusion Detection - Monitors 4 per work station
Intrusion Detection - Poles 1 per camera
Meteorological Monitoring
System
Meteorological Monitoring - 1 cabinet per project
Equipment Cabinets
Meteorological Monitoring - 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Raceway Length
Meteorological Monitoring - 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Raceway Width made in the LAST AREA electrical specs
Meteorological Monitoring - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Run per Station the JB to the field device. 100 + 50 = 150 feet
Meteorological Monitoring - 1 station per project

Weather Station
Structured Cabling for Buildings
Fiber optic cable length 550 meter cable/building (24 fiber armor cable)
Fiber optic cable terminations 2 terminations/building
CAT5 cable length 350 meter cable/building (25 pair OSP CAT5 armor cable)
CAT5 cable terminations 2 terminations/building
Notes:
Icarus estimates the above mentioned devices for each area and adds
all those together after the LAST AREA and reports it with the LAST
AREA.
Icarus estimates grounding costs for the poles.
For buried cable Icarus estimates excavation costs.
Cables are estimated depending upon the number of devices in the
system. Equipment cabinets, Junction boxes are not considered as
devices

Icarus estimates 25 feet cable for each monitor, and work station.
The comm. and alarm systems project level model is always estimated
when the report group is in the ISBL. Even though if the 8 systems are
set to Y at the project level, the report groups which are in the OSBL
does not generate any comm. and alarm systems cost. The user has to
go to the area specs. of the OSBL report group and set each of the
systems as Y. Then only the comm. and alarm systems cost would be
seen.
The building area should be subtracted from the outdoor area and the
outdoor items should be calculated based on this area. If the outdoor
area, open concrete structure, open steel structure area is less than
400 sq. ft then Icarus does not generate any outdoor items. This is
also true with the buildings, if the building area (Length*width*levels)
is less than 400 sq. feet, Icarus does not generate any indoor items.
If the area is less than 400 sq. feet, Icarus does not generate any
CCTV system and Radio system for that area.
There will be ONLY 1 video conference system for the whole project
Icarus estimates Outdoor handsets from the PAGA system and Indoor
handsets from the Telephone system when an Area has both PAGA and
Telephone systems set to Yes.
The calculation for the indoor items like PAGA indoor speakers, indoor
strobes, indoor handsets, CCTV indoor handsets, Switches for Area
network system, Card readers for Access control system should be
different for the different building types. Refer to Buildings below for
details.
If the building area is less than 400 sq. feet, Icarus does not estimate
Switches for Area network system and Card readers for the Access
control system.
For cable in conduit, Icarus estimates the conduit and fittings costs.
Cables are estimated depending upon the number of devices in the
system. Equipment cabinets and Junction boxes are not considered as
devices.
Icarus estimates 25 feet cable for each monitor, work station.
Buildings

Insulation
The Insulation installation bulk specifies insulation and fireproofing for component and
installation bulk steel. For components, the insulation type, jacket type, thickness and
area may be specified. For component and steel fireproofing, type, rating and area
may be specified.
Paint
The Paint installation bulk specifies surface preparation and painting of component
and installation bulk steel. Paint for pipe is specified under piping. Entry field
specifications include:
Size of area to be painted
Number of prime and final coats
Percent of painted area to be sandblasted
Galvanizing (for steel)
Quoted Cost Items

Note: This field is applicable only when used with equipment code of
accounts.
Quoted cost per item type the cost per quoted item
Currency unit for matl cost select the correct currency
Source of quote select the source of the quote
Option Description
SG (Default) System Generated
(blank)
VB Vendor Budget Quote
VBL Vendor Budget Quote Long Lead
VF Vendor Firm Quote
VFL Vendor Firm Quote Long Lead
LQ Licensor Quote
SS Single Source Quote
HD Historical Data
Defining Area Specifications

You can define mechanical design and cost basis specifications for the newly added
area. You can define or modify area specifications.
To define area specifications:

1 Right-click the area in Project Explorers Project view and then click
Modify on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Process Economic Evaluator displays the Area Information dialog box.
2 Select the specification category you want to define:

Select To do this
Area Name Change the area name.
Area Type Specify the area type:
EXOPEN
FLOOR
GRADE
OPEN
PAD
Area Dimensions Specify the Area Dimensions:
Length
Width
Height
3 When you have finished modifying the area, click OK.
Importing Areas and

Components
Using a drag-and-drop operation, you can import entire areas or individual
components from other project scenarios. Select in Preferences whether to also
include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see page 53). By default,
X X
installation bulks are included and connected streams are not.

To import an area or component:
1 Have Project Explorers Project view open, since you will drag the
component or area there.
2 In the Palettes Projects view, double-click the project scenario from
which you want to import. This displays the project areas in the scenario.
3 Expand an area folder to display the components in it.

Note: You can only display the areas and components of a scenario that has
the same units of measure as the current scenario. If units of measure are
different, a message will appear in the Status bar notifying you of this when
you double-click the scenario.
To import a component:
Drag the component to the desired area in Project Explorer, Project view.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the component to the area.
To import an area and its components:

Drag the area to Main Project in Project Explorer.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the area and its components.
To import all the components in an area to an existing

area in the current project scenario:
Drag the area from the Palette to the desired area in Project Explorer.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the components to the area without creating a
new area.
Importing an Entire Scenario

As well as allowing you to import individual areas or components, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer lets you import an entire scenario using a drag-and-drop operation.
This imports all the areas and components in the selected scenario. You can select in
Preferences whether to also include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see
page 53). By default, installation bulks are included and connected streams are not.
X X

To import an entire scenario:
1 Have Project Explorers Project view open, since you will drag the scenario
there.
2 Click the scenario in the Palettes Projects view.
3 Drag the scenario from the Palette to Project Explorers Project view.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a confirmation window.
4 Click Yes.
The areas and components of the selected scenario are imported.
Note: You can only import scenarios that have the same units of measure as
the current scenario. If the units of measure are not the same, a dialog box
will inform you of this when you try to import.
Copying Components
The Copy command copies a selected component and all of its associated installation
bulks. This is useful if you want to add a component which is similar to an existing
item. The item can be copied and modified with less effort than creating a new item.
Remember to change the Item Description when copying components to distinguish
the copy from the original.
To copy and paste a component:

1 Right-click the component in either Project Explorer or the List view (at
area level, so that components are listed), and then click Copy on the
pop-up menu.

2 You can also copy multiple components at once: select the desired
components on the List view, right-click one of the components, and click
Copy on the pop-up menu.
3 Right-click the area to which you want to add the component(s) and click
Paste on the pop-up menu.
The component is added to the area.
Note: If the area contains a component with the same name as the one being
pasted, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer changes the new components
name so that #1# appears at the beginning.
Cut and Paste

If you want to delete (cut) a component from one area and add (paste) it in another
area, use the same procedure as above, except click Cut instead of Copy on the
pop-up menu.
Drag and Drop

You can also move a component from one area to another by dragging it.
Modifying Components
You can modify the following components using Spreadsheet View:
Vessels
Towers
Heat Exchangers
Pumps
Quoted Components
To modify a component using Spreadsheet View:

1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View | <the type of
component to modify>.
The <the type of component to modify> spreadsheet view appears.
2 On the <the type of component to modify>spreadsheet view, click
Options.
3 On the menu that appears, click the option you want to modify.
4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications.
5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.
6 Click OK.
Your modifications are made in the project.
Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open that
would let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.

Copying Areas
Use Area Copy and Paste to create or modify an area specification that is identical to
an existing area.
To copy and paste an area:

1 Right-click an existing area.
2 On the menu that appears, click Copy.
3 Right-click the project node where you want to copy the area.
4 On the menu that appears, click Paste.
5 In the dialog box that appears, type a name for the new area (for
example, area1).
The new area is added identical (except in name) to the area you copied.
Deleting Components
The Delete command removes a component and all associated installation bulks from
the project.
To delete a component:
1 Right-click the component in either Project Explorer or the List view; then
A confirmation dialog box appears.
page 51).
X X
2 Click Yes to delete the component or click No to retain the component.

3 You can also delete multiple components at one time: select the
components on the List view, right-click one of the components; then
Re-numbering Components
After deleting components, you may want to re-number the remaining components so
that the numbering contains no gaps and reflects the order in which components were
added.
For example, if you add components A, B, C, D, and E in that order, the automatically
generated Order Numbers would be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, respectively (the Order Number
appears on the List view). If you then delete components B and C and re-number,

components A, D, and E would have Order Numbers 1, 2, 3, respectively. The order in
which they were created would still determine the Order Numbers.
To re-number components:
On the Run menu, click Re-number and then click Project Components
on the sub-menu.
Deleting Areas
The Delete Area command removes the selected area and all of its components.
To delete an area:
1 Right-click the area in Project Explorer.
2 On the menu that appears, click Delete Area.
page 51).
X X
3 Click Yes to delete the area.

-or-
Click No to retain the area.
Re-Numbering Areas
Areas have reference numbers that are internally stored and then used by the
Evaluation Engine. They are not visible in the current version of Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer. Just as with components, re-numbering is intended to close gaps
in the numbering after deletion.
To re-number areas:
1 On the Run menu, click Re-number.
2 On the menu that appears, click Project Areas.
Using the Custom Model Tool

Aspen Process Economic Analyzers Custom Model tool lets you base component
specifications on formulas or fixed data stored in Excel. Use the tool to send a
components specification values, connection stream values, and specified bulk
information (pipe-item details, material and man-hour adjustments) to an Aspen-
designed Excel workbook, where you can enter new specification values based on your

own data or formulas. Then, use the tool to send the new data back to Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
For instance, you could use the Custom Model tool to calculate a pump driver power
based on a flow rate and pump head or to calculate project component costs using
your own custom method in Excel.
The specifications rules remain stored in Excel, so that you can change the
specifications in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and then revert back to the Excel
specifications by re-running the tool (if the values are fixed). Once the tool has been
used with a project component, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer associates the
customized project component with the last Excel spreadsheet used. Running the tool
at the project level updates all components for which the tool has already been run.
The tool provides template files for mixers and pumps, as well as a general template
to use as the starting point for creating files for other components. However, for
components other than pumps and mixers, you must first copy the general template
file (or use Save As) and enter the slot names for the component specifications you
want to input, as explained on page 205.
To use the Custom Model tool on a project component:
Note: Before using this tool, you must select the Activate Custom Model
option on the Process tab in Preferences. See page 51 for information on
accessing Preferences.
1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click the pump or mixer
component that you want to customize.
2 On the menu that appears, click Custom Model.
The User Custom Model dialog box appears. It displays the name of the project,
scenario, and project component selected for the operation. It also displays available
Microsoft Excel (.xls) template files.

3 Click the Excel template file that you have created for the selected project
component.
4 Click Run.
Excel displays the workbook, with tabs for:
Input
Custom Rules
Output
The Input worksheet displays the original Icarus system values from Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
Item information is provided at the top of the worksheet. The item
information is from the Component Specifications form.
Stream information, if available, is shown toward the bottom.
Below the stream information is information on the installation bulks for
Material and Man-hour Adjustments and Pipe Item Detail.

The Custom Rules worksheet is provided for storing any data that you may want to
use in the output formulas.
Input specs have been placed on the Custom Rules along with sample alterations for
the following:
Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream
Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments
Pipe item details
The Output worksheet displays the same component specification slots as on the
Input worksheet. However, you can customize the values on the Output worksheet.

The values are in the same column-row position as on the Input worksheet, so that
you can easily reference the Input data when entering formulas.
You send the entries on the Output worksheet to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer by
clicking Apply or OK on the Custom Model tool.
The following include customized values based on the sample alterations on the
Custom Rules worksheet:
Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream
Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments
Pipe item details
These customizations have been entered solely for example purposes.
5 Enter new specifications on the Output worksheet. For example, if you
want to double the Input flow rate value provided on Row 10, Column C,
enter the following formula:
=Input!C10*2
6 Go to the Custom Model tool; then click OK to send the output to Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer and close the tool.
When you display the specifications form of the component, you will see the values
from the Output worksheet.
Creating a Template
To create a template for a component:
1 Open GeneralModelTemplate.xls; then save it as another file. The
folder in which you store Custom Model files is specified on the Locations
tab in Preferences (APICustomModelDir). The default is:
AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V9.0\Program\API Custom Models
2 Starting on Row 6, Column B for item information, enter the slot names
for the specifications that you want to have sent from Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer when the file is run for a component.

Slot names for every equipment and plant bulk item are provided in Icarus Technology
Object Definitions (API.pdf). For example, to have the tool send Shell Design
Temperature to Excel when the file is run for Fixed Tube Heat Exchangers, you
would need to enter CPDesignTemperatureShell.
3 For connection stream information, enter slot names starting on Row 43,
Column B.
4 For material and man-hour adjustments, enter slot names starting on row
70, column B.
5 For the pipe-item details, enter slot names starting on row 101, column B.
Running the Custom Model Tool at

Project-Level for Batch Update
The batch update process for the Custom Model can be done one of two ways.
The first method is for a batch update of custom model operations
performed on project components that are already linked to a custom
model template.
The second method is for a batch update of all selected components.
After using the Custom Model tool for any number of components, you can continue to
experiment with different specifications and easily revert back to the custom
specifications by running the tool at the project level. Simply right-click Main Project
or Project Area in Project Explorers Project view; then click Custom Model.
If more than one project component has been selected for the custom model (for
example, multi-selection, area selection, project selection), a message box will appear
asking you to specify the mode of operation.

If you click Yes, you will be able to specify a custom model template and all of the
selected project components will be processed with the one chosen template.
If you click No, only project components with a link to a custom model template will
be processed with their associated template.
Note: the output will be based on the values in the Output workbook in
Excel. If the Output workbook contains formulas based on input, changes in
input since originally running the Custom Model will affect the output when
the Custom Model is re-run.
This re-runs all custom models stored in the Custom Model tool.

6 Sizing Project Components
Overview
Note: To see the list of the Equipment and Slots of those Equipment which
will be affected by mapping when you do Map Based On Last Session, see
Appendix A. The slots listed on the table in Appendix A WILL CHANGE.
Sizing for Project Components Mapped

from Simulator Items
Operating conditions for the project components mapped from simulator models are
obtained from the information loaded into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer from the
simulator report. Any Design Data in the simulator report is also loaded and used
during sizing. The information consists of a unit operation model and the streams
connected to it.
You can size a mapped project component in either of two ways:
Right-click the component in Project Explorer; then click Size Item on the
pop-up menu.
On the Component Specifications dialog box, click Size:
208 6 Sizing Project Components

Interactive Sizing Expert
For the following components, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides the
Interactive Sizing form that lets you adjust sizing specifications. The Interactive
Sizing form appears when you size the component.
Heat Exchangers DHE FIXED-T-S
DHE FLOAT-HEAD
DHE U-TUBE
DRB KETTLE
DRB THERMOSIPH
DRB U-TUBE
Compressors DCP CENTRIF

DCP GEN-SERV
DGC CENTRIF
DGC CENTRIF-IG
DGC RECIP-MOTR
EGC RECIP-GAS
Pumps DCP ANSI

DCP ANSI-PLAST
DCP API 610
DCP API 610-IL
DCP CANNED
DCP TURBINE
DCP PULP STOCK
DCP MAG DRIVE
Vessels DHT HORIZ-DRUM

DVT CYLINDER
DVT SPHERE
DVT SPHEROID
DVT STORAGE
If interactive sizing is not available, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer sizes the item
automatically using the simulator data.
Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped

from Simulator Items
Project components not mapped from simulator items can be sized if they are
connected to streams. See Creating Streams to Connect to Components on page 210 X210
for instructions on creating inlet and outlet streams. If the component is one of those
for which interactive sizing is available (see list on page 209), the Interactive Sizing
form is displayed during sizing. See Using the Interactive Sizing Form for instructions
on connecting a component to streams during sizing.
6 Sizing Project Components 209

If sizing is not available for a component, the Size option as unavailable.
Resizing Project Components

If the process conditions associated with a component change, then use the Re-Size
command on the project component pop-up menu to update all equipment sizing
information.
The Re-Size command will clear all the previous sizing results and then size the
equipment based on the current process conditions (those that you have entered and
those available from the currently loaded simulator file). Therefore, if the component
being re-sized is one of those for which interactive sizing is available, the Interactive
Sizing form that appears is blank.
If you would like to keep some of your component specifications (that is,, not have
them replaced by those calculated by the Sizing Expert), do not use the Re-size
command. Instead, use the Size command or the Size button to access the
Interactive Sizing form with current specifications retained, rather than cleared. Then,
clear all fields except those you want to retain and click OK to execute sizing. Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer will re-calculate only the blank fields.
Creating Streams to Connect to

Equipment Items
For most components, the interactive Sizing Expert requires selection of an inlet
stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid to the equipment item) and an outlet stream
(that is, a stream carrying fluid from the equipment item).
The set of instructions below show how to create streams to connect to an item. In the
example, inlet and outlet streams are created to carry 200 DEF F water to a heat
exchanger and an outlet stream is created to carry 49 DEG F water from the heat
exchanger. In the example used in the set of instructions following these, a heat
exchanger is sized to heat water from 40 DEG F to 200 DEG F, using the streams
created in the first examples.
To create an inlet stream and an outlet stream:

1 In Project Explorers Project Basis view, right-click Streams; then click
Edit.

2 On the Develop Streams dialog box, click the Create tab.

3 In the Streams tree structure, click User. Leave the Basis as Absolute,
since you are creating a completely new process stream.
4 Click Create.
5 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as

Process-IN.
6 Click OK.
7 On the Develop Stream specifications form, specify:

o a primary fluid component
o temperature
o pressure
o liquid mass flow
Example:
In the Primary Fluid Component field, click and click Water.
In the Temperature (DEG F) field, enter 40.
In the Pressure (PSIA) field, enter 90.
In the Liquid Mass Flow (LB/H) field, enter 50,000.
8 Click Apply.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer fills in the rest of the fields in the Liquid
Information section.
9 Click OK to return to the Develop Streams dialog box, where you now
need to create an outlet stream.
10 In the tree structure, click User. Notice that the inlet stream that you just
created is now displayed under User.

11 Click that stream and, in the Basis group, click Relative. The new outlet
stream will be based upon the inlet stream.
12 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as
Process-OUT.
13 Click OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears. Specifications that appear gray are
the same as those of the base stream. Any modifications made will appear black.

14 Enter an outlet stream temperature that corresponds to temperature to
which the heat exchanger will be heating the fluid. In the example above,
the temperature has been entered as 200 DEG F and the pressure has
been entered as 80 PSIA. The other specifications are the same as the
base streams.
15 Click OK to apply the changes and return to the Develop Streams dialog
box, which you can now close.
Using the Interactive Sizing

Form
With the necessary streams created, you are ready to perform sizing.
To size an equipment item:

1 Add an equipment item for which interactive sizing is available and display
the Component Specifications form. If you are following the example,
add a floating head shell and tube exchanger. (See page 174 for
X X
instructions on adding components.)

It is not necessary to enter any values on the specifications form before starting the
Sizing Expert. However, all applicable sizing parameters that are entered in the
component specifications form will be carried over automatically to the sizing expert
and used in calculations.
2 Click the Size button.
The Interactive Sizing form appears.
Note: In order for the Sizing Expert to run, you must select process fluid
streams (one at Inlet and one at Outlet conditions) for at least one side (hot
or cold side).
Any other data you provide (for example,, Duty, Overall heat transfer
coefficient, LMTD, and so on) helps the Expert do its job better, but is not
necessary.

3 Click the Hot Inlet Stream field and then click to access a drop-down
list that includes all utility resources and user-created streams.
Note: fluid refers to liquid or gas.

4 If you are heating a fluid, as in the example, select a utility resource to
use as the heating source. The tables on the following page provide
definitions of the utility resources.
To heat a fluid from 40 DEG F to 200 DEG F, as in the example, the utility
Steam @100PSI-Aspen Process Economic Analyzer UTILITY is appropriate.
-or-
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be
cooled.

Utility Resources
If you specify a utility resource as a stream, the Sizing Expert will estimate the actual
utility rate required for the heat transfer and use this rate to create utility streams as
though they were user-specified. The utility stream names are prefixed by ICU and
are present under the Utility category in the Develop Streams dialog box. These utility
streams differ from utility resources in that they have an actual flow rate whereas a
resource is a reservoir that can provide utility streams at any required flow rate.
Default Utility Resources Available for I-P Projects
Inlet Exit Operating

temperature temperature Pressure
Utility
(DEG F) (DEG F) (PSIA) type
Steam @100PSI 327 327 100 Heat

source
source
source
Low Temp Heating Oil 600 550 25 Heat
source
High Temp Heating Oil 725 675 25 Heat
source
Refrigerant Freon 12 -21 -21 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant Ethylene -150 -150 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant Ethane -130 -130 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant -50 -50 15.5 Heat sink
Propylene
Refrigerant Propane -40 -40 15.5 Heat sink
Cooling Water 75 95 50 Heat sink
Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Utility
(DEG C) (DEG C) (KPA) type
Steam @2760KPA 229.2 229.2 2760 Heat

source
Steam @1135KPA 184 184 1135 Heat
source
Steam @690KPA 164 164 690 Heat
source
Low Temp Heating Oil 315 287 2523 Heat
source
High Temp Heating Oil 385 357 2523 Heat
source
Refrigerant Freon 12 -29.8 -29.8 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant Ethylene -101 -101 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant Ethane -90 -90 105 Heat sink

Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Utility
(DEG C) (DEG C) (KPA) type
Refrigerant -45 -45 105 Heat sink

Propylene
Refrigerant Propane -40 -40 105 Heat sink
Cooling Water 24 35 105 Heat sink

5 Click the Hot Outlet Stream field and then click to access the
drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.
6 If you are heating a fluid, select again the utility to use as the heating
source.
-or-
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the cooled fluid from
the exchanger.
7 Click the Cold Inlet Stream field and then click to access the
8 If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be
heated.
9 A If you are following the example, select the Process-IN stream that you
created in the previous set of instructions (see Creating Streams,
pages 210 through 214).
X X X X
B If you are cooling a fluid, select a heat sink utility to use as a cooling medium.
10 Click the Cold Outlet Stream field and then click to access the
If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the heated fluid from the
exchanger.
If you are following the example, select the Process-OUT stream that you
created in the previous set of instructions (see Creating Streams, pages 210 X X
through 214).
X X
If you are cooling a fluid, select again the heat sink utility to use as the cooling
medium.
11 Click Apply. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer fills in the other fields on
the Interactive Sizing form.

Note: results are not transferred to the Component Specifications form until
you click OK and the sizing is successfully completed (that is,, without
generating error messages).
10 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides a message informing you of the overdesign
factor.
11 Click OK to accept this message.

The values obtained from Interactive Sizing now appear on the Component
Specifications form.

14 Click OK to save.
You can now run an item evaluation and see the values generated by the Sizing Expert
in the item report.
Global Sizing Selection

You can define and/or select a sizing selection library to pre-define the sizing selection
for a project scenario. For each type of component, you can specify custom models
that will be applied in the sizing phase. These rules can also be modified on a
component by component basis when working on a specific project scenario. For
example, if you want to have all DCP CENTRIF based equipment models within a
project scenario sized with a specific custom model, you can edit or create a Sizing
Selection library (see figure 1) to be used. These libraries must be edited/created
outside of a project.

Figure 1: Library tab in palette
To edit the library:

1 Double-click the library name (for example, my sizing).
The Sizing Selection dialog box appears.
2 To view or edit the sizing selection, click the equipment model. All
equipment models default to System Sizing (see figure 2).

Figure 2: Sizing Selection dialog box
3 To add or remove a custom model to the sizing selection list, click New
Sizing; then click your choice on the list of available custom models (see
Figure 3).
Figure 3: Add new sizing with custom model
The current sizing list for the equipment model is order dependent (see figure 4).

Figure 4: Current Sizing List with System sizing and two custom models
Once this library has been specified, it must be selected in the project (see figure 5).
Figure 5: Selecting the Sizing Selection library for a project scenario
Sizing Areas
The Area sizing feature in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer develops length and width
of an area from the equipment in the area. When actual area dimensions are not
available, you can get a better estimate of area length and width from the system
when these parameters are not specified in the area specs form.
The system calculated area length and width is used in the design of all area bulks.
You can use the system calculated area parameters as the area specs.
To have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer calculate the

area:
1 Open the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project.
2 Modify an area spec by right-clicking the area; then, on the menu that
appears, clicking Modify.
3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Clear the values for Area length and Area width.
5 Click OK; then click Close.
6 Evaluate the project.
In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:
AREA BULK REPORT
AREA DATA SHEET
To specify the area yourself:


3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Enter values for Area length and Area width.
5 Click Area Piping; then enter data for the piping envelope.
6 Click Area Electrical; then enter data for Distance equipment to
panel/DB.
7 Click OK; then click Close.
In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:
AREA BULK REPORT
AREA DATA SHEET
To Develop Area Utility Piping and Pipe Racks system

calculated area length and width:
3 Click Specification | Area Piping; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Clear the data in the Utility length parameter (0) and Utility stations
(-) fields.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Area Steel; then, on the menu that appears, click Modify.
7 Clear the data in the Pipe rack length (0) field; then click OK.
8 Close the Area Specification menu.
Some areas generate utility headers, utility stations. and pipe rack bulks. This
information appears in:
AREA BULK REPORT
Sizing Requirements,
Calculations, and Defaults
Certain types of components have minimum input requirements for sizing. Those
requirements are provided in the following sections, along with explanations of how
the sizing is calculated for different component types.
Air Coolers
Minimum Input Requirements

Inlet Stream

Exit Stream
Sizing Procedure
The air cooler thermal and detailed mechanical design equations are given below:
For thermal design:

Q = U*A*MTD
MTD = f*LMTD
For mechanical design:

A = pi*D_tube*N_tubeRows*N_tubesPerRow* Tube_length
where:
Q = Heat Duty
U = Heat transfer coefficient
A = Bare tube surface area
MTD = Mean Temperature difference
LMTD = Log mean temperature difference, based on
purely countercurrent flow
f = Temperature correction factor
N_bays = Number of bays
N_tube_rows = Number of tube rows
N_tubesPerRow = Number of tubes per row (takes into account the
presence of a fan shaft)
Tube_length = Length of tubes
The process fluid properties (temperature, pressure, and specific heat capacity) are
assumed to be constant throughout the air cooler and are estimated as the mean of
the inlet and outlet stream properties. The required heat duty is calculated from the
inlet and outlet process stream conditions if it is not specified.
The process fluid stream temperatures, inlet and exit, are used along with the
temperatures specified for the air stream (Design Criteria specifications) to calculate
the LMTD. The temperature correction factor is then used to calculate the MTD.
If the process fluid temperatures and air temperatures are appropriate, meaning that
there is no temperature crossover and the temperature approach at the ends is
reasonable, then the surface area required for the given heat duty is estimated using
the thermal design equation. The air flow rate needed to realize this heat duty is then
calculated using the specified ambient and outlet air conditions.
An iterative algorithm has been developed to size the air cooler. The sizing routine
calculates the heat duty that can be realized using the specified tube bundle geometry
(bay width, number of tube rows, and tube length). It assumes defaults for
parameters that you have not specified. If the computed heat duty is larger than the
heat duty actually required, the iterative procedure terminates. The tube bundle
arrangement used represents the specification of the air cooler selected. If the
calculated heat duty does not meet the required heat duty then a bigger air cooler is
chosen (that is, parameter values are increased) and the above procedure is repeated.
The iterative procedure terminates either when a tube bundle geometry that can meet
the heat duty requirements is found, or when even the largest available air cooler
does not meet the process requirements.

Air-side heat transfer coefficients are calculated using the relations that take into
account the tube bundle geometry.
The work of Young, Briggs, and Robinson, as summarized in [6] is being used to
evaluate the heat transfer and pressure drop of air across the tube bundle. The
pressure drop thus calculated is used in estimating the fan power required. The
number of fans required is calculated based on the aspect ratio (tube length/bay
width). For any aspect ratio of up to 1.5, only one fan is selected.
Defaults
Tube pitch = 2.5 INCHES
Tube thickness = 0.125 INCHES
Bay width = 4 ft to 20 ft
Tube rows = 3 to 6
Maximum Tube = 3*Bay width
length
Inlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Outlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)
Agitated Tanks

Inlet stream
Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The capacity of the agitated tank is determined by the following equation:
C = Q * (T_r / 60.0)
where:
C = Capacity , CF
Q = Liquid volumetric flowrate, CFH
T_r = Liquid residence time, MINUTES
The diameter of the agitated tank is determined using L/D and geometry:
C = (/4) * D^2 * L
where:
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
L = Fluid height, FEET
Vessel height is obtained by the following:

H = L + h_d
where:
H = Vessel height, FEET
h_d = Vapor disengagement height, FEET
Design parameters are based on the current Design Criteria specifications if available:
Length/Diameter Ratio: = 3
Default
Vapor disengagement height: = 1 FEET
Default
Agitator type: Default = ANCHOR
Driver type: Default = STD
Impeller type: Default = T6FB
Operating pressure is obtained from the simulator report. If the report does not have a
value, then the pressure of the inlet stream having the maximum value is chosen as
the operating pressure.
The operating pressure is used to obtain the L/D ratio (if user specification is absent).
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D = 3
If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D = 5
where:
P = Pressure, PSI
L = Fluid height, FEET
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
The project component must have at least one process stream connected to the inlet
and exit. Also, since the sizing procedure is based on the liquid holding period, at least
one of the streams should have liquid phase.
The design pressure and temperature are based on the operating pressure and
temperature as modified by your entries on the Design Criteria specifications form.
Compressors

Inlet and Exit stream information
Driver Power (for Reciprocating Compressors)
Sizing Procedure
The capacity requirement for the compressor is calculated from the inlet stream
information. The inlet stream flow rate and density are used to estimate the total
volumetric flow rate through the compressor.

The compression ratio (exit to inlet pressure) is obtained from the operating pressures
of the inlet and exit stream.
The compressibility factor (inlet and exit) is based on user-specified information, if
available, or estimated by the sizing expert based on the Primary Fluid Component.
The Icarus Evaluation Engine estimates the driver power if it is neither user-specified
nor provided in the simulator report. The engine currently uses a mechanical efficiency
of 100% to arrive at the brake horsepower. The brake horsepower, thus calculated, is
compared against a table of available standard motor sizes. If the calculated brake
horsepower is not found in the table, then the motor with the next higher horsepower
is selected.
If the driver horsepower is either user-specified or provided in the simulator report,
the engine uses this value. However for pricing the compressor, the table of available
standard motor sizes is referred. If the specified horsepower is not found in the table,
then the price of the motor with the next higher horsepower is used.
In the case of simulator inputs, different simulators provide information that may be
slightly different. For instance, in the case of Aspen Plus, the compressor calculations
take into account any mechanical efficiency specified during the simulation run. So the
brake horsepower reported in the case of Aspen Plus already takes into account the
mechanical efficiency. However, other simulators, such as SimSci (Actual Work);
HYSIM and HYSYS (Energy Required), and ChemCAD ( Actual Power); do not
account for mechanical efficiency. Keep this in mind and be aware of what has been
accounted for in the simulation side when using simulator information as inputs.
Defaults
Minimum inlet pressure for air compressors is 14.696 PSIA
Crushers
Minimum Input Requirement

Final product size.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing expert estimates the solid flow rate from the inlet stream information. The
crushing ratio (feed to product size) is set at 4.
Work index is the total energy in KWH/TONS, needed to reduce the feed to a size so
that 80% of the product will pass through a 100 micron screen. The sizing expert in
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer assumes a default value of 13.81 for the material
work index.
The total driver power required for the crusher is calculated using material work index
and the value of the product size.
The following equation is used to estimate the driver power:
P = 1.46 (T_m) (W_i) ( 1/(d_p ^ 0.5) - 1/(d_r ^0.5))
where:
P = Driver power, HP

T_m = Crusher capacity, TPM
W_i = Material work index
d_p = Product size, FEET
d_r = Feed size, FEET
Defaults
Material Work Index: 13.8 KWh/ton
Size Reduction Ratio: 4
Crystallizers
Minimum Information Required

Inlet and Exit Stream information
Additional Information
Final Product size
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the crystallizer capacity based on the inlet and exit
stream information.
Default value of 0.83 MM is used as final product size if the user-specified value is not
available from the simulator report.
In addition, the following defaults values are used for the design parameters:
Growth = 0.36 MM/H
rate
The residence time in hours for a batch crystallizer is determined by the following
relation:
Residence time = d_p / (3 * R_g
where:
d_p = Product size, MM
R_g = Growth rate, MM/H
Based on the minimum and maximum values for the required fields in the component
specification form, the number of additional crystallizers are estimated.
Dryers


Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the dryer capacity based on the total evaporation rate
for the drying process. For tray and drum dryers, an average depth of 2.25 FEET is
used to determine the total dryer requirements. For vacuum and jacketed rotary
vacuum dryers, the dryer capacity is determined by obtaining value of the drying time
and the average percentage utilization of the dryer capacity.
The system defaults are as follows:
Drying = 0.75 HOUR
time
Average = 25
percentage
utilization
The number of additional items required for the given drying operation is determined
from the knowledge-based engine in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, which
analyzes minimum and maximum values for the required fields in the specification
form.
Dust Collectors

Sizing Procedure
The sizing program estimates the vapor volume flowing through the dust collector
using the exit stream information available from the simulator report.
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity of 150 FPS.
The height to width ratio is fixed at 2.5.
Using the above defaults, the volumetric rate through the separator is obtained using
Zenz correlation represented by the following equation:
Q = 2.5 (D ^ 2) V / 16
where:
Q = Vapor volumetric rate, CFS
D = Cyclone separator diameter, FEET
V = Linear velocity, FPS
For baghouse dust collectors, the sizing program uses Nylon as the default filter cloth
material to determine the air to media ratio which then determines the diameter of the
separator.
Air to media ratio is the flow rate of air (at 70 DEG F) in CFM. The default ratio results
in a pressure drop of 0.5 INCHES of water when passed through 1 SF of clean fabric.
The sizing program uses a default air to media ratio of 10 CFM.
The minimum and maximum values of the required field(s) shown in the component
specification form are used to determine the number of identical equipment items.

Filters

Inlet stream
Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total amount of filtration product rate based on the
exit stream information. Based on the type of filter selected, the average dimension of
the filter equipment is selected and the filter size is then optimized for the given
operation such that the dimensions selected for the equipment are within the
minimum and maximum values as specified by the knowledge-based engine.
In case of batch filtration, a default batch time of 0.25 HOUR is used. In case of plate
and frame filters, default value of cake thickness of 0.3 FEET is used.
In the case of continuous operation, the cycle time default is 0.08 HOUR. Based on the
actual capacity requirement and the maximum and minimum sizes provided by the
knowledge-based engine, the number of identical items is determined.
Heat Exchangers
The heat exchanger sizing program estimates the heat transfer area required for the
given operating conditions. The model also performs detail estimation of the number
of tubes, tube length, and other internal components of the heat exchanger based on
either user-defined specifications (from the process simulator report or the Design
Criteria specifications form) or system defaults.

Inlet and Exit Process Stream Information
Sizing Procedure
The process stream(s) are classified into various categories. The Primary Fluid
Component class that you specify for the process fluid(s) flowing through the heat
exchanger is used to estimate the following design parameters:
Latent heats (vaporization and condensation)
Fouling resistance
Specific heat capacity of the fluid
Liquid film resistance
Overall heat transfer coefficient
Duty requirement for the heat exchanger is either directly obtained from the simulator
report or estimated based on the inlet and exit process stream information for the
process model. In case the fluid undergoes phase change, a boiling point temperature,
Tb, is estimated that would lie between the inlet and exit stream temperature. The
estimated Tb is then used in the calculation of the sensible and latent heats based on
the Primary Fluid Component. The sensible heat of any solids present in the stream is
also accounted for in the duty calculation.

In estimating the design pressure on shell and tube heat exchangers, the 2/3rd Rule is
P P
applied if it has been selected on the Design Criteria specifications form (see page 86). X X
If only the process fluid conditions are specified by the simulator model, the heat
exchanger sizing program determines the appropriate utility from the list of utilities
that you specify using the Utility Specifications accessed from Project Basis view (see
page 96). If multiple utilities are available for heat transfer, then the sizing expert
X X
uses the utility fluid with a temperature approach closest to the process fluid. This
minimizes the heat transfer losses. However, a minimum of 1 degree Fahrenheit
difference in the final temperature of the process fluid and the utility fluid must exist
for the utility fluid to be selected for the process. If an appropriate utility fluid is not
available for the heat transfer process, the heat exchanger sizing program will
terminate without estimating the heat exchanger size requirements.
The mean temperature difference (MTD) is estimated based on the fluid temperature
for both the shell and the tube side. It also depends on the flow configuration for shell
and tube heat exchangers, which is specified by the number of shell and tube passes.
For reasons of compactness of equipment, the paths of both fluids may require several
reversals in direction. Mean temperature differences in such cases can be obtained by
applying a factor (called the F-factor) to the terminal temperature difference. The
logarithmic mean temperature difference (based on purely counter current flow) is
multiplied by the F-factor to obtain the mean temperature difference.
If the temperatures are not properly entered then appropriate warning messages are
displayed. In such cases it recommended that you check the inlet and outlet
temperatures of the shell and tube side streams and verify that they are realistic.
The overall heat transfer coefficient is either directly obtained from the simulator
report or evaluated based on the shell and tube fluid properties (film resistance,
fouling tendency present for the various processes in the system database).
The heat exchanger sizing program determines the position of the fluids in the shell
and tube heat exchanger. The position depends on both the process and utility fluid
class.
If duty is provided by the simulator report, then you can override the value only
through interactive sizing.
The final heat transfer area is obtained by multiplying the heat transfer area,
calculated based on the duty required, with the Heat Exchanger Minimum Overdesign
Factor. If you do not specify an overdesign factor then the default value is used from
the Design Criteria specifications.
If the duty generates a surface area less than minimum required for practical design,
the item report will give the appropriate warning message.
FLOAT HEAD or U-TUBE heat exchangers have an even number of tube passes. If you
enter an odd number for the number of tube passes for any of these heat exchanger
types, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer generates warning messages.
The shell and tube design pressure and temperature are based on the maximum
operating conditions of the fluid flowing through the shell and tube respectively. The
Design Criteria specifications form lets you change them according to individual
project requirements.
Heat Exchanger Internals

The final heat transfer area is determined by the actual number of tubes chosen for
the equipment. The least surface area of the combination of numbered tubes and
shells is changed for final design.
A default tube length of 20 FEET is used for calculating the number of tubes.

System default values for tube diameter, tube thickness, tube pitch and baffle
distances are used if user specifications are not available.
General Information
The utility requirement is estimated only when the system determines the utility fluid.
If both shell and tube side fluid stream information is specified in the simulator report,
then the system assumes that both of the fluid streams are process streams and that
no utility fluid is expended.
Presently, the model defaults are used for determining the material of construction.
For shell and tube heat exchangers, if the heat transfer surface area calculated by the
sizing program is greater than the largest heat exchanger designed by the design and
cost engine, then the heat exchanger is divided into multiple shells with identical
configurations. The capital cost estimation is then calculated based on the complete
heat exchanger.
Note: When mapping a rigorous heat exchanger model (HXRIG) from

SimSci, the number of shells in parallel is used to determine the number of
shells in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. For Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer, the maximum number of shells in series is 1.
Double Pipe Heat Exchanger

The sizing program in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer estimates the total surface
area required for the given duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for
the heat exchanger is developed based on the values for tube length and number of
tubes per shell obtained from the simulator report or from the user.
Fin Tube Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given duty.
During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed
based on the tube length and number of fins per tube obtained either from the
simulator report or from the user.
Spiral Plate Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given duty.
During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed
based on the tube length and number of fins per tube obtained either from the
simulator report or from the user.
Pumps


Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total capacity requirements for the selected pump
based on the total flow rate of the inlet fluid stream(s) obtained from the simulator.
Flow Rate/Capacity
Pump flow rate is obtained from the simulator information. If the information does not
exist, then pump flow rate is calculated based on the stream flow rates. The stream is
assumed to be completely liquid phase and no check is made for presence of vapor
phase.
The pump flow rate obtained from the simulator information is multiplied by the pump
overdesign factor, also referred as the capacity over-design factor, present in the
Design Criteria specifications file.
Pump % Efficiency
Pump efficiency is directly obtained from the simulator. If the value is not present in
the simulator report, then the default value of 70% is used.
Pump Overdesign
You can modify the pump overdesign factor either on the Design Criteria specifications
form or the Interactive Sizing form. Modifying the overdesign factor using the Design
Criteria specifications form (page 86) will applies the new factor to all the pumps in
X X
the project. Modifying the overdesign factor for a pump using the Interactive Sizing
form (page 214) applies the factor only to that particular pump. This lets you either
X X
specify the factor for all pumps or specify the factor individually for each pump.
Driver Power
If you specify a driver power in the component specification form then this value is
used. If the user does not provide the value then it is calculated by the cost engine.
The Icarus Evaluation Engine calculates the hydraulic horsepower based on the
capacity, viscosity and head, and then uses the pump efficiency to estimate the brake
horsepower. The brake horsepower is compared against a set of standard available
motor sizes to estimate the pump driver power.
If multiple inlet streams are present, the minimum value of pressure is used for
determining the operating pressure of the equipment.
Defaults (if they are not obtained from the

simulators):
Operating pressure: 14.696 PSIA
Operating temperature: 77 DEG F
Calculating Pump Head

The total head developed by the pump is composed of the difference between the
static, pressure, and velocity heads. Additionally, friction at the suction and discharge
sides would also contribute to some head loss. The pump head is calculated using the
following relation:

Head, = h_d h_s
FEET
where:
H = total pump head, FEET
h_d = discharge head, FEET
h_s = suction head, FEET
Assumptions:
No friction losses at the entrance and exit.
No static head on suction and discharge sides.
Velocity heads are not included in estimating the suction and discharge
heads.
Head in feet is estimated by the following relations:
Head, = (Pressure, PSIA) * (2.31)/(Fluid specific gravity)
FEET
The specific gravity of the fluid is based on inlet streams conditions. The discharge
pressure for the pump is based on the maximum value for the exit stream(s). The
suction pressure is based on the minimum value for the inlet streams(s).
Screens

Inlet stream information
Screen opening size (or average product size)
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program determines the capacity of the screen based on the inlet flow rate
estimated from the stream information.
The screen opening size is used to determine the final product size.
The feed material for the vibrating screen is obtained from the Design Criteria
specifications. The following choices are available:
Sand and Gravel
Limestone/Crushed Stones
Coal
Cinders
Coke
Wood
The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined as the amount of
solid (in tons per hour) flowing through one square foot of screen cloth based on
material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50% or more open area; 85%
screen efficiency.
Based on the material selected and the screen opening size, the screen unit capacity is
chosen. Further, the sizing program assumes that five layers of particles are present
on the screen. The surface area required for the vibrating screen is obtained.

Based on the maximum and minimum values specified by the knowledge base for the
screen capacity, additional items required by the operations are determined.
Towers

Stage temperature, pressure, flowrates
Number of stages
Inlet stream
Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The distillation column sizing module can be used to size the following Icarus process
equipment:
DDT TRAYED
DDT PACKED
TW TRAYED
TW PACKED
DC HE TW
The following simulator models can be used to generate the necessary process
information required for successfully executing the application:
Simulator Models used
Aspen Plus ABSBR, DISTWU, DISTL, RADFRAC

HYSIM/HYSYS COLUMN
Pro/II COLUMN, IO, SURE, CHEMDIST, SHORTCUT
Loading Column Model from Simulator

In Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the rigorous column unit operations loaded from
the simulator report (that is,, COLUMN UNITS model in PRO/II) are developed in great
detail, including all pieces attached to the main column unit.
Typically, the simulator model develops stage information for the main tower and
duties for an associated condenser and reboiler. These duties are used along with the
specified fluid conditions available from the stage information tables to generate all of
the input specifications required for the equipment.
Sidestrippers and pumparounds are separated from the main tower if necessary during
the loading process after all the relevant information is collected for the models. Once
the report is loaded, these units are treated as separate simulator models which can
be mapped and sized independently of the main tower design.
Sidestrippers
Sidestrippers attached to tower models are separated from the main tower model
during the loading process. Sidestrippers load information from the same tables in the
report from which the main tower information is discerned.

For example, the typical information loaded for sidestrippers in Pro/II are:
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
COLUMN SUMMARY
NET FLOW RATES HEATER
TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG C KPA KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR

1/ 10 200.3 600.50 22. 20.0L 8.5V

2/ 11 202.2 601.53 7.8 5.0V 20.1L
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
TYPE STREAM PHASE

FROM TO LIQUID FLOW RATES HEAT RATES
TRAY TRAY FRAC KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR

FEED ABCDRW LIQUID 10 1.0000 23.00 1.3216
FEED ABCSTM VAPOR 11 .0000 5.55 .2785
PROD ABCSRVP VAPOR 10 8.46 .5325
PROD ABCPRD LIQUID 11 20.09 1.0678
Information is obtained for the sidestrippers in the same manner as for the main tower
unit (Refer to information for obtaining process data for main tower unit).
Pumparounds
The inlet and outlet fluid conditions for pumparounds are obtained from the stage
information to which the unit is connected. Additionally, the duty associated with each
pumparound is loaded into the unit. This unit is then separated during the loading
process and is treated as an independent simulator model which can be mapped and
sized on its own.
For example, the information required by pumparound units in PRO/II are obtained
from the following part of the column report:
COLUMN SUMMARY
NET FLOW RATES HEATER

TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG F PSIG LB-MOL/HR MM BTU/HR

.
.
.
40R 355.9 33.00 5618.9 4301.4L 94.6551
PUMPAROUNDS
TRAY TEMP, DEG F LIQUID FRACTION RATES

FROM TO FROM TO FROM TO LB-MOL/HR M LB/HR STD BBL/HR

40 40 355.9 416.1 1.0000 .4108 7273.09 995.238 3569.48
Mapping the Tower Model

Typically, column models in simulators do not include the ancillary equipment attached
to the main tower. For example, a tower unit may really consist of the following
equipment:
Main tower
Overhead condenser
Condenser accumulator
Overhead split
Reflux pump
Overhead pump

Overhead product sub-cooler
Reboiler
Bottoms split
Bottoms product pump
Bottoms product heat exchanger
Both overhead and bottoms split are process stream splitters and therefore do not
represent any project component. In Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, during
mapping and sizing process, they are typically mapped as a quoted cost item with zero
cost.
In addition, the equipment design could involve splitting the units into more than one
actual piece for reasons of economy. For example, in many applications, condensers
are split into a precooler (which is typically an air cooler but also can be any other
type of heat exchanger) and a trim cooler (typically a shell and tube heat exchanger).
Tower models (such as RADFRAC model in Aspen Plus, COLUMN UNIT in PRO/II and
COLUMN in HYSIM/HYSYS) can be mapped into any of the following ten Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer configurations:
Standard - Single or Standard - Total
o Tower
o Condenser
o Condenser accumulator
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler.
Full - Single
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Overhead product heat exchanger
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Bottoms product pump
o Bottoms product heat exchanger
Standard - Split or Standard Split Total
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split

o Reboiler
Full - Split
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcoooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
Standard - Total w/Circ.
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
Full - Single w/Circ.
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
Standard Split Total w/Circ.
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcooler
o Overhead split

o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
Full - Split w/Circ.
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcoooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
Refer to Tower Configurations in Chapter 4 for detailed flow diagrams.
These configurations should be regarded as the maximum model with all
potentialities satisfied. The components actually developed depend upon the process
conditions. For example, if the main tower model does not have a condenser and a
reboiler, then only the tower model is mapped.
If the overhead product is cooler than the temperature of the fluid from the condenser
outlet, then an overhead exchanger is mapped.
A bottoms product exchanger is mapped only when the bottoms product stream has a
different temperature from the temperature of the bottom stage of the tower.
In the case of split models, where the condenser duty is split into precooler and
trimcooler duties, the ratio of the duty split is obtained from the Design Criteria
specifications form. The overhead vapor stream flowing to the precooler is assumed
to be at dew point if the condensation temperature is not provided.
Loading Tower Input Information

From the tower results in the report, the tables consisting of stage temperatures,
stage pressures, stage molar vapor flow rates and stage molar liquid flow rates are
loaded in the mapping process.
For example, in the case of Aspen Plus, the following tables in the RADFRAC block are
loaded by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the mapping process:
Table 1: Stage temperature and Stage Pressures are loaded (Column 1 and 2)
ENTHALPY
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08

2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.
4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.

5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 45802+08
Table 2: Stage molar liquid flowrates and Stage molar vapor flowrates are
loaded. (Column 1 and 2)
STAGE FLOW RATE FEED RATE PRODUCT RATE

LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR
LIQUID VAPOR LIQUID VAPOR MIXED LIQUID VAPOR
1 1239. 430.0 .57657-01 430.0000
2 0.2571E+05 1669. .24001+05
3 0.2586E+05 2140.
4 0.2595E+05 2286.
5 0.2602E+05 2380.
6 0.2606E+05 2444.
7 0.2610E+05 2493.
8 0.2614E+05 2532.
9 0.2617E+05 2568.
10 0.2357E+05 2604. .23571+05
Inlet and exit streams (and their stage numbers) are loaded in the mapping step.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for Aspen Plus, the following portion of
the report is loaded in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:
INLETS7 STAGE 2
OUTLETS - 8 STAGE 1
9 STAGE 10
When sizing information is present in the report, the mapping program loads all the
relevant information present in the sizing sections.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for Aspen Plus, the following portion of
the sizing report is loaded in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer for every section:
Case : Tray tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 29
TRAY SPECIFICATIONS

TRAY TYPE SIEVE
TRAY SPACING METER 0.60960
***** SIZING RESULTS @ STAGE WITH MAXIMUM DIAMETER *****
COLUMN DIAMETER METER 4.00228
Case : Packed tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 9
PACKING SPECIFICATIONS

PACKING TYPE BERL-SADDLE
HETP FT 2.00000
PACKING HEIGHT FT 16.0000

Determining Tower Process Conditions
Operating Temperature
The maximum temperature value for all the stages (given by column 1) is used as
the operating temperature for the tower.
Operating Pressure
The maximum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is used as the
operating pressure for the tower.
Minimum Operating Pressure
The minimum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is used as the
minimum operating pressure for the tower.
Design Pressure
The maximum value from the stage pressure profile is used for calculating the
design pressure of the tower (that is, after applying the user-defined-design value
from the design criteria file). When stage pressures are not available, the
maximum value of pressure from all the inlet streams is used.
Design Temperature
The maximum value from the stage temperature profile is used for calculating the
design temperature of the tower (that is, after applying the user-defined design
value from the design criteria file). When stage temperatures are not available,
the maximum value of temperature from all the inlet streams is used.
Number of Stages
The number of theoretical stages is provided by the number of rows in Table 1.
The final number is determined by taking into account condenser and reboiler (if
they are provided). Also, the number of stages is affected by the reboiler type
depending on whether the reboiler simulated in the report is kettle or
thermosiphon.
For example, in the case of RADFRAC model for Aspen Plus, consider the
following table:
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08

2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.
4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.
5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 .45802+08
If the reboiler is kettle, then the number of theoretical stages is eight.

If the reboiler is thermosiphon (reboiler type is obtained from simulator),
then the number of theoretical stages is nine.
Liquid Density
Density of liquid flowing inside the column is estimated from the density of
the inlet streams and the exit streams. If liquid density cannot be obtained
from the streams, the density of water is used as default.
Vapor Density

Density of vapor flowing inside the column is estimated from the density of the
inlet streams and the exit streams. If vapor density cannot be obtained from the
streams, the vapor density is estimated based on gas law. The vapor density is
estimated at the minimum operating pressure and operating temperature.
Average Molecular Weight of Vapor Inside Tower
Average vapor molecular weight is estimated from the inlet and exit streams. The
lowest molecular weight of the streams is assigned as the vapor molecular weight.
Average Molecular Weight of Liquid Inside Tower
Average liquid molecular weight is the maximum molecular weight for the inlet and
exit streams.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing procedure varies depending on the type of internals desired and the
simulator model used for the operation. The procedure described below gives a
description of the actual steps used by the sizing module to estimate the sizes for the
different types of trayed and packed towers.
Trayed Tower Sizing

General Procedure (Followed for all tray internals):
1 The type (class) of the fluid in the column is used to estimate some of the
properties in designing the tray internals, such as surface tension,
foaming tendency, deration factor if they are not specified in the
simulation output report or on the Design Criteria specifications form.
You can specify the overall column tray efficiency in the Tray Efficiency box
on the Design Criteria specifications form. If the value is not provided,
then it is estimated using Locketts modification of the OConnell
Correlation. This correlation is based on tests on actual plant columns and
has been the standard of the industry.
The tray efficiency is used to calculate the actual number of stages required for the
separation.
EOC = 0.492 ( L ) -0.245
where:
EOC = efficiency, OConnell Correlation
L = viscosity of liquid, CPOISE
= relative volatility of key component
A default value of 1.5 is used for the relative volatility of key components that you can
modify on the Design Criteria specifications form. The liquid viscosity is either directly
obtained from the report or estimated from the fluid classification.
Once the internal height of the column is estimated (based on the actual
number of trays), additional height for vapor disengagement and liquid
return is based on your Design Criteria specifications.
In general, the number of stages provided by the simulator report
represent the theoretical number of stages. However, if detailed design of
the tower has been done by the simulator using tray efficiency, then the
number of trays are actual trays. If Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
finds that the number of trays are actual, then it uses the value to
estimate the height and does not add any additional tray efficiency.

Using Tower Sizing Information
When a simulator report provides sizing information, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
tries to use as much of the information as possible in the final design. When multiple
sections are present in the report, the information used by Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer depends on the equipment to which the model is mapped.
Single Diameter Trayed Tower (TW TRAYED)

If multiple sections are present with different diameters and tray spacings, then the
largest values of the diameters and tray spacings are used for the actual design of the
tower.
Double Diameter Trayed Tower (DTT TRAYED)

For double diameter trayed tower, the two largest diameters in the sectional report are
used in the design. Once the tower is divided into two sections (based on diameter),
the value of the tray spacing for each section is based on the stage numbers present
in each section. The largest values of tray spacing for each section are used to
estimate the tower height.
For example, for Aspen Plus, assume the following sizing information is obtained from
the report after completing the loading process.
Section 1:
Diameter = 5 FEET
Tray Spacing = 24 INCHES
Stages = 2 to 4
Section 2:
Diameter = 6 FEET
Stages = 5 to 7
Section 3:
Diameter = 8 FEET
Stages = 8 to 10
The sizing program will design a double diameter tower with the following dimensions:
Top Section = 6 FEET
Diameter
Top Section Tray = 30 INCHES
Spacing
Top Section Stages = 2 to 7
Bottom Section = 8 FEET
Diameter
Bottom Section = 18 INCHES
Tray Spacing
Bottom Section = 8 to 10
Stages
The program estimates the cross sectional area for each stage. Then, the maximum
value is used to design the single diameter tower. In case of double diameter tower,
the program estimates the diameter for the bottom section and the top section based
on the cross sectional area estimated for each stage.

Sieve Tray Design
The capacity factor, CSB, is evaluated based on the correlation developed for
entrainment flooding by Kister and Haas. Jeronimo et. al correlation is used to
estimate the clear liquid height in the spray regime. Strictly, the Jeronimo and
Swistowski correlation predicts the clear liquid height at the transition from the froth
to the spray regime. However, empirical evidence has shown that clear liquid height in
the spray regime is much the same as clear liquid height at that transition.
The CSB estimated at the flooding point is used to evaluate the flooding vapor
velocity.
The bubbling area is calculated based on flood velocity, the derating factor and the
safety factor. (Column default design is 90% of flood.)
Downcomer liquid velocity is based on the foaming tendency of the fluid and tray
spacing. Foaming tendency can be specified on the Design Criteria specifications form.
The downcomer cross-sectional area is based on the downcomer velocity and the
maximum liquid flow inside the tower.
The total tower cross-sectional area is calculated by adding the bubbling area and the
downcomer area.
The diameter of the tower is obtained from the cross-sectional area by rounding the
area up to the next half foot. The minimum diameter for the tower is 1.5 FEET.
Valve Tray Design

Valve tray sizing is based on the V-type Ballast trays produced by Glitsch. The system
factors are estimated based on the fluid classification performed on the fluid flowing
through the column. The tray diameter is evaluated for either single pass trays or two
pass trays. It is based on 24 INCHES tray spacing and 80% of flood.
Bibliography
Distillation Design, by Henry Z. Kister.
Applied Process Design For Chemical And Petrochemical Plant, Volumes 1 and 3, by
Ernest E. Ludvig.
Standard Handbook of Engineering Calculations, by Tyler G. Hicks
Chemical Engineers HandBook, by Perry and Chilton, 6th Edition.
Bubble-Cap Tray Design

The allowable vapor velocity and the corresponding diameter for bubble-cap trays
have been represented by the Jersey Critical formula which corresponds to the work
by Souder and Brown for column flooding.

D 0.0956 Wv / K L v 12
where:
D = Diameter, FEET
Wv B B = vapor flow rate, LB/H
L
B B = liquid density, LB/CF
v
B B = vapor density, LB/CF

The factor K depends on the tray spacing as follows:
Tray Spacing, INCHES 18 24 30 30+
K 3.4 4.2 4.7 5.0
Packed Tower Design

Packed tower design is accomplished for both random and structured packings. The
various types of packings supported by the system are described in the Icarus
Reference.
Kister and Gill flood point correlation is used to estimate pressure drop at the flood
point as a function of packing factor alone.
FL = .155 (Fp0.7)
where:
FL = Pressure drop at flood point
Fp Packing factor
Note: You can provide the value for the packing factor on the Design Criteria
specifications form. The system defaults are used for each of the different
types of packings if you do not enter a value.
Once this pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated using the
latest version of GPDC (Generalized Pressure Drop Correlation) charts for
both random and structured packings.
HETP Prediction
You can provide the HETP value on the Design Criteria specifications form. If the
value is not specified, rules of thumb prediction reported in literature are used to
predict the packed tower efficiency.
For random packing columns, the following rules are used for estimating HETP (FEET):
HETP = 1.5 dp
dp = Packing diameter, INCHES
HETP > DT for DT < 2 FEET
For estimating the structured packing efficiency, the following rule of thumb is used:
HETP, = 1200 /ap + 4
INCHES
ap = Packing surface area per unit volume, SF/CF
System Defaults
The following system default values may be modified on the Design Criteria
specifications form and Component Specifications form:
Trayed Tower Defaults

Tray Type = Sieve
Tray Spacing = 24 inches
Flooding Factor = 80 %
Foaming Tendency = Moderate

Packed Tower Defaults
Packing Type = Random
Packing Material = 1.0PPR
Specific area per unit = 0.75 SF/CF
volume for the
packing
General Defaults
Top vapor = 4 FEET
disengagement
height
Bottom sump height = 6 FEET
SimScis SHORTCUT Column Operation

In case of SHORTCUT column operation, the simulator provides only the minimum
reflux ratio for the distillation process. To design the tower, the ratio of the operating
reflux ratio and minimum reflux ratio has to be provided. The system uses the default
value of 2.0 for the ratio. The ratio can be changed on the Design Criteria
specifications form. If the simulator report does not contain information (number of
trays) for the operating reflux ratio, the tower sizing program returns to the system
without performing sizing for the tower.
Vessels
Horizontal Vessels
The following graphic shows a typical horizontal vessel.
The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria specifications form:
Residence Time
Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio

Average Liquid Particle Diameter
Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
Separation Factor
Vapor area /cross sectional area
Separation Factor Multiplier
Minimum Boot Length (used in Horizontal Vessel Design)
Minimum Boot diameter
Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
Design Requirements
The maximum number of exit streams is three; two of the streams can be liquid.
Calculating Diameter
Vessel diameter is based on the maximum allowable vapor velocity inside the
separator, to reduce the liquid entrainment in the vapor.
The following two methods are available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (chosen
from the Design Criteria specifications) to obtain vapor velocity.
Liquid Entrainment Method
Particle size separation method.
Calculating Vapor Velocity

Liquid Entrainment Method
The maximum allowable vapor velocity, to reduce liquid entrainment is obtained as a
function of liquid and vapor density and the Separation Factor, which itself is a
polynomial function of vapor and liquid density and vapor and liquid flowrates. The
polynomial equation was based on 5% of liquid entrained in the vapor and is valid for
the range (defined below) of 0.006 to 5.0. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you
override the computed value of Separation Factor.
W = l_mfr/v_mfr * sqrt (v_rho/l_rho)
X = ln (SF)
k_v = EXP(A + BX + CX^2 + DX^3 + EX^4)
K = k_v * k_vm
v_m = K * sqrt ((l_rho - v_rho)/v_rho)
where:
l_mfr = Light Liquid Mass Flow rate
v_mfr = Vapor Mass Flow rate
l_rho = Light Liquid Density
v_rho = Vapor Density
K = System Factor
SF = Separation Factor
k_v = Polynomial Function of SF

k_vm = Separation Factor Multiplier
A = -1.877478097
B = -0.8145804597
C = -0.1870744085
D = -0.0145228667
E = -0.0010148518
The above relation for Separation Factor is valid for a W(SF) between 0.006 and 5.0.
If W falls outside the range, the sizing program gives a warning message and the
limiting value of W is used to estimate Separation Factor.
For example, if calculated value of W is 0.001, then the value used in the correlation is
0.006. If the calculated value of W is 10.0, then the value used in the correlation is
6.0.
Particle Size Separation Method

This method estimates the disengagement velocity of liquid bubble in the vapor space.
The maximum allowable vapor velocity is determined as a percentage of the
disengagement velocity.
Liquid drops falling in gases appear to be spherical up to a Reynolds number of 100.
Large drops (greater than 0.3125 INCHES) will deform, with a resulting increase in
drag, and in some cases shatter.
For estimating vapor velocity, the liquid bubbles are assumed to remain in spherical
shape.
The terminal settling velocity can be obtained for different flow conditions.
For laminar flow (K < 3):
v = g * (rho_l - rho_v) *(dp^ 2)/ (18.0 * mu_v)
and for turbulent region:
v = 1.74 (g * dp * (rho_l - rho_v) / rho_v)^0.5
where:
K = dp * (g * rho_v * (rho_l - rho_v)/ (mu_v^2) )^0.33
v = disengagement velocity
g = gravitational constan
rho_l = liquid density
rho_v = vapor density
dp = liquid bubble diameter
mu_v = gas viscosity (assumed to be 0.05 LB/FT/H)
The design velocity is then estimated by the following equation:
v_m = v*f
where:
v_m = disengagement velocity
f = design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
v = disengagement
Calculating vessel cross-sectional area

Vapor cross sectional area is estimated based on the vapor velocity and the vapor
volumetric flow. The vapor cross sectional area is divided by the ratio of vapor
area/cross sectional area to get the total required cross sectional area.

v_csa = v_vol/v_m
t_csa = v_csa/r_vc
where:
v_csa = Vapor area
v_vol = Vapor volumetric flow
r_vc = Vapor area/cross sectional area
t_csa = Vessel cross sectional area
Estimate Vessel diameter based on vapor flow:
D_v = sqrt ((t_csa * 4) /)
where:
D_v = Vessel Diameter based on vapor flow
= 3.14
Estimate vessel diameter based on liquid holdup volume and user-specified value of
L/D ratio.
The maximum value of diameter calculated using vapor velocity and liquid holdup is
used for final design.
Calculating Length
Vessel liquid holdup volume is obtained based on the light liquid flowrate and the
residence time. The vessel length is then calculated as given below:
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t
L = (l_vol * 4) / ( * D^2 * (1 - r_vc))
where:
l_vol = Liquid holdup volume
L = Length
l_vfr = Light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = Residence time
r_vc = r_vc
Checking L/D Ratio

For all liquid vessels L/D is calculated as follows:
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D= 3
If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P> 500 PSIA, then L/D= 5
After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of L/D is
compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on the Design
Criteria specifications form.
Estimating Boot Dimensions

Boot dimensions will be estimated only if the exit streams contain a heavier liquid
phase. Boot diameter is based on the heavier liquid phase volume and boot liquid
velocity.
Boot volume (bt_vol) = hl_vfr * r_t

Boot cross section area = bt_vol / hl_vel
(bt_csa)
Boot diameter (d) = sqrt (4.0 * bt_csa /)
Boot length (l) = (bt_vol * 4)/( * d^2)
where:
hl_vfr = heavy liquid volumetric flow rate
hl_vel = heavy liquid velocity
l = boot length
d = boot diameter
Vertical Vessels
The following graphic shows a typical vertical vessel.
The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria specifications
form:

Residence Time
Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
Average liquid particle diameter
Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
Separation Factor
Minimum Disengagement Height
Minimum height above the mist eliminator
Height of Mist Eliminator
Vessel diameter is calculated in the same manner as for horizontal vessels. The default
value of Separation Factor Multiplier is available in the Design Criteria specifications.
Calculating Vessel Height

Vessel liquid holdup volume is based on the light liquid flowrate and the residence
time. The liquid height in the vessel is then calculated and the additional height is
added to obtain the overall vessel height.
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t
l_ht = (l_vol * 4) / ( * D^2)
h = LLLTap_ht + l_ht+ HLLTap_ht + d_ht + me_ht + mea_ht
where:
l_vol = liquid holdup volume
l_vfr = light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = residence time
l_ht = liquid height based on residence time
LLLTap_ht = minimum height between low liquid level tap and
tangent line (design criteria)
ddHLLTap_ht = height between inlet nozzle and high liquid level
tap (design criteria)
d_ht = disengagement height
me_ht = mist eliminator height
mea_ht = Height above the mist eliminator
If the calculated l_ht is less than the minimum height between the taps, specified in
the design criteria, then the minimum height is used.
Checking L/D ratio

For all liquid
After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of L/D is
compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on the Design
Criteria specifications form.

7 Piping and Instrumentation
Models
Interconnecting Volumetric
P&ID Lines
Connect pipelines between components in an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project,
estimate the project, and create piping line list report for connected lines with the
same line tag.
Open an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

project
Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project and add equipment
components to the new project.
Run Interconnect Piping Lines

To run interconnect piping lines:
1 On the main tool bar, click Run.
2 Click Interconnect Piping Lines to launch the GUI as shown below:
7 Piping and Instrumentation Models 255

The GUI displays five lists. All equipment and its associated pipelines in the project are
displayed in two groups:
Connect From
Connect To
The first two lists display equipment and piping lines in the Connect From group.
The third list displays all connected lines.
The fourth and fifth lists display piping lines and equipment in the Connect To group.
3 On the list in the Connect From and Connect To groups, click the
desired equipment item.
The line lists will then display only the lines corresponding to the selected equipment.
When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line, the tooltip in the list provides
additional information related to this item. The related additional information is also
displayed in the bottom text area when clicking on an equipment or a line.
Connecting Piping Lines

To connect two lines:
1 Select the Auto Generate Line Tag check box, or, in the Line Tag field,
type a unique line tag.
2 In the Connect From line list, click a piping line.
3 In the Connect To line list, click the desired line.
4 Click Connect.
256 7 Piping and Instrumentation Models

5 Repeat Steps 1-4 above to connect all the desired lines between the
equipment items.
Note: Use Filter to display all disconnected equipment or all disconnected

lines.
Disconnecting Piping Lines

To disconnect all existing pipeline connections between
all equipment:
Click Disconnect All.
All connected lines will be removed from middle list and will be displayed in the
respective line list.
To disconnect a specific line between the two equipment:

In the middle list, click a line item; then click Disconnect.

Renaming a Line Tag
To rename a line tag:
1 On the Connecting list, click the desired item.
2 In Line Tag field, edit the line tag.
3 Click Rename Line Tag.
Saving All Connections and (optionally)

Updating the Project
To save all the connections and update the project:
Click the Update Project.

To save all the connections without updating the project:
Click the Save Mapping & Exit.
All connections on the GUI are saved, but the project is not updated.
Getting the Connected Line List Report

To get the connected line list report:
1 Evaluate the above project.
2 Click View | Capital Cost View.
The Select Report Type to View dialog box appears.
3 On the Select Report Type to View dialog box, click Interactive
Reports; then click OK
The reporter is active.
4 Click Excel reports.
5 Click Other reports | Discipline | Pipe:
o Connected Line List
-or-
o Model Line List
as shown below:
6 Click Run Report.

The report is shown below:
Connected Line List

Model Line List
Mapping Streams to Piping

Lines
In an existing or new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (or Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Overlay) project, you can assign
stream physical properties to lines in order to size the line diameter.
To Map Streams to Lines:

1 Open an existing Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator (with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer overlay) project, or
create a new project.
2 On the main menu, click Run | Map Stream to Lines to launch the GUI.
The GUI displays four lists. All the streams are displayed in the STREAM list box. All
equipment and their associated pipelines in the project are displayed in the last two
list boxes. The middle list displays all mapped streams and lines.

3 On the Equipment list, click an equipment item.
The line list will then display only the lines corresponding to the selected equipment.
When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line or a stream, the tooltip in the list
provides additional information related to this item. The related additional information
is also displayed in the bottom text area when clicking on an equipment item, a line,
or a stream.
Mapping Streams to Piping Lines

To map a stream to a pipeline:
1 On the STREAM list, click a stream.
2 On the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator | Line list, click a piping line.
3 Click Map.
Mapped streams and lines are displayed in the middle list.
4 Repeat steps 1-3 above to map all the desired streams and lines.
Note: Use Filter to display all unmapped equipment and all unmapped lines
if needed.

Un-mapping Streams to Piping Lines
To Un-map all existing mapped streams and lines:
Click Un-map all.
To Un-map a specific stream and line:

1 On the Mapping list, click a mapped item.
The Map button becomes Un-Map.
2 Click Un-Map.
The selected items are removed from the middle list and go back to their respective
lists.
Using the Auto-Map Option

You can set the Auto-Map option in two ways:
On the Preference tab
From the Mapping GUI
To use the Auto-Map Option using the Preference tab:

The Auto Map button is unavailable in the mapping GUI if on the Tools | Options |
Preferences | Process tab the Auto Map Streams to Lines check box is selected.
The Pre-auto-mapped streams-lines are displayed in the middle list box of the Map
Stream to lines GUI.

To make the Auto Map button available:
On the Tools | Options | Preferences | Process tab, clear the Auto
Map Streams to Lines check box.
To use the Auto-Map Option from the Mapping GUI:

On the Map Stream to Lines dialog box, click Auto Map to automatically
map streams to lines.
To save all the stream mappings to lines and update the

project:
Click Update Project.
To save all the stream mappings to lines without updating

the project:
Click Save Mapping & Exit.

8 Developing and Using Cost
Libraries
The Libraries view on the Palette arranges libraries in a tree-structure. Most of the
libraries listed access project specifications (explained in Chapter 3). The Cost
Libraries are unique, however, in that they comprise collections of particular cost items
that you can add as project components. The cost libraries are customizable; you can
add items to the libraries provided, as well as add your own libraries.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer includes two types of cost libraries: Equipment
Model Library (EML) and Unit Cost Library (UCL). Each library type may include one or
more library files, which in turn may contain one or more library items, each
representing a particular type of cost item.
Equipment Model Library (EML)

The EML is intended to store custom equipment items, for which you create
component specification forms. In a project, you can add an item from the EML as a
component and fill out the form that you earlier created.
The library can store a generic equipment item that comes in discrete sizes, such as
an extruder, or an equipment item that follows a continuous cost-capacity relationship
such as linear, semi-log or log-log.
Unit Cost Library (UCL)

The UCL is intended to store and retrieve direct costs and installation man-hours,
which are based on a simple unit of measure (for example, the cost of a material item
or installation man-hours per unit of area, per unit of length, per item, and so on).
Costs can also be stored in a library for indirect items such as project management
man-hours per month, crane rental (plant hire) on a daily, weekly, monthly basis, and
so on.
For one-of-a-kind cost items not worth storing in a library, the unit cost library may be
used to create a dummy item for recall and modification in a project. The dummy item
is stored in the library with as little data as possible. This can be retrieved and
8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries 265

modified in as much detail as required whenever you need a one-time cost added into
a project.
Developing and Using an

Equipment Model Library (EML)
Creating an EML
The instructions in this sub-section show you how to create an EML. The instructions in
the sub-sections that follow this one, which show you how to add an item to an EML
and then add the item to a project, use a single example that can be added either to
an Inch-Pound EML that you created or to one of the two Inch-Pound EMLs provided.
To create an EML:
1 With no project open, go to the Palettes Libraries tab view.
2 Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand Equipment
Model Library.
The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.
3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure
basis, as in the example used in these instructions, right-click Inch-
Pound; then click New on the pop-up menu.
The New Equipment Model Library dialog box appears.
266 8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries

4 Enter a file name (required) for the EML and a brief description (optional),
then click OK.
An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new library.
Adding an Item to an EML

The instructions below for defining and using an EML item follow a single example
from item creation through the addition of the item to a project. Using the example
provided will define the item in such a way that it automatically generates a
foundation and/or electrical power supply bulks.
To add an item to an EML:
Note: If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and
you can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
1 Go to the Palettes Libraries tab view.
2 Expand Cost Libraries, Equipment Libraries, and either Inch-Pound or
Metric. (If following the example provided, select Inch-Pound.)

3 Right-click the library to which you want to add an item, and then click
Modify on the pop-up menu.
4 Click Add on the Library dialog box.
5 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.
The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies the library
item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library items. The first
character must be a letter.
6 Click OK.
7 Enter the descriptive data for a the item in the Develop Equipment Model
Library form. If following the example, enter the data exactly as shown
below. Be sure to correctly enter the sizing parameters, CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR; Aspen Process Economic Analyzer knows to use GPM (or L/S
for METRIC) and HP, respectively, for these parameters.

Sizing method: the data
is in the form of either a
continuous curve
(linear, log-log or
semi-log) or a set of
discrete tabular values.
When an equipment
model library item is
retrieved into a project,
the specified size for
the project component
is used to develop the
appropriate cost,
man-hours and weight
from the library data.
8 Click OK to save your specifications.

The new item appears on the Library dialog box, which you can now close.
Adding an EML Item to a Project Scenario

To add an EML item to a project scenario:
1 Open the project to which you want to add the EML item. For the purposes
of this example, you can use either an existing or newly created US/I-P
based project.

2 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click the area in which to add the
EML item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.
3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a project
component name for the item.
4 Click Equipment Model Library and click OK.

5 On the Select an Equipment Model Library File dialog box, click the
EML to which you added the item; then Click OK.
6 On the Select an Equipment Model Library Item dialog box, select the
item you added; then click OK.

7 Enter your specifications for the item at the Component Specifications
form, as shown below. Note that the Size parameters CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR are included on the form.
8 Click OK to apply and save the specifications.

The item will now be included in project evaluations.
Note: If you want to use sizing parameters with the EML, you must use one
of the sizing parameter symbols listed below:
Symbol Description
AREA Heat Exchanger Area
AREAH Area Height
AREAL Area Length
AREAW Area Width
CAP Liquid Volume
CAPACITY Liquid Volume

CAPFLOW Liquid Flowrate
CAPREF Refrigeration Capacity
DENS Fluid Density
DENSITY Fluid Density
DIA Vessel Diameter
DIAMETER Vessel Diameter
DIA1 Bottom Diameter
DIA2 Top Diameter
DTMP Design Temperature
DTMP2 Alt Design Temperature
DUTY Heat Transfer
FLOW2 Alt Gas Flow
FLOWRATE Gas Flow
HEAD Fluid Head
HEIGHT Vessel T-T Height
HGT Vessel T-T Height
HGT1 Bottom Height
HGT2 Top Height
JPRES Jacket Pressure
LENGTH Equipment Length
LTH Equipment Length
MWGT Molecular Weight
NITEMS Multiple Items
POWER Power
PRES Pressure
PRES2 Alt Pressure
PRESSURE Pressure
PWRDRVR Power
RAT Flow
SPGR Specific Gravity
TMP Temperature
TMP2 Alt Temperature
VISCOS Viscosity
VOL Gas or Solid Volume
VOLUME Gas or Solid Volume
WIDTH Equipment Width
WTH Equipment Width
Developing and Using a Unit

Cost Library (UCL)
The instructions below use as an example a library of asbestos abatement (ASBABT)
costs and man-hours. This example has been selected because environmental

remediation data is difficult to model, since costs and man-hours tend to vary greatly
based on site conditions and project types. Items of a unique and/or variable nature
are ideal for storing in a UCL.
The instructions take this example through the following stages: library creation,
adding items to the library, adding a library item to a project as a component, and
forming an assembly in the project out of multiple UCL items.
Creating a Unit Cost Library

To create a unit cost library:
1 With no project open, go to the Palettes Libraries tab view.
2 Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand Unit Cost
Library.
The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.
3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure

basis, as in the ASBABT example used in these instructions, right-click
Inch-Pound and click New on the pop-up menu.
4 In the New Unit Cost Library dialog box, enter a file name (required) for
the UCL and a brief description (optional).

5 Click OK to create the new UCL.
An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new UCL.
Adding an Item to a UCL

To add items to a UCL:
1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and you
may skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
a. Go to the Palettes Libraries tab view.
b. Expand Cost Libraries, Unit Cost Libraries, and either Inch-Pound or Metric.
c. Right-click the library to which you want to add an item, and then click Modify
on the pop-up menu.
2 Click Add on the Library dialog box.
3 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Develop Unit Cost Library form, enter information for the new item.

Note: Costs for the item will be allocated to the specified Code of Account
(COA). See ICARUS Reference, Chapter 34, for COA definitions.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses the Material Cost Per Unit and Labor Cost Per
Unit to cost the item in an estimate. If Labor Hours Per Unit is specified and Labor
Cost Per Unit is left blank, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer will calculate the labor
cost using the project wage rates at the time of the estimate.
The Unit of Measure can be designated for each or by any appropriate unit (that is,,
1000 SF ). Be sure to sufficiently describe the item so that you know what the unit
costs include when the item is retrieved at some future date. The quantity is entered
when the library item is retrieved into a project.
The Date and Source are for your reference and are not transferred into an estimate.
6 When done entering specifications for the item, click OK.
To add a set of items as in the ASBABT example, repeat the process (Steps 2-4) to
add the following items in addition to the one shown in the previous graphic.
Code of Matl Cost Per Labor Cost Unit of Date of
Reference No. Item Description Account Unit Per Unit Measure quotation
AAB200 Polyethylene 800 .021 .004 SF 04APR01
Sheeting
AAB201 Duct Tape ( 300 roll ) 800 3.50 ROLL 04APR01
AAB202 Adhesive Spray (60 / 800 6.00 CAN 04APR01

can)
AAB300 Decontami- 800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01
nation Shower
AAB301 Neg Air Pressure 800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01
System
AAB400 Lighting Fixture 800 .01 EACH 04APR01
Removal
After the above are added, the Library dialog box will appear as shown below.

7 When done adding items to the UCL, click Close on the Library dialog box.
Adding a UCL Item to a Project

To add a single UCL item to a project:
1 Open the project to which you want to add the UCL item. To add an item
from the ASBABT library developed as an example in the previous
instructions, you can open either an existing or newly created US/I-P
based project.
UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.
3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a project
component name for the item.

4 Select Unit Cost Library and click OK.
5 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL to
which you added the item and click OK.
6 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the item you
added and click OK.

7 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option drop-down
button and click Unit Cost Items.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer retrieves the unit cost data you set up in Libraries.
Creating an Assembly of UCL Items

This section shows how to add several items from the library to form an assembly. In
the example, the items from the ASBABT library are added to form an Asbestos
Abatement Area Preparation Assembly.
To create an assembly of UCL items in a project:

UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.
2 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, enter as the
project component name a description of the assembly.

3 Click Unit Cost Library and click OK.
4 At the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL
containing the first item to add to the assembly and click OK.
5 At the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the first item
to add to the assembly and click OK.

6 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option drop-down
button and select Unit Cost Items.
7 Click Add.
8 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL
containing the next item to add to the assembly and click OK.
9 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the next item
to add to the assembly and click OK.

10 Repeat the process of adding items until the form contains columns for all
the items in the assembly.
11 After entering quantities for the items click OK.

The assembly is listed as one project component on the Project Explorer (Project view)
and the List view.
You can now run an evaluation on the item (see page 454 for instructions). An Item
Report would summarize total costs and man-hours, as well as list each assembly
items costs and man-hours.
Working with Cost Libraries

Equipment model and unit cost libraries share the functions described in this section.

Copying a Library Item
When adding a library item similar to one that already exists, it is easier to copy the
existing library item and modify the necessary specifications.
To copy a library item:

1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click Copy.
2 Enter a Reference ID for the new item.

3 Click OK. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the new item with all the
same data as the original only the Reference ID has changed.
Deleting a Library Item

When a library item is no longer useful, it can be removed from the library file.
To delete a library item:

1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click Delete.
A dialog box appears to confirm the delete.

2 Click Yes to delete the selected library item.
-or-
Click No to retain the library item in the library file.
Escalating Library Costs

Library items contain costs which change over time due to inflation. Escalating library
costs bring the library costs up to date.
To escalate library costs:

1 Click Escalate on the Library dialog box.
The Escalate Costs dialog box appears.

2 Enter the escalation specifications.
In this field type

New Base Date: The date of escalation or the date
at which the prices are current.
Material Escalation: Amount by which to escalate
material costs.
Labor Escalation: Amount by which to escalate
labor costs. Since equipment
model libraries only include
setting man-hours, not labor
costs, this field only appears
when escalating unit cost
libraries.
3 Click OK to escalate all the library items in the library file.
Importing a Cost Library

You can import UCL files, which have the extension .LIB, and EML files, which have
the extension .EML, from elsewhere on your computer or network.
To import a cost library:

1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the appropriate Units of
Measure basis (Inch-Pound or Metric), and then click Import on the
pop-up menu.

2 In the Select a File for Import window, locate the file and then click
Open.
The file is now included in the Palette and its items can be added as Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer project components.
Duplicating a Cost Library

To duplicate a cost library:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the library you want to
duplicate, and then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.
2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new library.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Library dialog box for the new Library,
which contains the same items as the original. You can add, modify, or delete the
items without affecting the original.
Deleting a Cost Library

To delete a cost library:
In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the library to be deleted, and
then click Delete on the pop-up menu.

9 Changing Plant Capacity
and Location
Two modules within Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Analyzer Scale-up Module
(ASM) and Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) let you evaluate alternate plant
capacities and locations.
Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) When you change plant capacity, Analyzer re-
sizes each project component to your desired plant capacity. Unique expert system
rules, based on engineering principles, provide the basis for revising the size of every
project component in the process facility that is implicated in stream flows, as well as
the size of other plant facility components in the plant layout, including process and
utility components inside battery limits (ISBL) and outside battery limits (OSBL),
associated installation bulks, piping, cable runs, buildings, structures, pipe racks, and
site improvements. Quoted costs and installation hours, and in some instances,
numbers of identical items (for example, the number of trees along a fenceline) are
also subject to change on changing production capacity.
Changing Plant Capacity

Changing the production capacity affects not only every stream flow, but the size, and
in some cases, the number of project components. The Analyzer Scale-up Module
(ASM) automatically examines each element of a project, applies a set of scale-up
rules unique to that element and recreates the entire plant description according to
the new production capacity.
ASM contains rules for each of the hundreds of Aspen Icarus project components.
Rules are based on engineering principles for elements that are directly linked to
production capacity. For other elements that are footprint oriented such as building
and structures, rules based on heuristics are applied.
When the scaled project is evaluated, design quantities that are developed for the
newly sized components are designed to meet the needs of a project. Further,
revisions to P&IDs and similar user adjustments contained in the baseline project are
also treated in the same way. The idea is to design a scaled project as it is intended to
be built. This methodology eliminates the need for applying a factor to the baseline
plant cost to scale it up or down. Given a new capacity, ASM recreates the entire
plant.
The ASM process is automatic and rapid. ASM revises sizes of components to meet a
revised capacity and the project evaluation engines do the difficult, time-consuming
evaluation work. Users find ASM performs its re-sizing operation results to be similar
to engineering design methods with the added benefit of much reduced time and
9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location 287

resources. Further, equal confidence can be applied to evaluation results before and
after using ASM as rules are discipline-based and the before and after evaluation
processes are identical.
To change plant capacity:

1 Open your baseline project and save it under a new scenario name that
reflects the new capacity. This will ensure that your baseline project
remains intact, separate and apart from your about-to-be scaled project.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the A button on the
toolbar.
The Decision Analyzer dialog box appears.
3 Select the Change Plant Capacity by (5-600%) check box to change

the plant capacity for all areas.
-or-
If you want to change the capacity for individual areas:
a. select the Scale by Area check box, and then click the Select Areas
button. The Scale by Areas dialog box appears.
b. On the Scale by Areas dialog box, select the check boxes for the areas
where you want to adjust the scale. In the Scaling Factor column, edit
the scale as desired for each selected area.
c. Click OK to return to the Decision Analyzer form.
4 If you opted to change plant capacity, type the desired percentage
adjustment or select it using the Up/Down arrow buttons. For example, if
you need to revise the capacity by a value beyond 600% to 700%, scale
your project twice. For this, the Evaluate Project check box should be
cleared. Then you can split the desired 700% into two parts: first use
350%, and on completion, scale it again at 200%.
288 9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location

5 Click OK to initiate the Analyzer Scale-up Module.
6 Upon completion, save the scaled project.
Analyzer Scale-Up Module

(ASM)
How ASM Works
Scale-up of a project to a new production capacity is a two-step process.
1 The Aspen Scale-up Module is invoked. The ASM processor:
a. analyzes each specification in your project
b. applies the appropriate scale-up rule
c. revises the specification to a new value
d. moves on to the next specification
You can follow the progress of this phase by noting the item names in the
display at the bottom of your screen.
2 The project is evaluated. This phase performs the designs, develops
quantities, hours, costs, and so on, and prepares the basic set of reports
for your project at the new capacity. On completion of this step, you can
proceed to prepare special reports and perform other analyses on your
newly scaled project.
Save the project after the scale-up operation.
Scale-Up Rule Set

Analyzer contains rules for hundreds of components and cost elements that are based
on:
engineering design principles for scale-up of all process equipment,
stream flows, quoted costs and hours, and so on.
heuristics for plant items that are based on footprint and plot plan
The current rule set in some instances modifies the number of items rather than
change sizes, as in the simple example of trees along a fence line, where the number
of trees would be revised rather than the size of each tree. In the current rule set,
there is no automatic provision for changing the number of project components.
Limiting Conditions
It is possible that on extreme capacity scale-ups, sizes of certain equipment or bulk
items may surpass a system limiting value. In this case, an error condition would be
issued. The user would then examine the scaled model for the particular item(s) and
revise the size and number of out-of-range items accordingly, as an item in an error
condition would be excluded from the estimate.
Warning messages are generated after project scaling (via ASM) is performed
notifying users if scaling rules could not be applied to certain equipment
components due to min/max limits on equipment specs being reached. In the
event scaled values fall outside either min. or max. equipment spec limits, the

pre-scaled value is retained. Once an error condition is met, you have the
option to either stop the scaling operation or continue. If stop is clicked then
further operations based on your selection in the Decision Analyzer dialog (for
example, evaluation) will not be run. These error messages are similar to
scan errors dialog and will provide you with a listing of components in which
the ASM rules cannot be applied (see example below).
Scale-up Candidates
ASM rules apply to the following types of project information:
1 Area specs: distances, dimensions, cost per unit weight
2 Project Component specs: specific rules based on item type and
specification, typically size dimension, capacity, power and occasionally
number of items
Note: Several sanitary process equipment items associated with batch food
processing are not scaled.
3 Installation specs: quoted costs, hours and numeric dimension specs for
piping, duct, civil, steel, electrical, insulation, paint. Text-based sizes such
as pipe schedule, wire size, and so on are symbolic and are not scaled.
4 Project Component Quoted Cost and Hours: While ASM has rules for
quoted cost and hours, the ASM rule may not be the best for your type of
item. Here, its better to apply a % Adjustment to the systems estimated
cost in an amount that will bring the estimated cost up to your quoted
value. Then, on scaling, the new reported cost will be calculated by
applying your % Adjustment to the estimated cost. Based on the scaled
sizes.
o Quoted hours: based on item type
o Quoted weight: based on item type
o Stream flow rate: scaled to the new capacity
Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis

Often, sections of a proposed facility may be required to consist of parallel trains,
joining up to meet downstream units. Situations such as these are best handled by
creating models of these sections at a standard capacity and then scaling desired
sections to say 50% capacity. You would then import the various sections into an
overall model, with multiple trains being imported as many times as required. The
resulting model would then be evaluated for capital investment and process
economics.

Analyzer Relocation Module
(ARM)
The Analyzer Relocation Module lets you evaluate the impact of worldwide location on
capital cost and a variety of other econometrics. Specifically, you can relocate a
project from one base location to any one of 89 worldwide locations. You can choose
to retain the location of your engineering workforce or choose any one of 89 worldwide
locations.
When you need to evaluate a project that you might engineer and/or construct in a
different city or country location, ARM will quickly and automatically revise your
project parameters with those contained in its location knowledge base. The ARM
knowledge base includes key location-dependent data and rules to convert your
project from its starting base location to your selected location using location
dependent values for design parameters, engineering and construction work forces,
cost of materials, and engineering, material and construction indirects. You can use
ARM in combination with the Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) and Analyzer Economics
Module (AEM) all in the same run or separately from the other modules.
Relocation Terminology
Baseline project: initial case, before executing ARM.
Relocated project: after ARM processing of the baseline project.
Relocation: a process of evaluating an initially formulated project
(baseline project) to a new location (relocated project).
Locations: a general location, characterized by a city and country name,
which is used to represent a particular EPC function. The function may or
may not be physically sited in that city.
Engineering location: city and country name used to characterize the
engineering workforce assigned to the project.
Plant location: city and country name used to characterize the plant site.
Workflow
The figure below shows the general work process. ARM specs, contained in the ARM
rule set are applied to the users model. A description of the elements in the table is
provided in the section following the Workflow.

How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM) Works
Baseline Reports
U
Relocation Reports
U
For Base For New

Engineering and Engineering and
Plant Location Plant Location
Reports
Analyzer
Project
Baseline Relocation Relocated
Project Module Project
(ARM)
ARM Specs
Project
Specs
Construction Construction Material Engineering Engineering

Hours Rates Quantities Hours Rates
Construction Materials Engineering

Indirects Indirects Indirects
Construction Materials Engineering

Contingency Contingency Contingency
Construction Engineering
Fee Cost
Construction Material
Cost Cost
Project
Contingency

1 Since ARM processing is automatic, it is wise to first save your base
project under a new scenario name in advance of running ARM. Use a
scenario name that refers to the planned new capacity. This will ensure
that your baseline project remains intact for further evaluations.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the A button on the
button bar:
Figure 1. Button Bar
This will display the Decision Analyzer dialog box, Figure 2.
Note: ARM shares space with ASM and AEM and Evaluate Project on the
four-part Decision Analyzer dialog box.
3 Select the check box Change Plant Location to.
4 Click the Plant Location from its pull-down list.
5 Click the Engineering Location from its pull-down list.
6 Use the remaining check boxes to select options to:
o Enable escalation for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer projects.
o Retain your defined construction start date and duration. If unchecked,
a new date will be developed on relocation.
Note: The last line on the Decision Analyzer dialog box displays three pieces
of information:
plant location
currency name
currency symbol, in parentheses
This information is a reminder to users of the Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) who
are interested in reporting costs in currency different from the plant location currency.
For this, two entry slots are provided for an exchange rate and symbol. If AEM is not
invoked, values so entered will not affect the reporting aspects of relocation aspects.
In Figure 2, the user elected to run AEM. This would take place immediately after ARM
completed the relocation process, described as follows.
Figure 2. Decision Analyzer Dialog Box Illustration for a plant to be engineered
in Rotterdam and constructed in Singapore. The currency of the plant location is
displayed in the last wire-frame.

Figure 2. Decision Analyzer Dialog Box
Relocating the Project

7 Having completed the choices, click OK to run the project. If you click
Cancel, all choices will be ignored and control will return to the explorer
view.
With your OK, Decision Analyzers relocation module will automatically convert your
base location project to the selected engineering and plant location. Your project will
then contain the results of the relocation, which you can review and modify. To do
this, select the Project Basis view and click the desired basis category. Open the
associated form, review the data and modify, as you desire. When pleased with the
results, SAVE the project, making sure that it is saved under a scenario name that
describes the relocation and most important, that your baseline project is not
disturbed by the SAVE. You can then evaluate the project and review the results. A
final SAVE will save the results.
ARM Knowledge Base

The ARM knowledge base consists of approximately ten thousand location-specific data
values plus rules that govern the way the location data will be applied to your baseline
project. The ARM knowledge base is derived from a variety of qualified sources
including:
Aspen Richardson international construction data: raw data from this
source (also used to prepare the Aspen Richardson International Cost
Factor Manual) were analyzed and mapped into Icarus technology formats
for use in ARM
Proprietary sources
Practicing professionals, EPC and owner customers and associates
Surveys
Technical publications that specialize in international construction costs
Government sources: seismic, climate data and other location data

Financial sources: exchange rates, and so on.
Aspen Icarus models: to blend and fill in sparse data areas
Five Bodies of Data

The ARM knowledge base consists of five bodies of data:
Location specs
Project specs
Engineering specs
Construction specs
Material Cost specs
Highlights of each component follow.
Location Specs
ARM is formulated for 89 locations in 33 currencies. Locations listed below include the
four Icarus country base locations. The locations are similar to those in the Aspen
Richardson International Cost Factor Manual list.
Locations are organized and sorted by continental region, country and city. For
Canadian and US locations, names include state, province or territory. Conventional
short forms of country and city names are used for simplicity.
Regions - The number of locations for each region is listed in Table 1.
City Locations outside the US are listed in Table 2
US locations are listed in Table 3.
TABLE 1. List of Locations in Each Region

Africa 3
Asia 15
Australia 3
Canada 6
Central America 2
Europe 12
Middle East 6
South America 5
United States 37
All Locations 89
Non-US Locations 52
TABLE 2. List of Non-US Locations

Region City, Country Near
Africa El Hassania, Morocco Casablanca

Ibadan, Nigeria
Johannesburg, South Africa
Asia Beijing, China
Guangzhou, China
Shanghai, China

Bhopal, India New Delhi

Mumbai (Bombay), India
Jakarta, Indonesia
Kobe, Japan
Tokyo, Japan
Kuantan, Malaysia Kuala Lumpur
Manila, Philippines
Singapore, Singapore
Seoul, South Korea
Taipei, Taiwan
Samutprakam, Thailand Bangkok
Binh Duong, Vietnam Hanoi
Australia Melbourne, Australia
Perth, Australia
Sydney, Australia
Central America Guatemala City, Guatemala
Mexico City, Mexico
Canada Calgary, Canada
Montreal, Canada
Toronto, Canada
Vancouver, Canada
Windsor, Canada
Winnipeg, Canada
Europe Brussels, Belgium
Paris, France
Frankfurt, Germany
Dublin, Ireland
Milan, Italy
Amsterdam, Netherlands
Rotterdam, Netherlands
Warsaw, Poland
Moscow, Russia
Barcelona, Spain
London, United Kingdom
Manchester, United Kingdom
Middle East Cairo, Egypt
Kuwait City, Kuwait
Dammam, Saudi Arabia Al Jubail
Jeddah, Saudi Arabia
Gebze, Turkey Istanbul
Abu Dhabi, UAE
South America Buenos Aires, Argentina
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil

Medellin, Colombia
Lima, Peru
Caracas, Venezuela
TABLE 3. List of US City Locations

Anchorage, AK
Atlanta, GA
Baltimore, MD
Boston, MA
Cape Girardeau, MO
Cayey, PR
Charlotte, NC
Chicago, IL
Cincinnati, OH
Dallas, TX
Denver, CO
Fairbanks, AK
Green Bay, WI
Houston, TX
Huntsville, AL
Indianapolis, IN
Kansas City, MO
Knoxville, TN
Las Vegas, NV
Los Angeles, CA
Louisville, KY
New Orleans, LA
New York, NY
Newark, NJ
Oakland, CA
Philadelphia, PA
Phoenix, AZ
Portland, ME
Portland, OR
Sacramento, CA
San Francisco, CA
Seattle, WA
Sherman, TX
Spartanburg, SC
St Louis, MO
Syracuse, NY
Wilkes-Barre, PA

Project Data
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of values for project level
data. These should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of a project.
Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated
project with more representative values obtained from company surveys of the
intended site.
Currency: Exchange rate (FEX), as of the first day of the basis year, with
exchange rate and currency units scaled to meet Icarus currency formats.
Scaled currency units are provided at three levels: 3-character symbol, 8-
character name and 24-character description. Values are listed in Table 4.
o Currency: 33 currencies are defined; some ARM locations share the
same currency
o Exchange rate, for each location. The ARM knowledge base works with
exchange rates relative to the currency of each of the four country
bases (US, UK, JP, EU). The currency table contains the rates as of the
listed date.
o Exchange rates are scaled in size to conform with Icarus exchange rate
formats (0.01 to 99.9 in value)
o Scaled currency symbols, names and descriptions are defined to
conform to Icarus format; these contain symbols such as K to
represent thousands and M to represent millions of scaled currency
units, as indicated in Table 4.

TABLE 4. List of Currencies
Current European Union Locations:
Exchange Rate
Currency Currency Currency , per USD
Country Description Name Symbol (1 Jan 2011)
Argentina Argentine Peso Peso-A P 4.0025
Australia Australian Dollar Dollar-A A$ 0.982
Brazil Brazilian Real Real R 1.6763
Canada Canadian Dollar Dollar-C C$ 0.9985
China Chinese Yuan Renminbi R 6.5922
Renminbi
Colombia K Colombian Peso K Peso K-P 1.94025
Egypt Egyptian Pound Pound-E PDE 5.873
European Union Euro Euro EUR 0.7497
Guatemala Guatemalan Quetzal Quetzal Q 8.1625
India Indian rupee Rupee R 45.4683
Indonesia K Indonesian Rupiah K Rupiah K-R 9.09918
Japan K Japanese Yen K Yen K-Y 0.08138
Kuwait Kuwaiti Dinar Dinar DK 0.2817
Malaysia Malaysian Ringgit Ringgit R 3.113
Mexico Mexican Peso Peso-MX P 12.3931
Morocco Moroccan Dirham Dirham-M D 8.5059
Nigeria K Nigerian Naira K Naira K-N 0.15435
Peru Peruvian Nuevo Sol Nuevo Sol NS 2.8407
Phillipines Phillipine Peso Peso-P P 44.7753
Poland Polish Zloty Zloty Z 2.9695
Russia Russian Rouble Rouble RBL 30.5259
Saudi Arabia Saudi Riyal Riyal R 3.7521
Singapore Singapore Dollar Dollar-S S$ 1.2853
South Africa South African Rand Rand ZAR 6.6392
South Korea K South-Korean K Won K-W 1.13636
Won
Taiwan Taiwan Dollar Dollar-T T$ 29.175
Thailand Thai Baht Baht B 30.1871
Turkey Turkish New Lira New Lira NL 1.5473
United Arab Utd. Arab Emir. Dirham-U D 3.6731
Emirates Dirham
United Kingdom British Pound Pound-UK PDS 0.6452
United States US Dollar Dollar US USD 1
Venezuela K Venezuelan K Boliv K-B 4.3105
Bolivar
Vietnam K Vietnamese Dong K Dong K-D 19.6129
Belgium
France
Germany
Ireland
Italy
Netherlands
Spain

Note: Certain combinations of location currencies and country base
currencies may result in exchange rates that exceed the format bounds for
exchange rate. In such cases, ARM will automatically scale the exchange rate
ratio and revise the currency units, usually with a prefix of "K" to indicate
thousands of the above-listed currency unit. Example: The exchange rate for
Plant location: India, at 46.899 per USD and Country Base: Japan at
0.092586 is 495.74 R/K Yen, which is beyond the exchange rate bound: the
resulting ratio will be scaled by 1000 to 0.496 KRupee/K Yen, and costs will
be reported in KRupee (KR)
Equipment: design code (ASME, BS5500, DIN, JIS, EN 133445, GB 150
depending upon the plant location)
Civil and Steel: seismic acceleration, soil, footing depth, low/high ambient
temperatures, wind velocity, hand excavation
Electrical: power supply frequency
Equipment Rental: a Construction Technology Level (CTL) parameter
(L, M, and H) is assigned to each location. Locations assigned as H-level
draw from the entire system slate of equipment rental items. S-level
locations select from a smaller slate than M-level locations.
Use of gin poles vs. heavy cranes: each location is assigned a value for
the heavy lift option
Engineering Work Force

The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of engineering workforce
values, which should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of a project.
intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each engineering work force location:
Hourly rates for each of 77 disciplines in the engineering workforce slate.
Hourly rates are provided in the currency of the engineering location.
During the processing of a project, these rates are converted, for
consistent cost reporting, to the currency of the plant location using the
exchange rate ratio:
Discipline Rate in Plant Location Currency =
Discipline Rate in the Engineering Location Currency x Plant Location Exchange
Rate / Engineering Location Exchange Rate
Engineering workforce productivity one value is provided for each
engineering location, relative to the engineering productivity at the
country base location
Engineering Indirect Costs values are provided for each location for each
of the eight phases of engineering:
o Expense rates
o Payroll burdens
o Office indirects
The eight phases of engineering are:
o Basic Engineering
o Detail Engineering

o Procurement
o Engineering Management
o Home Office Construction Services
o Field Office Supervision
o Construction Management
o Start-up, Commissioning
Engineering confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of engineering
contingency. Engineering contingency is computed as the root-mean
square value of the user engineering contingency and engineering
confidence level. For example, if the user contingency before relocation
UC =18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%, then the
computed contingency after relocation is:
= (UC2 + LC2) = (182+102 )
P
P
P
P
P
P
P = 20.6%
P
Construction
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of construction workforce
values, which should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of a project.
intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each construction work force location:
Field Craft rates hourly rates (nearly all-in) for each of 28 field crafts
in the construction work force slate and a foreman differential for each
location. By nearly all-in, we mean that each craft rate is a unique
composite of the following rate contributions:
o Craft Worker Base Hourly Wage Rate
o Health, Welfare, Pension
o Fringe Benefits
o Hourly Indirect Rate for:
Temporary Construction
Consumables and Small Tools
FICA Unemployment Workers Compensation Insurance
Multi-level construction
Craft rates in the ARM knowledge base do not include indirect construction
costs for the following categories as these would be determined during project
evaluation:
o Construction Equipment Rental, including Fuel, Oil, Lubrication,
Maintenance (FOLM)
o Field Supervision
o Contractor Home Office Costs
Construction workforce productivity one value is provided for each plant
location, relative to the construction productivity at the country base
location
Field indirect costs, including construction equipment rental (see Project
Data, below), field supervision, home office costs

Work week: hours, number of shifts, overtime
Construction equipment rental: slate of items (see Project Data, below)
Extent of hand excavation vs. machine excavation
Construction confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of construction
contingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of
the user construction contingency and construction confidence level. For
example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM
location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after
relocation is:
= (UC2 + LC2) = (182+102 )
P
P
P
P
P
P
P = 20.6%
P
Material Costs
Location Indexing
The ARM knowledge base contains a set of location indexes which will adjust
country base material costs to the plant location. Two sets are provided:
o The first deals with equipment costs.
o The second applies to bulk materials.
Use of the supplied location indexes should be considered as a starting point in the
evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base
values in their relocated project with more representative values obtained from
company surveys of the intended site.
The location indexes make use of Aspen Richardson values for the average split of
local vs. imported materials. Costs of local and imported materials are figured by
applying location values for freight, taxes, VAT, and other expenses. Location
indexes are stored for each of the four-country bases and are used to characterize
material costs by account code (100 to 299 for equipment, 300 to 999 for bulk
materials.)
o Unit cost of rebar, ready-mix concrete, in the currency of the
plant location
o Material cost confidence level, associated with the sources of
the ARM knowledge base data, used to compute a value of
material cost contingency. Contingency is computed as the
root-mean square value of the user material contingency and
material cost confidence level. For example, if the user
contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM location
confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency
after relocation is
= (UC2 + LC2) = (182+102 )
P
P
P
P
P
P
P = 20.6%
P

10 Analyzer Utility Modules
Introduction
Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) Design
and Scope Generators for Utility Systems
One of the difficulties with process economic analyses, both capital cost and payback
determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process or outside boundary limit
(OSBL) portions of the project. With AUM modules creating utility systems in harmony
with the process sections of a project, more accurate, realistic and confident business
assessments can be made for cost and economics.
Each AUM module works in the same way. It extracts information on the specific utility
needs of each project component and area in your project. You can then interactively
revise default values for design preferences and configuration, evaluate messages,
review reports of design results. On completion, a press of a Load button will
automatically transfer to your project, a list of selected, sized, designed project
components assembled within a unique date- and time-stamped utility area. Should a
prior utility area of the same type be present in your project, you can chose to delete
the old one and replace it with new scope.
All of this takes place in times measured in minutes rather than traditional days and
weeks. Of course, evaluation time depends on the size of the project. For front end
engineering design work, AUM modules can be revisited in each cycle of scope change
to ensure the project needs are properly satisfied by each utility system.
A Control Panel, a task bar button and numerous hypertext links provide for easy
navigation and rapid access to a status report, specs for preferences and
configurations, reports, an a guide. Messages are provided to assure data integrity;
an error condition will disallow loading of results into your project.
AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection,

Sizing, and Design Module
The cooling water utility module requires Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer plus Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to identify cooling
water resource streams and their flow conditions. Up to four cooling water systems
can be configured for a project, each with its own set of sized components: cooling
towers, circulation pumps, chemical injection pumps, supply and return distribution
piping, valves, and fittings.
304 10 Analyzer Utility Modules

You can interactively define design conditions such as ambient air temperatures, size
limits to distribution piping, equipment types, and assign individual areas to each
cooling water system. Redundancy capabilities include stand-alone pumps, two 50%
capacity pumps, stand-by spares. Distribution piping includes expansion loops for long
runs and circuits include main lines, branch lines, area headers, and risers and laterals
for 3D-type areas. Each line type has its own iso for valve and fitting type. Line sizes
and pump heads are pressure drop based.
AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility

Selection, Sizing, and Design Module
The air utility module can be accessed by either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. AUM_ Air gathers air requirements from your
project in two ways:
Instrument air: From a count of air operated control valves and controllers
and instrument air flow required for each based on control valve size
Plant air: From an air usage model based on a common air tool usage set,
with area utility stations derived from area size and equipment count
within an area
Up to four air plant units (APU) can be configured for a project, each with its own set
of sized components:
air intake filters/screens
ductwork
compressors
interstage coolers
air receivers
pre-filters
air dryers
after-filters
piping distribution network
You can interactively define design premises such as ambient air conditions,
equipment types, equipment redundancy, and so on and assign individual areas to be
served by each air plant unit. Redundancy capabilities include stand-alone
compressors, start-up compressors, receivers, dryers. Redundancy choices include one
at 100% capacity, two at 50% capacity, stand-by spares. Distribution piping includes
two sets, each sized for the required flow of instrument air and plant air. Piping isos
for line segments include expansion loops for long runs, valves and fittings, Line
segments are defined for main feeders, main manifolds, main lines branch lines, area
feeders, area headers and for 3Dtype areas, risers and laterals. Each line type has its
own iso for valve and fitting type. Line sizes are pressure drop based.
10 Analyzer Utility Modules 305

Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)
Cooling Water (AUM_Water)
Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module
(AUM) Cooling Water
Cooling Water Selection, Sizing, Design Model

This section is divided into four parts:
1 Overview
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)
Cooling Water Design Model
o Value in Time and Effort
o The Key Steps
2 Working with the Cooling Water Model
Preparation Workflow
The Workflow Cycle
Accessing The Cooling Water Model
o Interactive Session Workflow the Design Phase
o Overview
o Details of the Work Process
o The Initial Design
Interactive Session Workflow The Design Phase
o Overview
o Details of the Work Process
o The Initial Design
3 Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets
Introduction
o Worksheets
o Button actions
Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets
Worksheet Details
o Status Worksheet
o Preferences Worksheet
How to Revise Default Values
Design Preference Categories
o Circuits Worksheet
Initial Configuration
Step 1: Assignment of Areas to Circuits
How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design

Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between Areas
Status messages and Values Used for Circuit Design
4 Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model
o General Flow sheet for cooling water service
o Cooling Water Model Circuitry
o Cooling water distribution network
o Naming conventions
Project cooling water area
Areas Requiring Cooling Water
Plant bulk pipe item descriptions
Distribution Piping Line types
o Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line
o Cooling Water Footprint Model
o Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count
o Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations
Projects with a prior cooling water utility model area
Cooling towers- terminology and the defining stream
temperatures
1. Overview
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Water

One of the difficulties with economic analysis, both capital cost and payback
determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process utility or outside
boundary limit portions of the project. The Analyzer Utility Module, AUM, was created
as the home for a series of automated utility design models to address this difficulty.
The Cooling Water Selection, Design and Sizing Model is the first utility design model
in AUM and its functionality and method of use is described in detail in this chapter.
Cooling Water Design Model

The Cooling Water Design Model is an automated, interactive and rapid design module
that is contained in Aspen Decision Analyzer and works with stream-based projects.
The cooling water model identifies heat exchanger equipment or any other type of
project component that requires cooling water by its connection to a cooling water
utility resource stream.
To access the Cooling Water Design Model:
1 Starting with an open project that contains utility streams as part of its
definition, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, simply click the U
button to access utility models.
2 Click Cooling Water.
At this point built-in design and processing procedures do all the hard work under your
control and guidance and a few minutes later, your project will be augmented with a
new cooling water utility area that contains designed cooling water circuitry and
associated project components. You can use the model results using its set of

adjustable design parameters or revise any and default values within prescribed limits
to suit your needs.
In the discussions to follow, the term early design metrics is used to indicate values
prepared by the cooling water model during an interactive design session. These are
presented for guidance in advance of final design values that would be prepared on
completing a project evaluation run.
Note: Worksheet names are shown in italic bold face to distinguish the
names from text.
Value in Time and Effort

The cooling water design model does all the hard work design, selection, reporting,
loading the design results in minutes rather than traditional hours and days. It is a
powerful resource in the development of a typical Front End Engineering Design:
Early process technology evaluation stage - focus is on Inside Battery
Limits (ISBL) components
With the process technology selected and additional scope, total project
costs are sought. Outside Battery Limits (OSBL) components are
required, particularly cooling water utility service.
The cooling water design model
Automatically selects, designs, and adds sized utility system components
to the project scope definition
Can be revisited in each cycle of scope change.
The Key Steps

On initiating the cooling water model, the model automatically analyzes your project
for cooling water requirements and automatically generates selected, sized and
designed cooling water utility service project components all based on initial default
design preferences and circuitry. Two interactive workbooks Preferences and
Circuitry enable you to revise default values for the design and selection basis.
Studying design alternatives starts with either a click of an option box or a data entry.
Being interactive, the cooling water model enables you to cycle from design basis to
early design results in a matter of mouse clicks. Each new specification results in a
new design and a report of key decision metrics. The list of sized project components
is retained until you choose to load the results into your project. Messages and metrics
reports are provided extensively to guide you quickly and knowingly through a study
of design alternatives.
When you have settled on a design you can load the results into your project. The
loading operation begins with a click of a Load button and processing is automatic.
After a minute or so, the loading process will be complete and the Project Basis view
will be displayed on your screen. Scope items added to your project include a
uniquely named cooling water area followed by a list of cooling water utility project
components: cooling towers, circulation pumps, chemical injection pumps, working
and stand-by spares, and distribution piping, valves and fittings. Each component is
selected, designed and sized in harmony with your design basis and the needs of heat
exchange equipment in your various project areas.

2. Working with the Cooling Water Model
Preparation Workflow
The Cooling Water Design model requires a stream-based project built in either Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Decision Analyzer, with components that require
cooling water connected to one or more cooling water utility resources.
The flow rates, water temperatures, duties and components provide the basis for the
design requirements. The cooling water model will first diagnose the projects
requirements and initiate a design. The user can then revise the design basis and
review early design metrics for a variety of design scenarios, settle on a design basis
and load the design results into the project.
The Workflow Cycle

Figure 2.1 illustrates the cooling water design cycle: from project to design model and
back to the project with added new scope. Two buttons control the process:
U to select the cooling water model
Load to load designed results
Using these two actions, you can participate interactively in the design process,
making design selections, reviewing early metrics, revising selections, and clearing
any error messages.
Figure 2.1. The Workflow Cycle, extracted from the Welcome worksheet
To initiate a cooling water design model session, three steps are required
1 Save the project under a new scenario name.
2 Evaluate the project
3 Run the Cooling water utility model
Each of these steps is detailed and illustrated in the following sections.

Accessing the Cooling Water Utility Model
1 SAVE AS: Since AUM-Cooling Water processing is automatic, it is wise to
first save your base project under a new name. This will ensure that your
base project remains intact for further evaluations.
2 Evaluate the project: Click Run |Decision Analyzer as in Figure 2.2a or
click the A button as in Figure 2.2b. This will provide the Decision Analyzer
dialog box, Figure 2.2c. Check Evaluate Project and provide a file name.
Figure 2.2a. To evaluate from Run:
Figure 2.2b. To evaluate using the A-button.
Figure 2.2c. Choose Evaluate Project.

The reason for this step is to ensure that the project scope and cooling water
requirements developed during evaluation are current and up to date. It will also
eliminate an error message (Figure 2.2d) that would be displayed when accessing the
cooling water model no evaluation data were available.

Figure 2.2d. Error message if the project was not evaluated
3 Select the Cooling Water Model: To do this, click Run | Utility Model
(Figure 2,2a) or press the U button on the button bar (Figure 2.3a):
Figure 2.3a. To obtain utility models using the U-button.

This will bring up the Utility Model dialog box, Figure 2.3b. A blank value under Status
indicates the project does not contain a prior cooling water model area. If a project
contained a prior area, the Status field would indicate Loaded.
Figure 2.3b. Utility model selection

3b Select Cooling Water: Click OK. This will either initiate an interactive Cooling
Water Design session in MS Excel and display a Load option or display a project-not-
evaluated error message (see Step 2 above).
Interactive Session Workflow the Design Phase
Overview
When the cooling water model is invoked, it:
(a) analyzes for project cooling water requirements
(b) works from Preferences (user-modifiable, default set of design parameter values)
(c) prepares an initial design.
Results of the initial design and any subsequent interactive scenario are presented in a
Capture worksheet. If the design meets with the users approval, a user click of the
parked Load button will load the design results into the project, at which time the
project can be re-evaluated.
The Preferences and Circuits worksheets allow the user to modify the default design
basis. Each spec change will result in a new design. Hyperlinks provide rapid access
from one sheet to another and sections in a sheet. The Control Center toolbar button
opens the Control Center worksheet, which has hyperlinks to other sheets and their
major categories. Worksheet tabs are color coded to match hyperlinks at the top of
each worksheet.

The following sections provide a detailed description of the work process as well as
detailed descriptions of each worksheet, category and item.
Details of the Work Process

With the click of the OK button in step 3b above, three actions will occur
1 The model first identifies if a prior cooling water model area is present in
the project. If present, the user can choose to Delete the prior area and
continue with the model or return to the project. If Delete is chosen, the
utility model will proceed with the design and delay deletion until it is time
to load the new results.
2 If no prior cooling water utility area is detected, the Welcome screen is
displayed and remains present during a time when:
a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model
b The model prepares an initial design
c A Load | Cancel | Minimize option is provided (Figure 2.4). To continue,
click the minimize button at the top. This will park the button box for access
during the design phase. Cancel will end the cooling water model session and
return normal project functions with no change to the project.
Figure 2.4. Load-Cancel-Minimize button boxes
a Control Center button bar (figure 2.5) is provided to access the

Control Center worksheet from any worksheet
Seven worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:
o Welcome
o Control Center
o Status
o Preferences
o Capture
o Guide
3 The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which links to all
other worksheets and provides an indication of success (green signal) or
failure (red signal) to create an initial design based on default design
parameters.
The Initial Design

On initiation, the cooling water model will report the Status of the design on the
Control Center (see Figure 2.5) worksheet under Status Report, and if any, will
identify clashes on the Status worksheet and further, on the Preferences and
Circuits worksheet.

A Status Report message: Successful. A Load can proceed indicates all is well
between project requirements, design parameters and design methodology. At this
point, it is wise to review early design metrics by accessing the Captured Results
worksheet (see Figure 2.6). The user can return to Preferences and Circuits to
study design alternatives. If captured results are acceptable, a click of the parked
Load button will (1) carry the design results into the project, (2) close the worksheets
and (3) return to the project for evaluation of the augmented project.
Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error messages
and flags will be displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets. The first
indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center Worksheet. The Status
worksheet is the central reporting agency, where checks are made and links are
provided to source locations in the Preferences and Circuits input worksheets.
Figure 2.5. Illustration of the Control Center Worksheet, with display of

Control Center toolbar and Load button

Figure 2.6. A section of a Results Capture sheet showing values in the project
units of measure set.
3. Working with the Cooling Water Model

Worksheets
Introduction
Worksheets: Seven worksheets are provided, of which Preferences and Circuits are
for user input, to revise the design basis:
Welcome: greetings, workflow graphic
ControlCenter: navigation
Status: message center
Preferences: design selections
Circuits: circuit definition
Capture: early design metrics
Guide: help
Button Actions: The Control Center toolbar is always available during a model
session. A click will open the Control Center worksheet and a hyperlink click will direct
you to a chosen worksheet. When the Control Center toolbar is parked together with
the Excel Web toolbar you can quickly search forward and backward.
You can step from one sheet to another, revise the design basis, review status and
results, decide on an alternate design basis, make revisions, review the results and
when ready, click the Load button (see Load-Cancel-Minimize) to inject the results in

the project. Or, you can refuse the design using Cancel. Clicking Load conveys the
design results to the project, the cooling water design models Excel sheets and return
to normal Analyzer functions. Cancel bypasses the cooling water model and returns to
Analyzer.
Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets

The SPECS cooling Model workbook consists of
Two design basis sheets this is where you input your selections
o Preferences: process and mechanical design specs:
Red error flags and messages are displayed for out of
range or missing data values
Uses click boxes for either/or choices, B and R
switches to select base (default) or revised value and
user value to replace the base value
o Circuits: assignment of areas to a circuit, spacing of areas in
a circuit along the main line:
Assignment uses 1, 2, 3, 4 to assign an area to a circuit
Spacing uses the B and R switch method and user
spacing to replace the base footprint model value
Status sheet all messages are summarized here for your review and
repair
o Key status message is highlighted in color (green: Loading can
be performed, red: Errors must be cleared)
o Summarizes other messages, links directly to input locations for
revision
Capture Results: displays early design metrics for decision making,
provides the basis for alternative choices of preferences or circuitry.
By early design metrics is meant values in advance of those created
during project evaluation
Guide: provides instructions, describes data entry, color coding
Control Center: hypertext links interconnect all sheets and main
categories for rapid navigation
All sheets: are conveniently color coded, with red flags appearing on
error condition. All error conditions must be cleared before results can
be loaded
Welcome sheet: Welcome, displayed during the initiation process,
contains a workflow graphic
On completion of an error-free interactive session, pressing the LOAD button will
automatically load and inject the results into the project. The project will then contain
new scope additions: (1) a uniquely named, time-stamped cooling water area will be
used to contain (2) a selected, designed list of cooling water utility project
components. Each item so added by the model may be opened, reviewed, revised in
the same way as any other project component.
Worksheet Details
Status Worksheet
The Status sheet reports messages and has hypertext links to source locations in the
event of a reported error. Major report categories are:

Overall status
Existing cooling water area is in the project
Cooling circuit components wet bulb temperature, minimum
approach temperature, lowest desired cooling water temperature
Cooling water resources: naming, excluded streams and reasons, net
number
Project components: total, number served by cooling water
Project areas: total number, those served by cooling water
Cooling water loads: total flow rate, total heat duty, excess capacity,
total flow rate at excess capacity
Layout distances: number of parameters out of range
Pumps specs out of range
Piping specs out of range
Circuit assignments out of range
Spacing assignments out of range
Figure 3.1 illustrates an extract of a Status sheet
Figure 3.1 Extract, sample of a Status Sheet

Preferences Worksheet
Units of measure used in the Preferences worksheet correspond to those defined in
the project. Error messages are displayed alongside each entry; errors are flagged in
red. This sheet uses click boxes and data entry fields for specifying design
preferences. Each preference is provided with an explanatory text, limit values, user
entry field and a default value which is used in the initial design and any subsequent
design should the user not provide an over-ride selection or value.
How to Revise Default Values
This worksheet uses two methods, check boxes and data entries controlled by switch
boxes to revise the supplied set of default (base) design parameters. Throughout data
entry discussions, the term used for a model-supplied set of data is referred to as

default values. For a particular parameter, the model-supplied value is termed a base
value, symbolized by the letter B. A value supplied by the user is termed a revised
value and is symbolized by the letter R. A mouse click will switch between using a
base value and a revised value.
See Figure 2.2c (page 310) for information on how to use a check box:
A default value is provided to the left of the check box
A check box title signifies the alternative to the default value
The resulting choice is displayed to the right
A status message is displayed that provides additional information
Figure 3.2 Extract, sample of a Preferences sheet showing click box method
of selection
Design Preference Categories:
Cooling Tower (values in this section affect the circuitry, sizing of
cooling towers and flow-related equipment such as circulation pumps
and distribution piping)
(a) Design Capacity, excess capacity
(b) Design Temperature: Summer wet bulb temperature (see
Cooling Tower discussion of wet bulb temperature, approach
gradient, range)
(c) Messages relating to cooling water resource requirements
vs. design preferences
(d) Number of Cooling Towers
(e) Multiple Cooling Towers: choose either one tower for all
circuits or one for each circuit
(f) Working Twin: choose a single tower at 100% capacity or
two (twins), each at 50% capacity
Layout (these are dimension limit checks that are applied to entries on
the Circuits worksheet
o Distance
From tower to first branch to an area

Minimum value to first branch to an area (often defined
by fire regulations)
From a branch to an area header
Maximum spacing between areas (a limit check)
Status messages related to distance
Pumps
o Area Pressure Drop: pressure drop for equipment requiring
cooling water, applies to all areas
o Working Pumps
Limiting value for number of working pumps in a circuit
Pump type: horizontal (CENTRIF or API 610 model
types) or vertical (TURBINE model type, at low speed
only)
Pump speed: low or high RPM
Stand-by pumps if four or less pumps in a circuit: yes
or no
Stand-by pumps if more than four pumps in a circuit:
yes or no
Electrical power to pumps based on voltage choice: LV
(low-voltage), MV (mid-voltage), HV (high-voltage).
Limiting values of power per pump motor are displayed
based on project specifications. A voltage choice defines
the maximum power to a motor driver and hence, the
number of pumps in a circuit. Recall that each change
to a specification results in a completely new design; a
voltage selection results in a design value for the
number of pumps and can produce an error condition
and message if the number of pumps exceeds the
limiting value for number of pumps in a circuit.
Design messages for pumps and piping for each of four
possible circuits
Piping: Limiting values for line size, by line type, where line sizes are
in the units of measure of the project, either IN DIAM or MM DIAM
Suction line size for circulation pumps (a flow rate per
pump suction line based on selected line size is provided
for information purposes)
Main line segment line size
Branch line size
Area header line size
Risers line size (for 3D area types)
Laterals line size (for 3D area types)
Circuits Worksheet
Units of measure used in the Circuits worksheet correspond to those defined in the
project
This worksheet is designed to handle up to one hundred cooling water areas. Areas
are listed vertically. The worksheet is divided into five major categories in columns of
data:

1 Initial Configuration
See Figure 3.3 for the initial configuration
Figure 3.3 Extract from Circuits sheet Initial Configuration (left), Step 1
(right)
The following (see Figure 3.3, left side) are reported for each area being served by a
recognized cooling water utility resource stream:
Initial Sort Sequence: sequenced by area, from the area with highest
cooling water requirements to the area with the lowest
Area Name: user-assigned name, carried into the cooling water
design model from project area specs
Area Type: user-assigned area type, carried into the cooling water
design model from project area specs
Area CW Rate: area cooling water (CW) flow rate, the sum of all
recognized cooling water flow rates for equipment in an area as
adjusted by the Excess Capacity value in the Preferences worksheet
Initial Circuit Number: always 1 as all areas are initially assigned to a
single circuit
Initial Circuit ID: always A
2 Step 1 Assignment of Areas to Circuits (User entry one of two)
Please refer to Figure 3.3 (right side):
Enter a Circuit Number 1, 2, 3, or 4: user value is required; if only
one area requires cooling water, enter 1. If two areas, use 1 for both
or assign 1 to one area and 2 to the other. The design model will
sequence the areas. In an error condition, an error message and a red
flag will be displayed. Error conditions must be resolved to obtain
loadable design results.
System-Assigned Circuit Id: The model will assign a letter ID (A, B, C,
D) to each area based on circuit assignments and total circuit flow
rate. If the project contains four or more areas, then it is possible to
assign areas to circuit numbers 1 to 4. The model will collect all the

area flow rates in each circuit and sequence the circuits from greatest
flow to least in the sequence A, B, C, D. The A circuit will have a
larger total flow rate than circuit B, B will be greater than circuit
C and D will have the least flow rate. Similarly, for three areas in a
project, valid circuit numbers range from 1 to 3 and circuit IDs assign
to these circuits, based on total flows will be sequenced and labeled A,
B and C. A one-area project will be assigned a circuit ID of A.
Status
o Status of all entries: summarizes number or errors to be
resolved; if none, OK is displayed
o Status for individual entries: message is issued for invalid
circuit numbers and field is flagged in red
3 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design
Please refer to Figure 3.4
Figure 3.4 Extract of Circuits sheet defining area spacing using the B/R
switch
Each line item in this section represents an area and its properties. Areas are sorted
and sequenced in descending total circuit flow rate and then by area flow rate. Circuits
are labeled A, B, C, D with circuit A being the one with the highest flow rate; B is next
and so on. An area that was tagged as circuit 2 in step 1 may be in a circuit with the
lowest flow and would be organized accordingly and given a Circuit ID letter depending
on the other circuit flows.
This section displays the properties and attributes of each area in the sequenced list.
Values displayed for information purposes are:
New Sort Sequence: displays values vertically in the sequence 1, 2, 3,
and so on
Initial Sort Sequence: displays the initial sort sequence number for the
area
ID of Area In Report Group (ArRg): the ArRg ID for the area
Area name: user-assigned project area description
Area CW Rate: displays the cooling water rate, as adjusted by the
Preferences value for excess capacity
Area Heat Duty: heat duty requirements for all equipment within the
area identified as requiring a valid cooling water resource

User circuit number: value entered in Step 1, for reference purposes
Circuit ID: letter A, B, C, D assigned by the cooling water model based
on sequencing circuit flow rates
Position Of Area In Circuit: Only one area can be first in line in a
circuit. First if the area has the highest flow rate of all areas in the
circuit, otherwise no a blank display. The area with a First position
will take on a default distance from the cooling tower as defined by the
Preferences value for that distance.
4 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between areas
Each line item in this section corresponds to item 4 above. A line item represents an
area and its properties, with areas being sorted and sequenced in descending circuit
and area flow rate.
This section enables the user to revise base values for the spacing of areas along the
main line. It uses the Switch method to revise a base value as described in the
section on Preferences.
Base Value for Spacing Along Circuit Main Line: This is the run length
of the main segment between the prior and current area as developed
by the footprint model.
Enter Switch: B for Base, R to revise. Choose a blank entry or enter
either a B (or b) to indicate use of the base value. Use R (or r) to
indicate use of a revised value
o Switch value is blank: design will use the base value
o Switch value is B or b: design will use the base value
o Switch value is R or r: indicates a forthcoming user value will
revise the default spacing value. The design will use the
revised value if the user value is within range of prescribed
limits.
Enter Revised Spacing Along The Circuit Main Line: This value will
replace the base value if it meets range limit conditions set forth in the
Preferences worksheet. By spacing is meant the distance between
successive areas. As the line items in this section represent areas that
are sorted and sequenced, the spacing for a particular line item is the
spacing between the start of the prior area and the start of the current
area. This spacing is a measure of the areas main line segment. See
the section on the Cooling Water Footprint Model. Piping runs lengths are
typically longer than spacing as they include pipe to configure fittings,
expansion loops, and so on.
Enter a value. The resulting action depends on the corresponding switch value
o Switch value is blank, B or b: user value is ignored, base value
will be used
o Switch value is R or r: user value is tested against range limits
and design criteria. If error free, the user value will be
displayed as the Applied Value. Error conditions will display
instructional status messages, red flag, and prevent completion
of a valid design
5. Status messages and values used for design
o Flag: A red flag is displayed to indicate a line item error
condition

o Status: B (Base) uses base value, R (Revise) uses revised value
or status message (displays limiting values, error messages)
o Value used for spacing along circuit main line: The value used
in the design
4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design

Model
This section describes the basis of the cooling water design model. It is presented
with numerous graphics to enable a clear understanding of the work being performed
by the model when it is analyzing and designing cooling water project components
that are in harmony with your design preferences and the needs of components
requiring cooling water.
General Flow Sheet for Cooling Water Service

Figure 4.1 is a schematic diagram of a typical cooling water circuit. In this figure,
circulation pumps draw cooled cooling water, the cooling water supply stream, from
the supply basin at the bottom of a cooling tower and distribute it through piping to
heat exchanger located in one or more project areas. Cooling water return streams
are combined and sent to a cooling tower where it is cooled, principally by evaporative
cooling. Motor driven fans mounted on the tower draw (induced draft) or force (forced
draft) ambient air into the cooling tower where it contacts the downward flow of
cooling water. The cooled cooling water drops down from the tower into a supply
basin, awaiting withdrawal by the circulation pumps.
Water is added to make up for losses through evaporation, air-born drift and for blow-
down. Water drawn from the system to prevent the build-up of contaminants is
termed blow-down.
See below for more on cooling towers, terminology and defining stream
temperatures
Cooling water in such a circuit tends to accumulates algae, corrosion contaminants and
particles that slough off the distribution system. Water treatment chemicals are added
to alleviate these conditions, with the degree of such treatment depending on the
water supply source and environmental conditions. Five types of treatment chemicals
are typically used in small quantities to control the water quality. The cooling water
model provides each cooling tower with a diaphragm type of pump and a stand-by for
each of the treatment chemicals. The model uses the following labels to identify the
types:
Sulfuric acid (pH control)
Sodium hypochlorite (pH control)
Biocide (algae growth control)
Corrosion inhibitor
Dispersant (suspended particles control)

Figure 4.1 Illustration: Cooling Water Flow Diagram
Cooling Water Model Circuitry

The cooling water model is designed to support up to four independent cooling water
circuits. Each circuit can have its own cooling tower or all circuits can be defined to
share a cooling tower. A circuit consists of pumps and distribution piping to and from
project areas. It is the P&ID specs that define the components hook-up piping to the
cooling water models circuitry.
Summarizing, the cooling water model develops piping runs to a project area and
distributes cooling water to components in the area via an area header or risers and
laterals in the case of 3D area types. Each circuit is provided with a supply and return
distribution network; what is supplied must be returned: one supply line implies one
return line.
Figure 4.2 is a schematic diagram showing several areas that have equipment
requiring cooling water and one that does not. The cooling water model will not serve
an area that does not have cooling water requirements. If such an area is to be
included, then it is recommended that one or more exchangers connected with cooling
water utility streams be introduced in that area.
The cooling water model allows for a one cooling tower (or two 50% towers) to serve
all circuits or individual cooling tower (or two 50% towers) for each circuit. Clearly, if
only one area requires cooling water, only one circuit can be defined, up to two circuits
for two areas, up to three circuits for three areas and a maximum of four circuits for
four or more areas requiring cooling water.

Figure 4.2 Single, Independent Cooling Water Circuit
Figure 4.3, case (a) is a diagram showing a single treed circuit. Figure 4.4, case (b),
illustrates multiple treed circuits. The difference between the two cases is (a) one
cooling tower for each circuit or (b) one for all circuits. Case (a) would apply to
projects with a single area or for multiple circuits, with each circuit being served by its
own cooling tower.

Figure 4.3 (case a). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve a set of
areas in a single circuit. The model will permit up to four single circuits, each
having its own cooling tower and circulation pumps.
Figure 4.4 (case b). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve multiple
circuits. For this case, the model will provide one cooling tower for all
circuits and a set of circulation pumps for each circuit.
Cooling Water Distribution Network

This section describes the methodology used in circuit design
Naming conventions
Sequencing of areas on the main line
Cooling water footprint model
Pipe, valves and fittings count
Line sizing and pressure drop calculations
Naming Conventions
Project Cooling Water Utility Area: The cooling water design model will create a
cooling water model utility area to contain project components for each circuit. On
loading, the area will be named with a date and time stamp to ensure it is unique and
can be detected and properly deleted when a new design is to take its place.
The naming convention is: AUMCoolWater ddmmmyy_tttt, where
dd is the day number of the session month (1, 2, 3, .., 31)
mmm is a three character representation of the session month (jan,
feb, mar, apr, may, jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, dec)
yy is the last two digits of the session year (05 for 2005, and so on)

tttt is the decimal fraction of the session day
Utility project components are time-stamped in a similar manner. As only four digits
are used (tttt), it is possible that a load action might span two tttt times (one ten-
thousandth of a day, duration of 8.64 seconds) with no significant resulting
consequence.
Once a cooling water utility area is loaded in the project, the user may access any
item in the usual way, by using the Project View, clicking on any component and
viewing the design parameters in the forms view. Any and all data in the cooling
water utility area may be modified as required.
Areas Requiring Cooling Water: Each area that requires cooling water is identified by
a unique ArRg number that is made up of systemassigned numeric values for Area
ID and Report Group. An ArRg value of 201 indicates Area ID = 2 in Report Group 1.
The user-assigned area description, which may not be unique in a given project, is
printed in reports along with its unique ArRg value.
Plant Bulk Pipe Item Descriptions: The naming convention above is combined with the
Area Code and is time stamped when loaded into the project. For example, MainSeg,
ArRg 201_T7883 is the item description for main line supply and return line segment
that serves area 2 in report group 1, time stamped T7883.
Distribution Piping Line Types: The distribution network in this cooling water model
consists of the following named types of lines:
Main line segment: a portion piping along the main line
o MS
o MainSeg
o MainChk for a main segment that contains a check valve
Branch segment: a short run of pipe, from the main line to a specific
project area
o B
o Branch
o BrChk for a branch that contains a check valve
Area header: a line of pipe, valves and fittings that distributes cooling
water along the long dimension of the base of a project area
o AH
o Area Header
o ArHdrChk for an area header that contains a check valve
Risers vertical runs of pipe to bring cooling water to each level in a
3d structure
o R
o Risers
o RiseChk for a riser that contains a check valve
Laterals horizontal runs of pipe that distribute cooling water to each
floor in a 3D structure
o L
o Laterals
o LatChk for a lateral that contains a check valve
Vents and drains high-point vents, low-point drains on supply and
return lines, short runs of small bore pipe
o VD

o VentDrain
Lines with check valves are of minimal length to satisfy the plant bulk PIPE mode and
are separate line items as only one check valve is assigned to a supply-return line
pair.
Figures 4.5 and 4.6 illustrate these line types for 2D (PAD, GRADE) and 3D area types
(OPEN, EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)
Figure 4.5 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 2D area type (PAD, GRADE)

Figure 4.6 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 3D area type (OPEN,
EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)
Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line

Upon identifying which areas that require cooling water and their assigned circuit, the
cooling water model arranges the areas in decreasing cooling water usage. The
largest consuming area is placed at the front of the line and the smallest consumer is
placed at the end. In this way, min line segments will be larger in diameter at the
front of the line and decrease as each consumer reduces the total flow rate to the next
area.
Figure 4.7 illustrates various line types and sequenced areas.

Figure 4.7 Schematic of Line Types Serving Areas Requiring Cooling Water
Cooling Water Footprint Model

Upon identifying an area as one that requires cooling water, the footprint model
develops an area footprint by using (a) the total number of components in an area, (b)
the area type (2D or 3D), (c) the number of level and (d) a packing density (number
of components in a bay) and (e) area aspect ratio, length:width, of 1.5:1.0.
The result of the footprint model is a set of dimensions for each area requiring cooling
water. These dimensions are used to develop a default value of the spacing between
the start of one area along the main line and the next area. The default spacing
distances are reported in the Step 2 of the CIRCUITS worksheet and can be over-
ridden by the user.
Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count

Each line type is provided with a piping iso model that consists of set of pipe, valves
and fittings. Pipe and fitting diameter is determined by volumetric flow rate and
limiting line velocity (suction lines being different from distribution lines). Line length
is determined by (a) minimum length of pipe required to each type of fitting and (b)
the long area dimension, which is developed from a cooling-water footprint model for
each project area and area type. Fittings are assigned to each line type from a list
that includes elbows (EL), tees (TE), reducers (RE), flanges (FL), blind flanges (BL),
gate valves (GA), check valves (CH).
Each line type is based on five configuration components. The total line length is
determined by as the sum of the linear run distance plus pipe lengths of pipe to satisfy
the make-up of the configuration components. The make-up of each configuration
component is based on line type and consists of quantities of the following:
Main run component: pipe, of length determined by (a) the footprint
model, or (b) user preference value

Fixed component: FL, GA, CH fittings, pipe length based on diameter
of run
Head component: EL, FL fittings, pipe length based on diameter of
run, to provide directional change
Branch point component: TE, RE, FL, BL fittings, for connection to
next line type
Vent and drain station component: TE, FL GA fittings, pipe;
frequency of placement is based on linear run distance
Expansion loop component: EL fittings, pipe length based on
diameter of run, frequency of placement is based on linear run
distance
Expansion loops and vent and drain stations are placed along the run based on line
length
The configuration of each line type serving each area is defined as a project
component located in the cooling water area created by the cooling water model. Once
loaded in the project, any line configuration can be reviewed and modified in the usual
manner by opening that project component in its form.
Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations

The Cooling Water Model has a Preferences worksheet where, in the Piping section,
limiting sizes of each line type are defined. Once areas are assigned to a circuit, the
flows through the circuit are known. Areas are ordered in sequence according to their
flow requirements, with the largest consumer at the head of the line. The
computations are interactive and a new design will be computed unnoticed each time a
design value is revised. It is wise to check early design results that are displayed in
the Capture worksheet when revising design specifications.
Line size and pressure drop computations take place in this general manner:
Starting point is limiting velocity, as defined in the Icarus Reference
Guide
Flow rate combined with limiting velocity results in required flow area
Maximum line size determines number of parallel lines
Built-in iso for each line type defines valve and fitting count
Line length is derived from spacing between areas from circuitry input,
minimum spacing between areas and minimum lengths from line
Total run length is a combination of line length and number of parallel
runs
Pipe friction is based on Fanning type equation
Line-size based fitting resistances are used to determine fitting friction
losses
A single average value for the pressure drop across cooling water
usage components in any area is defined in the Preference worksheet
Pressure at junctions, where flows meet, is common to junction
streams
Overall circuit pressure drop comes from a stepwise calculation across
all junctions
An addition head loss due to cooling tower elevation completes the
pressure drop determination

It is possible that the limiting line size for branch and area headers may be too small
for some circuits with large flows. This would result in a cluster of two or more
parallel lines. To alleviate this condition, consider increasing the limiting line size.
Projects with a Prior Cooling Water Utility Model Area

The cooling water model will allow a single cooling water utility area of its making in a
project. If a project contains a prior area, the model will detect its presence and defer
action until the user decides to load a new cooling water model design. Choosing to
load will delete the prior area and the new one will be loaded. Is the choice is not to
load, the model worksheets are closed with a return to the normal view.
Cooling Towers: Terminology and the Defining Stream

Temperatures
Figure overview_4.8 shows a cooling tower with air and cooling water
streams and their temperatures.
Terms used in the cooling tower industry, illustrated in Figure 4.8, are:
Cooling tower: a device used to cool water by the countercurrent
action of ambient air against a downward flowing stream of water to
be cooled. The cooling process involves the cooling of entering water
by evaporative cooling of water and sensible heat to a much lesser
degree
Cooling water supply stream: cooling water supplied to heat
exchangers for purpose of cooling process streams
Cooling water return stream: cooling water streams leaving heat
exchangers, combined for return to a cooling tower
Range: cooling water return temperature, Tr cooling water supply
temperature, Ts, directly related to the heat duty
Approach Gradient: the difference between the wet bulb air
temperature and cooling water leaving the cooling tower.
Theoretically, the cooling water temperature cannot drop below the air
wet bulb temperature. For a given cooling water flow rate, as the
approach gradient decreases, the cost of a cooling tower will increase.

Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM)
Users:
Cooling Water utility resources that must accounted in the Analyzer Utility Model
(AUM) should be named either:
Cooling Water or "Cooling Water xx"
where:
xx can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99,
for example, Cooling Water 01
User created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example, CW, Sea
Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling water streams and will be
excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.
Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will be assigned to
the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areas assigned to two or more
circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flow rate will be assigned to the first
area in the circuit handling the largest circuit flow rate.
Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dew point of
ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradient will determine
the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure that your specified cooling
water utility resource streams can be made, please review the limits for the two
cooling water models:
CTWCOOLING
CTWPACKAGED
AUM_Air
Utility Design and Scope Generator
for Instrument and Plant Air
Overview
The Air Utility Module automatically and interactively:
selects, designs, and sizes air plant project components that conform to
your:
o Project scope design basis
o Interactive entries for air utility design and configuration
preferences
Augments the scope of your project with a list of designed air utility
project components in a unique air utility area on the click of the Load
button
Interactive session enables a review of results prior to LOAD creates
o Status messages, suggestions to alleviate design clashes

o Interactive report of equipment and distribution piping design results
With the Air Utility Module, you can review, revise, add other project components
and/or Run the augmented project to obtain a new project evaluation.
The Air utility model can be
applied to projects that have been created using
o Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Decision Analyzer
o Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
within Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer
Project areas and their project components

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer projects:
o Each group of project components is contained in a unique
Report Group
o A report group is a project area
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer projects: You can create
o A project area
o A report group to coordinate a group of project areas
o The AUM Air utility module works with each project area and its
air requirements
Benefits:
You get early design metrics for decision making
Decide whats best, then trigger the LOAD operation
With LOAD, a new Air utility area will be inserted into your project with its
designed list of air system project components
Before LOAD, air system project components are interactively
o Selected based on your selection preferences
o Designed in accordance with your project basis and air design
preferences
o Sized
o Reported
In a small fraction of the time and effort it takes to do this work in the
traditional manner
Change the project scope? Re-run the utility module!

How AUM_Air Works
General AUM_Air Workflow

1 Press U button to initiate.
2 Select Air Utility.
AUM_Air opens in MS Excel
3 Move the supplied Control Center toolbar to the top and click it.
4 Check Status.
5 Review the Guide, page 340.
6 Select and enter Preferences.
7 Check messages, review results in Report.
8 Revise Configuration parts 1 and 2.
9 Check messages, review results in Report.
10 Click the Load button to close AUM_Air and load the design results into
your project.
11 Review Area and components.
12 Run the project, review results.
Using AUM_Air
Accessing AUM_Air
To access AUM_Air:
1 Starting with an open project that has been evaluated, click Run, then
click Utility Model. Or, click the U button to access utility models.

The Utility Model dialog box appears:
2 Click Air Instrument, Plant.

3 Click OK.
Three actions now occur
1 The model first identifies if a prior Air Instrument, Plant model
area is present in the project. If present, you can choose to Delete the prior
area and continue with the model or return to the project. If you click Delete,
the utility model will proceed with the design and delay deletion until it is time
to load the new results.
2 If no prior Air Instrument, Plant utility area is detected, the
Welcome screen is displayed and remains present during a time when:
a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model
b The model prepares an initial design
c The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which links to
all other worksheets and provides an indication of success (green signal)
or failure (red signal) to create an initial design based on default design
parameters.

3 A Load | Cancel | Minimize dialog box is provided.
4 To continue, click the minimize button at the top. This parks the
button box for access during the design phase. Cancel ends the Air
Instrument, Plant model session and returns normal project functions
with no change to the project.
Note: A Control Center button bar is provided to access the

Control Center worksheet from any worksheet.
Nine worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:
Welcome
Control Center
Guide
Status
Preferences
Config 1
Config 2
EquipStats
PipeStats
The Initial Design

On initiation, the Air Instrument, Plant model reports the status of the design on
the Control Center worksheet under Status, and if there are any, identifies clashes
on the Status worksheet and, further, on the Preferences worksheet.
A Status Report message: Successful. A Load can proceed indicates all is well
between project requirements, design parameters, and design methodology. At this
point, it is wise to review early design metrics by accessing the EquipStats and
PipeStats worksheets.
If captured results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button:
carries the design results into the project
closes the worksheets
returns to the project for evaluation of the augmented project
Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error messages
and flags are displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets. The first indication is
given under Status Report on the Control Center worksheet. The Status worksheet
is the central reporting agency, where checks are made and links are provided to
source locations in the EquipStats and PipeStats worksheets.

To load the Air Instrument, Plant data into your Icarus
project:
When you are satisfied with the model and the Status worksheet shows that there are
no errors, you can load the Air Instrument, Plant model into the project.
1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel | Minimize
dialog box.
2 Click Load.
The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML data into
Icarus.
When the Air Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus, the
following confirmation message appears:

3 Click OK.
The Air Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.
Modifying Air Instrument, Plant Data

When you have loaded Air Instrument, Plant data in your project, you modify that
data using the AUM_Air module.
To Modify Air Instrument, Plant Data:

1 On the main menu, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, click the U
button to access utility models.
The Utility Model dialog box appears. Note that the Status column says Loaded.
2 Click Air Instrument, Plant.

3 Click OK.
The following warning message appears:
Note: Clicking Yes does not actually delete the Air Instrument, Plant
data in your project. You can click Yes, modify the Air Instrument, Plant
data, then choose not to replace the previous Air Instrument, Plant data
with the modified data by clicking Cancel on the Load | Cancel | Minimize
dialog box.

4 Click Yes.
5 Modify the data to your satisfaction.
If you want to replace the loaded data with your modified data, follow the
steps below.
dialog box.
2 Click Load.
The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML data into
Icarus.
When the Air Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus, the
following confirmation message appears:
3 Click OK.
The Air Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.
If you want to keep loaded Air Instrument, Plant data and not replace it
with your modified data, follow the steps below.
dialog box.

2 Click Cancel.
The following warning message appears:
3 Click Yes to cancel the loading process.

Your original loaded Air Instrument, Plant data is retained.
Guide for the Air Utility Model

(AUM)

SPECS Organization Chart
About this SPECS Book

About an Air Plant Unit

About Distribution Piping for an APU
Methods
In the conceptual design phase, lacking a plot plan, this method is used to develop air
distribution piping.
Some runs may be long, some short.
Components in the augmented project scope definition may be modified,
deleted, new ones added.
The following is a brief description of the methods used.
Areas assigned to an APU are collected in the sequence of the project and
are assembled in a column-row array
Array dimensions are determined from area dimensions
Row and column dimensions are figured from total area, number of areas
and an initial aspect ratio of 3:2
Air Distribution
Piping is developed for Instrument Air as well as Plant Air.
Piping for each service is developed in the same way, except for
volumetric flow and line size
Distribution Piping
The APU feeds air to the array through a Main Feeder (MF)
The Main Feeder length is defined in Preferences
Two Main Manifolds (MM) are used on extra-wide arrays, else one or none
for an array one column wide
Each MM feeds a Main Line (ML)
Main lines feed Branch Lines (BR)
A tee of the Branch line supplies air to an Area Feeder (AF)
Area Feeders connect to Area Headers (AH)
Area headers, for 2-D area types such as Grade, Pad, and so on supply air
to the I-P transducers, control valves
o P&ID information from the original project provide the
requirements for I-P and control valve components
o Utility station requirements are developed for each area based
on anticipated air tool usage and area size
A plant air connection is made off the Area Header Plant
for each utility station
Area headers, for 3-D area types such as open steel structures, and so on
supply air to Risers, then Laterals which then connect to I-P transducers
and control valves.
o Utility station requirements are developed for each 3-D type
area based on anticipated air tool usage and area size

Schematic
The following schematic was prepared to illustrate a large project of 78 areas:
Configuration of Air Utility

Project Components
Project Components
An Air Plant Unit - APU

Schematic of an APU
Multiple APUs
Compressor Redundancy
Project Components
The Instrument and Plant Air Utility Model creates a set of project components in
accordance with the needs of your:
Project Scope definition
Design and selection preferences for Instrument and Plant Air
Typical components
Air Compressors
Interstage and After-coolers
Air Filters
Air Receivers
Air Dryers
Air distribution piping (instrument, plant air)
Utility Stations (air, water, steam, condensate drain services)
Associated installation bulks would be developed during project run
Components are contained in a uniquely defined

Area
Area Title contains a unique time and date to differentiate one run from
another
Area can be modified or deleted in the usual way using Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer
An Air Plant Unit - APU

Air intake screens
Air intake ductwork
Air compressors
o One main compressor at 100% capacity or two at 50%
capacity each
o Optional standby spare compressor
o Optional start-up compressor
Interstage and after-stage coolers
o Optional TEMA water cooled or fin-fan air cooled exchangers
Air receivers
o Optional individual receivers for instrument and plant air or
combined receiver
o Optional main receiver or two at 50% capacity each
o Optional stand-by receiver

Air filters pre-filter and post-filter, one or more of each
Air dryers - dual tower type (one working, one regenerating)
o One main at 100% capacity or two at 50% capacity each
o Optional standby spare air dryer
o Optional dryer for Plant Air
Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return
Distribution piping
o Instrument and plant air
o Utility stations
o Cooling water, steam/condensate headers
o Interconnects between two or more air plant units
Schematic of an Air Plant Unit

General Layout
Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas

One or up to four Air Plant Units to serve area air requirements.
Two distribution networks for each APU:

instrument air
plant air

Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-
by, Start-up
Design Considerations
Units of Measure
Designed Components
Volumetric Air Flow Rate
Equipment Selection and Design
o Compressor Model Selection
o Interstage and After Coolers; choice of
Air Coolers (for rack mounting)
Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers
o Air Receivers
o Air Filters
o Air Dryers
Units of Measure
Values are reported in the Unit of Measure set of the users project, in the:
Utility Module interactive worksheets and reports
Augmented users project file

Air Utility Area
Designated as AUM_Air_ddmmyy_tttt (date and time stamped)
Contains Air Utility system project components
Air Utility Project Components

Each item is selected and sized:
Area headers for cooling water/return, steam/condensate, instrument and
plant air
Air intake screens
Air intake ductwork
Compressors
Interstage coolers
Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return
Plant and Instrument Air Receivers
Air Pre-filters, After-filters
Air Dryers
Distribution Pipe, Valves, Fittings
o Distribution circuits: up to four circuits (one to four air plant
units)
o Distribution piping, for 2D, 3D area types
o Utility stations (total number of stations)
Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow

Rate

Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate
Compressor Model Selection Method
Sizes compressor based on

Total project air flow
Number of desired air plant units
Project areas assigned to each air plant unit
Air plant unit redundancy (working spares, stand-by spares)
Specs for start-up compressor
Model type is based on compressor air flow rate

Low flow rates reciprocating
High flow rates centrifugal
Flow rates less than model minimum -reciprocating

Reciprocating Compressor for Low Capacity
Range
Gasoline Motor-Driven Reciprocating Compressor

for Low Capacity Range, Stand-by Spare

Centrifugal Compressor for High Capacity Range
Inter- and After-compression stage Coolers

Air Filters
Air Receivers

Air Dryers
Interactive Specs
Design Basis
o Equipment Redundancy
o Equipment Configurations
o Selection Specs
o Design Preferences
o Air Distribution
Areas and Air Plant Units
Layout
Air Distribution Configuration
o Assignment of APUs to Areas
User Preferences
User enters specs interactively in MS Excel SPECS workbook
Preferences worksheet design and equipment configuration basis
o Organized by category
o Color coded
o Either/or selections are provided with a base (default) value
o Numeric selections are provided with a base (default) value
o Help messages assist selections
o Error messages are issued for out-of-limit or design clash
conditions
CONFIG worksheets: basis for distribution air piping to areas
o Part 1: Assignment of plant air to areas devoid of equipment
o Part 2: Assignment of an APU to an area

Equipment Redundancy
Main item at 100% capacity
Main item split into two, each at 50% capacity
Stand-by spare
o Optional
o Same size as main item or main item at 50% capacity
o Power option for stand-by compressors
Electric motor drive
Large compressors: steam turbine drive
Small compressors: gasoline engine drive
Start-up compressors only
o Optional
o Size based on user % of total capacity of main item
Equipment Configurations
Equipment configuration choices:
Combined air train
Individual Instrument air train
Wet or dry plant air train

Basis for Design: Preferences - 1
With the exception of item 1 (Conversion of Quoted cost items .) where no default
value is provided, every other user preference is supplied with a default value and
minimum and maximum limit values where appropriate. Item 1 requires user entry
for an exchange rate which is used in an air utility internal cost model to evaluate
costs of air intake screen/filters.
1 Conversion of "Quoted cost" items to Project Currency Units (PCU)
o Exchange rate, Project Currency Units per USD:
Note: This entry is required.

2 Ambient Air Conditions (one set for all APUs)
o Dry bulb temperature
o Wet bulb temperature
o Atmospheric pressure
3 Air Requirements - Capacity for Instrument and Plant air (one set for all
APUs)
o Excess capacity, %
Instrument air
Plant air
o Air system leakage, %
o Install utility stations?
o Number of utility stations, % adjustment
4 Air intake screens/filters (uses an AUM_Air cost model)
o Air to media ratio
o Adjustments to model estimate
Cost
Hour to install
Weight
5 Compressors (one set of specs for all APUs) Main compressor:
o Main compressor
One at 100% capacity or two each at 50% capacity
Limiting flow rate for a single main compressor, % of
model maximum flow
o Stand-by spare compressor
Install?
Driver type (electrical or other: turbine, gas motor)
o Start-up compressor
Install?
Minimum flow rate to qualify for installation
Running time
o Interstage Coolers
Type:
Water cooled (small: Pre-engineered type or
large: TEMA BEU)

Air cooled (AIR COOLER)
Cooling water inlet and rise temperature
Air temperature rise for fin-fan air coolers
Notes:
If low capacity type is selected, may generate multiple low capacity
compressors
High capacity compressors may require project mid- and/or high voltage
power distribution levels.
o Utility services for compressors
Steam lines: run distance from boiler house to turbines
Cooling water lines: run distance from cooling water
plant
6 Air Receivers
o Common or separate receivers for instrument air and plant air?
o One main receiver at 100% capacity or two, each at 50%
capacity
o Install a stand-by spare?
o Horizontal or vertical vessels?
o Maximum diameter
o Maximum tangent-to-tangent length
o Instrument air supply time during emergency shut-down
o Plant air supply time during emergency shut-down
7 Air Dryers (Dual Bedone working, one regenerating)
o Common air dryer for instrument and plant air?
o Is plant air to be dried?
o One main dryer at 100% capacity or two, each at 50% capacity
o Air purge rate
8 Air Filters
o Instrument air
Number of pre-filters
Number of post-filters
o Plant air
Number of pre-filters
Number of post-filters
9 Distribution piping
o Minimum line size for air piping
o Distance from APU to process area
o Typical tie-in run length from one APU to another

Configuration Layout Method and
Distribution
Basis for Air Utility Model Piping

o Layout and primary distribution piping is based on the specs for
all areas assigned to an APU
o Area feeder and header, risers, laterals are based on area specs
Area layout in lieu of a project plot plan

o Project areas are arranged in project sequence
o Each area is given an ID code based on its report group and
area number
Example:
Report group 2 Solvent Recovery
Area 4 description: Distillation
Is given an ID code of 100 x 2 + 4 = 204
ID code 204 is characterized by its report group
name and area description
o Areas are placed in a rectangular array according to the total
number of areas with an initial aspect ratio of 2:3 (fewer
columns than rows)
o Column-row arrangement is modified to obtain a row-column
balance
o A branch line is run across each row with area feeder take-offs
to each area in a row
o Area headers (and risers and laterals for 3D area types)
connect to individual project components in that area
o Branches are fed using a Main Line
o Main Lines are fed by Main Manifolds for wide arrays
o Main Manifolds are fed by a Main Feeder from the Air Plant Unit
APU Configuration:
o Choose default (one APU for all) or assign each Report Group to
one of four APUs

Example layout group of areas served by
APU A
Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs

Worksheet provides a list of Project Areas and air consumption
Configuration in two parts:
o Part 1: enables areas with no Instrument air requirements to
be provided with plant air, else no air is provided
o Part 2: enables each area to be assigned to an APU
Initial configuration: all areas are assigned to APU A
o Design results are presented for the initial configuration
Revised configuration: use of up to four (4) APUs
o Design results are presented for the revised configuration

Sample Layouts: One APU
Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs
Design Methods
Sizing Distribution Piping
Schematic of Distribution Piping
Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping

Configuration (IA = instrument air; PA = plant air)

o Assignment of an APU to Project Areas
o Initial configuration: all are areas assigned to one APU
o APU Air flow for IA and PA is determined from sum of area
usage requirements
Sizing
o Air Module uses a built-in layout model to estimate air
distribution piping line lengths
o Each line type is assigned an Iso with valve and fitting counts,
expansion loops for long runs
o Areas provides air flow requirements for each line
o Lines are sized based on air consumption and a pressure drop
of 1 PSI per 100 ft [22.6 KPAG/100 M] or less with a minimum
line size as defined in Preferences
o Design pressure: 150 psig [1350 KPAG]
Air Distribution Piping to Project Areas

Distribution for a 3D-Type Area
Sample AUM_Air Worksheets

Displayed below are sample AUM_Air worksheets. Note the following details about
AUM_air and these sample worksheets:
sheets are non-functional
all worksheets visible to the user have the version number printed at the
bottom of the sheet
the project illustrated is Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ETOH Sample
Project
except for currency and exchange rate, sheets are in the user's units of
measure defined in the user's project specs
o currency is referred to as PCU - project currency unit
o you must enter an exchange rate when opening a project for
the first time. The exchange rate value will be "remembered"
on opening the project thereafter
o ControlCenter, Status and Preferences sheet will always
show an error because you must enter an exchange rate for the
currency of the project (hyperlinks lead the you from
ControlCenter to Status to Preferences to the item to be
revised)
o on entering a proper value, the error message is not displayed
List of AUM_Air Worksheets
Welcome
ControlCenter

Guide
Status
Preferences
Config_1
Config_2
EquipStats
PipeStats
Welcome Worksheet
Control Center Worksheet

Guide Worksheet

Status Worksheet

Preferences Worksheet

Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant
Air to Areas Not Requiring Instrument Air
Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas

to an APU

Note: For clarity in this documentation, the following screen shot is shown
below the one above it. On the actual Config 2 Worksheet, they are side by
side.
Report Equipment Component Stats

Report Pipe Stats

11 Evaluating the Project
Running a Project Evaluation

After all the process simulator data has been properly mapped and defined, you are
ready to run a project evaluation. The project evaluation produces capital costs,
operating costs and investment analysis reports. If any of the components are
modified, the evaluation process must be re-run.
To run a project evaluation:

1 Click on the toolbar.
or
On the Run menu, click Evaluate Project.
The Evaluate Project dialog box appears.
The dialog box shows the default Capital Costs report file name, Cap_Rep.ccp. This is
the report reviewed in Icarus Editor. If you want it to have a different name, type the
file name in the Report File field.
2 Click OK.
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer scans the
project specifications for errors and/or inconsistencies and any found are listed in the
378 11 Evaluating the Project

Scan Messages window.
Note: You can select in Preferences to skip the scan for errors (see
page 51).
X X
There are four types of messages:

Scan Message Description/Importance Level
INFOrmational For your information

WARNing Design can be produced, but you are alerted to problems
ERROR A design or cost cannot be produced for an item
FATAL Rare instance for extreme problems
You have the option to continue or stop the evaluation process (except in the case of
FATAL errors, which stop the evaluation process). You should carefully review these
and fix any problems before proceeding.
When the project evaluation is done, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lists all errors
found in the capital cost evaluation for your reference.
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
automatically displays the Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main Window when
the evaluation is complete. See Reviewing Investment Analysis on page 433 for a
X X
description of these spreadsheets.
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer automatically display the Investment Analysis (see page 51). X X
11 Evaluating the Project 379

Reviewing and Revising
Process Economics in the
Analyzer Economics Module
The Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) includes an interactive economic evaluation
workbook, that lets you review economic, scheduling, and manufacturing premises
and see the impact of revisions to those premises. It displays in Excel key economic
information over the project timeline to help you evaluate projected operations and
the return on investment.
Loading the Analyzer Economics Module

(AEM)
To initiate an economic scenario, first load the AEM.
To load AEM:
1 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer.
2 On the Decision Analyzer dialog box, select the Develop Detailed
Process Economics Reports check box.
3 Enter the desired reporting currency symbol to use for the reporting of all
costs.
4 If the plant location currency is different from the currency used on the
reports, enter the exchange rate as the ratio of Report Currency/Plant
Location Currency.

5 Click OK.
In Excel, two workbook files open: SPECS and RESULTS.
Overview of Workbooks
In addition to showing you the economic analysis of the current project basis, the
workbooks allow you to instantly see the impact that revisions to the basis will have
on economic measurements. For example, you can revise the required working capital
percentage on the Project Input worksheet in SPECS and, as a result, the Cash Flow
bar chart on the Figures worksheet in RESULTS will change to reflect this revision. This
is explained in detail in the Revising Premises section, page 390.
X X
SPECS Workbook
The SPECS workbook consists of the following worksheets, which you can navigate by
clicking the sheet tabs at the bottom of the workbook window:
Guide
The Guide provides you with an online reminder of helpful information, which you may
refer to during an interactive scenario session:

Purpose of Analyzer's Economics Module (AEM) and what AEM does.
The three classes of information from which AEM works.
The two workbooks for new scenario premises.
Details on the worksheets containing input.
Details on the worksheets containing results.
Strategy - how to use this module effectively for evaluating business and
economic options.
Control Panel
The Control Panel lets you revise high-level stream premises. It features spinner
controls and reset buttons, enabling you to change unit prices and instantaneously see
the resulting economic metrics and graphed results.
Key economic metrics displayed include: graphs of net present value (NPV) and annual
production revenue, payout date, Internal Rate of Return (IRR), NPV over project
lifetime, gross, operating and net revenue margins.
Decision Center
The Decision Center is AEM's navigator. It lets you move quickly across all of AEM's
user-interactive worksheets, all of which are included in horizontal format. To view all
the worksheets in a vertical format, use the DC_V worksheet.
Both the horizontal and vertical formats enable you to quickly locate high level and
lower level categories and the ultimate worksheet locations. Important error messages
are displayed on the Decision Center header.
An NPV graph displays the current state of the scenario including high-level error
messages with pointers to error locations.

DC_V
This worksheet contains the same content as the Decision Center worksheet in a
vertical format.
Input Worksheets
The two input worksheets are for user-interactive revisions to premises. They define
your economic scenario. Revisions are immediately reflected in the Status,
Statements, EPC, and Figures worksheets. See page 390 for information on revising
X X
economic premises.
Project Input
In the Project Input worksheet, you can revise the schedule, time periods, capital
investment, cost of capital investment, phase durations, capital cost parameters,
manufacturing cost parameters, operating labor and maintenance cost parameters,
general investment parameters, and escalation.
The following is an excerpt:
Stream Input
On the Stream Input worksheet, you can revise the stream factor to determine
the impact of turndown, turnarounds or a proposed expansion; split production
into a domestic and export stream with their associated unit prices; revise prices
of by-products, raw materials, and utilities. An important aspect of the Stream
Input worksheet is the use of periodically changing values of stream factor, unit
costs and percent to export. This feature lets you study the impact of market
cycles and identify economic threats and opportunities related to production over
the life of the project.

Status Worksheet
View the Status worksheet for a quick summary of which values on the input
worksheets have been revised, need correction, or are incomplete.

The Status worksheet also displays a panel board graph
of Net Present Value (NPV) and summary status report
of project and stream input conditions and major
economic indicators to help guide the analyst.
Capture Worksheet
The Capture worksheet and its initiating buttons
enables you to review and capture highlights of up to
50 economic scenarios. A set of buttons is provided to
initiate the capture of current scenario highlights in
advance of working on the next scenario.
RESULTS Workbook
The RESULTS workbook consists of six worksheets, which you can navigate by clicking
the sheet tabs at the bottom of the workbook window.
The following is an overview of the worksheets.
EPC Worksheet
The EPC worksheet provides before and after information regarding the engineering,
procurement and construction aspects of your project. The term before refers to the
state of your project based on your initial premises, prior to interactively changing
from one scenario to another in Analyzers Economic Module. The EPC workbook
provides costs in both the currency of the plant location and a user-defined reporting
currency. For example, if your project were modeled using the European Union
country base (EU, currency in Euro) and you wanted to see costs reported in Euro for
a project relocated to Mexico (reporting currency in k-Peso), you could define the
reporting currency to be Euro and enter the desired exchange rate between the Euro
and k-Peso. You would define the reporting currency and exchange rate along with the

relocation country, at Run time. The EPC worksheet would report plant location costs
in both Euro and k-Peso. This worksheet currently provides the only connection
between costs in the country base currency and plant location currency.
The EPC worksheet provides the following information:
EPC results based on the initial premises (before the scenario)
o Status of stream data
o Exchange rate used to compute plant location costs in the
country base currency
o Summary costs, man-hours in both plant location and country
base currencies
o EPC start and end dates
o Breakouts of costs and man-hour for direct materials,
engineering and construction and project indirects.
EPC scenario results and key economic measures

o Economic measures: NPV, IRR, payout time, average annual
production over the life of the project
o Summary and detailed cost and man-hour information resulting
from changes during the interactive session.

Project Basis
The Project Basis worksheet provides project name, project description, simulator
type, capital cost evaluation and parameters, time periods, construction schedule,
manufacturing cost parameters, operating labor and maintenance cost parameters,
general investment parameters, escalation, cost summary, and EPC details based on
your initial economic premises.
Design Basis
The Design Basis worksheet provides summary-level presentations of income,
product revenue, manufacturing costs, margins, raw material costs, utility costs, and
earnings based on your initial economic premises.

Statements Worksheet
The Statements worksheet, like the EPC, Status and Figures worksheets, shows results
of changes made in the Input worksheets.
Timeline of events (dates, periods).
Payout time, IRR, NPV.
Present values for individually selected production periods.
Period-to-period statements with a display of results for a selectable
production period: income-expense statement, summary cash flow
statement, capital expenditures statement, margins, and NPV graph.

Figures Worksheet
The Figures worksheet, like the EPC, Status and Statements worksheets, shows results
of changes made in the Input worksheets.
Flows, by Calendar Period: Net and Cumulative Cash Flow, Margins, Gross
and Operating and Net Income as a % of Revenue, Product Revenues:
Domestic and Export.
Production: Domestic and Export.
Distributions, for a selected Production Period: Product Revenues,
Manufacturing Costs, Operating Costs, Fixed Charges.
The following is an example of one of the distribution graphs on the Figures
worksheet:

Revising Premises
The premises on which an economic scenario is based can be modified on the Project
Input and Stream Input worksheets. The results of modifications are immediately
reflected on the Status, Statements, and Figures worksheets.
Note: Revisions made in the workbook have no impact on the actual project
basis.
To revise premises:
1 Select either the Project Input or Stream Input worksheet.
2 Go to the Select field of the item you want to change. Pressing TAB moves
the cursor to the next field, while pressing CLEAR+TAB moves the cursor
to the previous field. You can also use the mouse and arrow keys.
The Select field can contain one of the following symbols (not case-sensitive):
Type To denote
B Use of base value.
R Use of revised value.
P Use of period-to-period values on the Stream Input
worksheet.
For example, changing the symbol from B to R acts as a toggle between the base
and revised value.
In the event a symbol is not entered, the base value will be used.

3 As this is an exercise in revising premises, type R (or r) in the Select
field.
4 Go to the input field and enter the new value. For percentage values,
simply enter the percentage value. If 0.2% is to be entered, enter 0.2. If
50% is required, enter 50. If a negative value is required, for example to
indicate construction is to begin 0.5 periods early, enter a negatively
signed value, 0.5.
As you make revisions, notes and other messages are provided to assure data
integrity. Each line item of data entry has at least one status flag. Informational and
other messages are provided to guide you in preparing a consistent set of premises.
Revised value of 10.00% will be

used.
Flag field displays ? and

Status of Revision field displays
FIX! because r has been
entered without a revised value
Base value will be used

As soon as you move from the revised field, the revision is reflected in the Status,
EPC, Statements, and Figures worksheets.
Note: Viewing the workbooks in a split screen arrangement lets you instantly
see the results of modifications. To do so, click Arrange on the Window
menu, select Horizontal, and click OK. You will likely need to adjust the
zoom to about 50%. Keep ECOSYS.xls minimized.
For example, if you revise the required working capital percentage on the Project
Input worksheet (shown in window at the top of the split screen pictured below), the
Cash Flow bar chart on the Figures worksheet (shown in the lower window) will
change.

Color Coding
Base Values: green background, black text.
Revised Values: blue background, black text.
Status Values: yellow background, red text.
Text Notes: blue text.
Error Messages: yellow background, red text and flag symbols.
Dates of key events: blue background, red text.
Saving AEM Workbook

To save changes to AEM worksheets, it is recommended that you save all workbooks
by closing Excel and answering Yes when prompted to save. Saving the worksheets
individually has been found to result in an error when re-launching AEM.
Discussion of Economic Premises

The AEM workbooks organize economic premises into two main categories: project
and stream input. This section describes the concepts behind the various parameters.
Project Input
As described previously, base values are listed to the right of the item category. The
Select field and Enter Revised Base Value field enable alternate studies. First, enter
either an R (not case-sensitive) in the Select field to revise the base value. Then
enter a revised value in the Enter Revised Base Value field. You can then enter a B
(not case-sensitive) in the Select field to switch between revised and base value. The
Value Used field shows the current status of your selection.
The following provides additional information about the individual parameters.

Scenario Reporting
Title and date data: will be displayed in the headers of the various
worksheets and in the footer of the Status worksheet.
Currency for Scenario Reporting: every cost value in the Economic
Analysis workbook will be in the Reporting Currency and converted from
the plant location currency by the designated exchange rate.
Plant Location Currency: costs in country base location currency are
developed by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) and are revised by
Analyzers Relocation Module (ARM). Costs in the plant location currency
are reported only in the EPC worksheet if the user selects a reporting
currency.
Reporting Currency: this currency is defined upon entering the Analyzers
interactive Economics Module along with an exchange rate relative to the
plant location currency. The exchange rate may be changed, within limits,
in the Project Input worksheet. This will enable a user to trend a project
over a period of time, should exchange rates vary from the initial premise.
Costs in the reporting currency are reported in all worksheets.
Exchange rate: number of currency units of Reporting Currency per unit of
Plant Location Currency. The exchange rate may be modified in the
Project Input worksheet to reflect a more current or anticipated future
value.
Reporting of Cash flows: in millions of reporting currency units.
Schedule
A timeline is established with a calendar start date to enable the study of economic
cycles and report the timing of events. A base calendar start date is automatically
generated to accommodate the base start date of engineering. However, as new
premises are added, the lead-time between start of calendar and start of engineering
may be too short to accommodate other efforts such as studies and changes to the
fixed capital investment. Or, you may want to base your reporting calendar on a
calendar year basis or your companys fiscal year. Once you select the start date of
the reporting calendar, you might want to review your initial premise for the start date
of engineering.
The engineering start date may be modified as well as the calendar start date.
Messages are provided in this section for lead-time, pre-planning time and float to
help you to establish timing of other events (see next section on Capital Investment).
Start Date of the Reporting Calendar: defines (a) the project timeline, (b)
enables the escalation to the start date of the calendar of costs entering
the workbook from Analyzer that are founded on the System Cost Base
Date, and (c) enables the dating of tasks and events, including:
o Strategic planning and decision engineering
o Contractors engineering and procurement
o Construction delay/early start of construction
o Plant Start-up
o Start of Production
o Payout
o End of production, salvage of fixed capital investment (FCI),
return of working capital, salvage of catalyst and chemicals,
and so on.

Start Date of Engineering.
Status of the calendar: lead time, planning time, float time and other
helpful status messages.
Time Period
Period: the designated period is a year. Only yearly periods can be
accommodated with this release.
Hours per period: determines stream factor, stream flows per period. Your
initial premise may be revised in the Stream Input worksheet.
Capital Investment
Decision Engineering Studies: duration is developed from the cost entry
and placed on the timeline.
Owners Engineering: duration is developed from the cost entry and
placed on the timeline.
Increment/Decrement to FCI (fixed capital investment, also known as
total installed cost, total project cost) at the System Base Date: enables
studies of FCI such as the trade-off between inside and outside battery
limits (ISBL/OSBL), plant capacity (with associated change in stream
factor see Stream Input), and impact of FCI changes during engineering
on process economics, and so on. Consider two uses of this feature (1) to
determine the impact on IRR and NPV of a 10% increase in capital cost
and (2) making a utility stream by adding more capital and setting the
utility stream cost to zero. A change here will impact the phase duration of
engineering, procurement and construction as well as their expenditures
along the timeline. In the AEM workbooks, FCI undergoes a number of
adjustments from the time it is evaluated by the Icarus Evaluation Engine
(IEE), as follows and as reported in the EPC worksheet:
o Initial evaluation in Analyzer performed by applying design and
cost specifications to the list of project components for the
specified production capacity of the process facility and plant
location.
o In the AEM workbooks:
Currency revision of FCI from the Plant Location
Currency to the Reporting Currency, using exchange
rate first established during Plant Relocation and then
under Scenario Reporting in AEM.
Escalation from System Base Date to the Start Date of
the Calendar.
Percentage Increment/Decrement adjustment (this
section).
Escalation of engineering, materials, construction to the
period of expenditure as determined by the duration of
each phase, progress of each phase duration, and
position along the timeline.
Start-up costs: included as a capital expense, range of typical values: 8%
to 10% of FCI.

Phase Durations
Duration of EPC Phase: base value, from Analyzer (CPM-based planning
schedule).
Delay or Early Start of Construction: enables study of impact of delay
prior to start of construction or early start. The planning schedule includes
early start. Analyzer splits construction from EPC duration to enable
delays to be studied. A negative delay value results in an early start. As
phase durations are revised, so too are dates of key events along the
timeline. As stream flows and expenditures are moved along the entire
time line by changes in phase durations (or other revisions), they will be
evaluated for escalation or unit costs/prices that are assigned to each
period.
Capital Cost Parameters

Working Capital, as a percentage of fixed capital investment (FCI). The
range of typical values is 10% to 25% of FCI (10% to 20% of the total
investment, that is, the sum of FCI and working capital), but you can
enter any percentage. A range of typical values is provided for guidance.
Catalyst and Chemicals: for the initial charge, as a percentage of FCI and
salvage value at the end of production.
Patents and Royalties, as an initial fee and/or fee, escalated for each
period of production and figured on the production for each period.
Land: range of typical values: 1% to 2% of FCI.
Manufacturing Cost Parameters

Operating Charges: if no base value is provided, Analyzer will estimate
and report a cost value based on Plant Operating Labor. It will split
operating charges into costs for Operating Supplies and Laboratory
Charges, which values may be revised individually as a percentage of
Operating Labor.
Range of typical values
o Operating Supplies: 10% to 20% of Maintenance
o Laboratory Charges: 10% to 20% of Operating Labor
Note: Typical ranges do not define limits on user entry.
Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs

Number of Shifts: base value determined by project components, type of
facility, and so on might be revised, especially if Increment/Decrement is
made to FCI.
Operator: number of operators and hourly rate may be revised from the
base value; Total Operating Labor Cost is displayed.
Supervision: Number of Supervisors and hourly rate may be revised; Total
Supervision Cost is displayed.
Maintenance: Cost/period is displayed and is reported as a percentage of
FCI, which % may be revised; range of typical values: 2% to 10% of FCI.

Base values for the following items come from your system input and may be revised
in AEM:
Tax Rate.
Interest Rate: used in calculating net present values and payout time.
Economic Life of Project: defines the time for depreciation and should be
the same as production life.
Salvage Value, as a fraction of the initial capital cost. This value is
recovered at the end of the project life.
Depreciation Method: select from Straight Lines, sum of the Digits, Double
Declining (Balance).
Escalation
Base values of the following items come from your system input and may be revised.
Project Capital Evaluation, a single value is expanded in AEM for individual
treatment of expenditures along the calendar timeline for:
o Engineering
o Materials
o Construction
Product Escalation: individually for domestic and export product; period-
to-period price/cost values take priority over escalation.
By-products: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual by-
product take priority over escalation for that by-product.
Raw Materials: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual raw
material take priority over escalation for that raw material.
Utilities: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual utility take
priority over escalation for that utility.
General: for remaining categories.
Stream Input
This worksheet lets you revise base values (assigned or default) for product, by-
product, raw material and utility streams. Either a single value, applicable to every
period (subject to escalation if a cost), or a period-to-period value (not subject to
escalation) may be assigned. Indicate use of base (B), revised (R) for a single
value for all periods, or individual period-to-period values (P). Symbols are not case-
sensitive.
Phases Along the Project Timeline

The following resulting values guide other input specifications.
Phase.
Phase duration.
Start date.
Fraction of a period devoted to each phase along the calendar timeline,
which includes the following:

o Start date of each period.
o Year: displayed with each section to maintain integrity of
period-to-period input data.
o Calendar Periods: Period (year) from the start of basic
engineering.
o Periods of Operation year from start-up.
Start-up, Payout, Shutdown dates.
Production Operations
Stream Factor, to study the impact of turndown and expansion.
Production
Price of domestic and export product and percentage of production devoted to export
product. The production capacity is reported for reference.
By-Products
Price of each by-product. By-product rates are reported for the designated production
capacity. The current version is limited to reporting 25 by-products.
Raw Materials
Price of each raw material. Consumption of each raw material is reported for
designated production capacity. The current version is limited to reporting 25 raw
materials.
Utilities
Price of each utility; for ISBL/OSBL studies, consider revising an ISBL utility stream
cost in lieu of its production by an OSBL unit and revision of the FCI (Project
Input>Capital Investment>Increment/Decrement to FCI) to account for the OSBL
units FCI Consumption of each utility is reported for designated production capacity.
Reviewing Results in Aspen

Icarus Reporter
Accessing Aspen Reporter
To access Aspen Icarus Reporter:

or
On the View menu, click Capital Costs View.
The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.

2 Keep Interactive Reports selected and click OK.
The Reporter imports and loads the reports from Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

After the reports are loaded, the Aspen Icarus Reporter window appears.
Reporter lets you select and run multiple Standard reports or Excel reports or Update
On Demand reports. These selections can be remembered by clicking the Remember
Selections button shown in the figure below. These selections are retained and shown
the next time the Reporter application is run. Beginning with V7.3, reporter
remembers these selections product as well as project wise.
In V7.2 and prior versions the selections are cleared once the reports are displayed.
Beginning with V7.3, these selections are retained until you choose to do otherwise.

Remembering selections product wise
In V7.2 and prior versions, reporter does not remember these selections product wise
separately and only remembers the last selections made among all the three Economic
Evaluation Products (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and
Aspen Economic Analyzer). Beginning with V7.3, this limitation has been removed and
reporter can remember the selections for all the three types of products separately.
When a reporter application is run on a newly created project, last remembered
selections (if any) for that product type are shown by default. Similarly, for an existing
unsaved project last remembered selections (if any) for that product type are shown
by default.
Remembering selections project wise

Beginning with V7.3, you can save selections product wise as well. These selections
remembered by clicking Remember Selections can be saved permanently with the

project by selecting the File | Save menu item or clicking the Save Project
toolbar button on the main Economic Evaluation frame window. When the reporter is
invoked on such a saved project, it retains the selections saved with the project.
Note: Clicking Remember Selections saves or updates the selections for

the current report mode (Standard Reports or Excel Reports or Update
On Demand) only. If you want to save or update the selections for other
type of reports then you need to select that report type and then click
Remember Selections after selecting the reports.
Clear these selections before adding or removing any new custom reports.
Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar
File Menu
Import Data Import project reports. See page 422 for instructions.
X X
Run Report Run selected report. See pages 402 (Standard reports), 415 (Excel reports),
X X X X
and 410 (HTML reports) for instructions.

X X
Open Workbook Open the last Excel workbook created. See page 418 for instructions. X X
Create User Database Export SQL database. See page 423 for instructions.
X X
Exit Close Aspen Icarus Reporter.

Trend Menu
Add Trend Data to Database Add the trend data from the project reports currently loaded
in Aspen Icarus Reporter to the trending database. See page 419 for instructions.
X X
Create New Trend in Excel Export trending database to Excel. See page 420 for X X
instructions.
View Existing Trend Data Open the trending data workbook in Excel. See Data Trending,
pages 419 through 422, for instructions
X X X X
Clear All Saved Trends Clear the trending database. See page 419 for instructions.
X X
Which Report Mode?

There are four report modes: Standard reports, HTML reports, Management reports,
and Excel reports. All but Management reports present Capital Costs and Design and
Basis reports. Management reports contains snapshots of project data frequently
requested by project management.
Standard, HTML, and Excel reports do not just present the same data in different
applications. Because of the differing capabilities of the applications, data is presented
differently in each. The choice of mode may depend upon what you want to do with
the data at a particular time.
Standard Reports
With Standard reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section
displays a tree-structure grouping of standard reports.
Report Descriptions
Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click a report to display a
brief description of that report in the Description section.

Aspen ICARUS Reporter displays a description of the selected report.
See page 406 for descriptions of all Standard reports.
X X
Opening a Report
Not all of the reports contain each of the features described in this guide. For example,
the Contents view only appears on reports with multiple sections. In order to see all
the features described, select the Contractor COA Summary report located in the
following folder:
Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\COA Summaries
To open the selected report:

Click the Run Report button .
- or -
On the File menu, click Run Report.
- or -
Double-click the report.
The report window appears.

Navigating
If there are multiple sections, a tree-structure Contents view appears on the left side
of the window, allowing you to jump to a section simply by clicking the section in the
Contents.
The arrow buttons on the toolbar let you page through the report:
Next Page Previous Page
Last Page First Page

Because the last page of a report usually contains the totals, clicking the Last Page
button is a convenient way to access them.
Magnification
To change the magnification level:

1 In the Magnification box, click , then click the desired level from the
menu.

Note: You can also click directly in the Magnification box (without clicking
) and then zoom in and out using the up and down arrow keys on your
keyboard.
2 When viewing the report at large magnification, you may want to hide the
Contents view by clicking the Toggle Group Tree button . This makes
more room for the report.
Segregating a Cost Section

If the cursor changes into a magnifying glass icon when placed over a cost sections
title or totals, you can double-click to open a separate tab window containing only that
cost section.
For example, under Civil in the Contractor COA Summaries report, the cursor
changes into a magnifying glass when placed over the Concrete cost sections title or
totals.
Double-clicking on this cost sections titles or totals opens a separate tab window.

Here, the Equipment cost section is displayed in a separate tab window, where it can
be viewed and printed apart from the rest of the report.
Searching
To search the report:

2 Type the text string for which you want to search.
3 Click Find Next.
The next instance of the text string is framed in red.
Printing
To print the report:

The Print dialog box appears.
2 Make any desired changes to the default settings; then click OK.

List of Standard Reports

HTML Reports
With HTML reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section displays a
tree-structure grouping of HTML reports.
Report Descriptions

Opening an HTML Report
To open the selected report:

Click the Run Report button.
or
or
A status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if you would like to
view the report now.
2 Click Yes.
Your browser displays the report.

Note: Generating the report as an .htm file allows the report to be sent in an
e-mail.
Management Reports
With Management Reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section
displays a tree-structure grouping of Management reports. These reports are intended
to serve as snapshots of the project scenario.
Opening a Management Report
To open a Management report:

1 Select the report.
Click the Run Report button.
- or -
- or -
The Management Reports Viewer displays the report. Pictured below is the
Detailed Weight Information report, one of the Piping reports in the Discipline
folder.

Other reports, like the Equipment Cost (Total Cost) report shown below, show
simply a bottom-line total.
Exporting Management Reports to Excel

You can export Management reports to Excel. This is particularly useful for when you
want to be able to e-mail the report.
To export a Management report to Excel:

1 Click Export to Excel on the Viewers File menu.
Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.
If no existing workbook is found, Reporter asks you to specify a worksheet
name (see step 3) and creates a workbook either DefaultWB.xls in the
Reporter output folder (if this is your first export to Excel since last re-
booting) or a workbook with the file and path name of the last workbook
to which you exported since starting your computer.
If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog box
appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook, append
the report to the existing workbook, or create a new workbook.

Select To do this
Overwrite existing Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as
workbook the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to existing Add the report as another worksheet in the existing
workbook workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.
Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will
appear as a worksheet.
Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you select a folder and
enter a file name.
Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook
name.
2 Make your selection; then click OK.
3 Enter a name for the worksheet.

4 Click OK.
The Export Status dialog box informs you when the export is done and asks if you
would like to open the workbook now.
5 Click Yes to open the workbook.

Excel displays the report.
Excel Reports
With Excel reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section displays a
tree-structure grouping of Excel reports.

Report Descriptions
Aspen ICARUS Reporter displays a description of the selected Excel report.
Opening an Excel Report
To open a report:
1 Select the check box next to the desired report.
You can select multiple report check boxes to open multiple reports.
Marking a folders checkbox will open all of the reports in the folder.
2 Click the Run Report button or click Run Report on the File menu.
Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.
If no existing workbook is found and this is your first export to Excel
during this session, Reporter creates DefaultWB.xls in the Reporter
output folder:
...Economic Evaluation V9.0\ic_cache\Reporter\Output

If no existing workbook is found, but you have exported from Reporter to
Excel since you last started your computer (to a file thats since been
moved or deleted), Reporter creates a workbook with the file and path
name of the last workbook to which you exported.
If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog
box appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook,
append the report to the existing DefaultWB.xls workbook, or create a
new workbook.
Select To do this
Overwrite existing Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as
workbook the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to existing Add the report as another worksheet in the existing
workbook workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.
Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will
appear as a worksheet.
Selecting Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you enter a workbook
path and name.

Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook
name.
After you make your selection and click OK, Excel opens a workbook displaying the
report.

Note: Exporting the report to an .xls file allows it to be sent in an e-mail.
AutoFilter
Several of the larger Excel reports generated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
take advantage of the AutoFilter feature in Excel.
To view a report that includes AutoFilter:

Open the following report:
Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\Item Summaries\Combined
When AutoFilter is available, clicking next to a column displays a list of all the
different entries made in the column. Selecting an entry displays only rows that
contain that entry in the column.
For example, selecting 105 Misc. Item Allowance in the COA Description column
of the Item Summary Combined report would display only accounts with Code of
Account (COA) 105.
Selecting Top Ten displays only items that contain one of the top ten most frequent
entries.
Selecting Blanks (from the bottom of the list) displays only rows that contain a blank
cell in the column, while selecting NonBlanks displays only rows that contain a value
in the column.
Opening Workbook Without Running Report
To view the last workbook created without running a new

report:
On the File menu, click Open Workbook.

Data Trending
Data Trending facilitates comparison of scenarios by allowing you to review capital
cost summaries of different scenarios in a single Excel workbook. If, for example, you
created three different scenarios for a project, you could use the Data Trending
feature to display the direct costs of each on one spreadsheet, with a separate row for
each scenario.
Clearing Trending Database

Because you only want to compare certain scenarios, the first step is usually to clear
the database used to populate the Excel trending workbook.
To clear the trending database:

1 On the Trend menu, click Clear All Saved Trends.
2 Click Yes to confirm clearing of the data.

The Trending Data Update dialog box tells when this is done.
3 Click OK.
Adding Trend Data to Database

The next step is to add trend data to the database.
To add the current project reports trend data to the

database:
1 On the Trend menu, click Add Trend Data to Database.

The Trending Data Update dialog box tells you when Reporter has finished adding
the trend data.
2 Click OK.
You will need to add the trend data from the project reports of the other scenarios you
are comparing. For each of the other scenarios, open the reports in Reporter and
complete the Adding Trend Data to Database instructions above.
Using Reporters import function, you can open the other scenarios reports in
Reporter without opening the scenarios in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. See
X X
Creating a New Trend in Excel

After you have added the trend data from the Capital Cost reports of the scenarios
you are comparing, you are ready to create a new trend in Excel.
To create a new trend in Excel:

1 On the Trend menu, click Create New Trend in Excel.
The Export to Excel Trending Workbook dialog box gives you the choice of either
appending the trend data to the existing file or creating a new file.
2 Make you selection; then click OK.

The Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box appears. By default, all six capital cost
categories are marked.

3 Clear any categories you want to exclude from the workbook; then click
OK.
The Export Status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if you
would like to open the trending workbook now.
4 Click Yes.
Excel displays the trending workbook containing a spreadsheet for each of the capital
cost categories. Each set of trend data entered into the trending database is displayed
on a separate row. (The workbooks for any categories excluded at the Export Trend
Data into Excel dialog box are blank).

5 After having created the trending workbook, you can access it from
Reporter by clicking View Existing Trend Data on the View menu.
Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter

When you have a project scenario open in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and
select Capital Costs (Interactive) from Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Reporter
automatically imports that project scenarios Capital Cost reports as it opens.
However, once youre at the Aspen Icarus Reporter window, you can import a
project scenarios Capital Cost reports without having the project scenario open in
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To import a Capital Cost report:

1 Click Import Data on the File menu.
The Import Selection dialog box appears.

2 Use the browse tree to locate the project scenario folder, which should be
at:
Archives_Aspen Process Economic Analyzer\[Project]\[Project Scenario]
After clicking the project scenario folder, PROJID should appear in the File set to
import section.
3 Click PROJID; then click Import.
Reporter imports the data. When complete, the selected scenarios reports can be run
from Reporter.
Creating a User Database

You can export the Icarus SQL Database, listing the Relation attributes used by the
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), to a Microsoft Access Database (.mdb) file.
ICARUS Reference, Chapter 35, Database Relations, defines the ICARUS Database
Relations and the different attributes under each.
To create a user database:

1 Click Create User Database on the File menu.
Reporter searches for the last .mdb file it created.
If the file is not found or if this is your first database creation, the Create
User Database dialog box appears with only one Export Option: Create
New Workbook. The lower part of the dialog box provides fields for
selecting a path and filename.
However, if the last created file is found, the Export Options also include
Overwrite Existing Workbook. This option is marked by default, so the
lower part of the dialog box is not visible until you select the Create New
Workbook check box.

2 Select a folder, enter a database name; then click OK.
Reporter creates the .mdb file.
3 To review and work with the database, start Microsoft Access and open
the .mdb file.
Reviewing Results in Icarus

Editor
Icarus Editor is a fully OLE-compliant, Multiple Document Interface (MDI) text editor
program.
Accessing Icarus Editor

To view Capital Costs in Icarus Editor:

or
Click Capital Costs View on the View menu.
2
T On the Select Report Type To View dialog box, click Evaluation
T
Reports; then click OK.

Icarus Editor opens displaying the Capital Cost report.
The right-hand pane contains the report and the left-hand pane contains a tree-
structure Contents view that lets you jump to sections of the report.
Note: Click on the toolbar to turn the Contents view on and off (or click
Contents on the View menu).
Printing a Single Section

The Contents view also lets you print a single section, rather than the entire report.
To print a single section:

Right-click a section; then click the Print button that appears.
Icarus Editor Toolbar

New open a new document in the Document View

Open open an existing document
Save save current document to disk
File Properties view selected properties of current document
Print print the current document
Print Preview print preview the current document
Page Setup specify how the current document will be printed
Cut cut selected text to windows clipboard
Copy copy selected text to windows clipboard
Paste paste contents of windows clipboard into insertion location
Bold bold selected text
Italic italicize selected text
Underline underline selected text
Select Font specify font for selected text
Find (CTRL+F) find any text string within the current document
Preferences set and save your preferences
Toggle Contents turn OFF/ON the Contents View
Cascade display multiple documents cascaded
Tile Horizontal display multiple documents tiled horizontally
Tile Vertical display multiple documents tiled vertically
Help Contents display on-line help
Report Sections
Title Page
Two title pages are produced. This way, if the report is being printed on fan-fold
paper, one of the title pages will be produced on a page facing up.

Features
Estimate Base: financial quarter from which cost basis is derived and date
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) was produced. Run Date: Date and time
that project evaluation was run.
The currency symbol used in the report.
Telephone numbers to call for technical support.
Contract Structure
The Contract Structure section provides names of contractors and reporting
arrangement.
Table of Contents
The Table of Contents lists section names and the page number on which each starts.
The number of sections may vary depending on the number of Report Groups. If the
project contains only one, then there will be only a single summary. If more than one,
there will be a separate summary for each, plus a summary for the total project.
Project Summary
The Project Summary provides an overview of project costs.

Project Data Sheet
The Project Data Sheet lists items with separate columns showing user-entered values
and system default values.
Total Manpower Schedule

The Total Manpower Schedule shows construction manpower loading based on the
CPM Construction Schedule.

Ways to influence this schedule include:
Adjusting productivities, shifts per day, length of the workweek using the
General Rates specifications form and the Craft Rates specifications form.
These forms are accessed in Project Basis view under Project Basis\Basis
for Capital Costs\Construction Workforce.
Indexing man-hours either at the Project level (Project Basis\Basis for
Capital Costs\Indexing) or at the Area level.
The number of MEN PER DAY for each vertical bar is generated by summing the labor
assigned to all the work items that fall within the period represented by that bar in the
barchart.
Cash Flow Summary

The Cash Flow Summary shows total capital cost spent.

This barchart schedule assumes that the DESIGN ENGG AND PROCUREMENT monies are
already spent at the start of construction - the curve is not truly tied to the CPM
schedule. During construction, capital is then spent for material, direct field labor,
equipment rental and subcontract work, Home and Field Office, Start-up, and so on,
as the cost is incurred. By the end of construction, the TOTAL,AMOUNT given in the
Project Summary is indicated here.
Operating costs, such as start-up utilities, raw materials, initial catalyst charges, and
so on, are not included.
Project Schedule Data Sheet

The Project Schedule Data Sheet lists the fabrication and ship times for equipment
items by class and provides barcharts of the following:
General Schedule: Balanced display of Basic and Detail Engineering, Procurement and
Construction (EPC).
Engineering Schedule: Details for Basic and Detail Engineering and Procurement;
summary for Construction.
Construction Schedule: Details for Construction- others summarized.
Contracts Schedule: Schedule for contractor(s). When a single contractor is
performing all work, this schedule shows no new information.

Contract Summary
The Contract Summary breaks costs down by contractor.
Summaries By Report Group

Summaries By Report Group provides the direct material and labor costs and
manhours by report group for all areas reporting to that group.
List of Equipment and Bulk Material By Area

For each Area, the Equipment and Bulk Material List is divided into three sections. First
there is the Component List, followed by the Area Bulk Report, and finally the Area
Data Sheet. Following the last Area of each Report Group, there are two more reports
- the Report Group Summary and the Report Group Equipment Summary.
Appendix A- Design Data Sheets

Appendix A contains the Design Data Sheets for those items which are heavily
designed by the system- fewer items will have Design Data Sheets than are listed in
the Component List, above, which lists all user-added components. Since the Design
Data Sheet details the design on which the cost and installation labor is based, it is
especially useful during calibration of the systems material costs and man-hours. It
helps you compare your benchmark item to Icarus on an apples-to-apples basis.

Appendix B- Detailed Bulk Material and Field Manpower
Listing
Appendix B lists the design and cost details for every component, whether system-
generated or user-added. The results are reported in the sequence that the items
appear in the Area tree diagram.
Appendix C- Bulk Material and Field Manpower Summary-

by Report Group
Appendix C consists of one summary of the material and manpower man-hours and
cost for all direct costs in the project. There is one report per Report Group; if there is
only one Report Group, then this report is eliminated. It is replaced by the project bill
of material (see Appendix D description below).
Appendix D Bulk Material and Field Manpower Summary

- Total Project
Appendix D is a project bill of material (BOM). The format summarizes total direct
costs for all accounts. Due to the fact that the numbers are large, this is the best
source of material costs and man-hours for calibration.
Appendix E Direct Material and Manpower Summary by

Major Account - Total Project
Appendix E lists the Icarus default units of measure as well as any user modifications.
Reviewing Investment Analysis

You can view the Investment Analysis results generated by Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer in two modes:
1 View the results in the Main Icarus Window (ICS spreadsheets).
2 View the results in MS Excel.
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
automatically displays the four Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main Window
after you run an evaluation. You can set Preferences so that Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer does not automatically display the spreadsheets, in which case you would
have to select to view them as described below.
Viewing Investment Analysis

To view the Investment Analysis in the Main Icarus
Window (ICS spreadsheets)

or
On the View menu, click Investment Analysis View.

2 Use the tabs at the bottom of the window to move among the four
spreadsheets.
To view the Investment Analysis in MS Excel

1 On the main menu, click Tools | Options | View Spreadsheets in Excel.
2
T Do one of the following:

or
On the View menu, click Investment Analysis View.
Note: In the Excel mode, additional spreadsheets are generated that report
details with regards to utilities, raw material and products. For instructions to
generate customized investment analysis reports, see Using the Reporting
Assistant in Excel mode, page 451.X X
Equipment Summary
The Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) contains a list of project components used in
the analysis.
For each component, the summary contains the following information:

Area Name: The name of the operational unit area.
Component Name: The name of the project component.
Component Type: The type symbol for the component.
Total Direct Cost: The total direct material and labor costs associated with the project
component (including installation bulks), in the project currency.
Equipment Cost: The bare equipment cost associated with the project component.

Project Summary
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) contains a project summary for the capital costs
(equipment plus bulks) and schedule. This worksheet also includes operating unit
costs (labor wage rates and utility unit costs), utility flow/use rates (steam/water flow
rates, and so on) and operating and maintenance costs.
Project Summary Input Data

The following information on the Project Summary spreadsheet is user-entered, except
where noted:
Project Information
Project Name Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project name
Project Brief description of Aspen Process Economic
Description Analyzer project, from Project Properties
Analysis Date The date and time this analysis was performed
and Time
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from which
process data was imported
Simulator The version of the process simulator
Version
Simulator Report The name of the process simulator report file
File
Simulator Report Date and time of the process simulator report file
Date
Economic The name of the Icarus system used for the
Analysis Type evaluation
Aspen Process Version number for Aspen Process Economic
Economic Analyzer system
Analyzer Version
Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer project

Scenario Name Name of the current scenario (if applicable)
Scenario Description of the current scenario, from Project
Description Title on the General Project Data form.
Capital Cost Evaluation Basis
Date Date of capital costs/schedule analysis
Country Country basis for the capital costs/schedule
analysis
Units of Measure Units of Measure for analysis
Currency (Cost) System currency symbol which depends on the
Symbol selected country basis
Currency Conversion factor between user-selected
Conversion Rate currency to the currency used by the system
internally for the selected Country basis. For
example, if the US country basis is selected, the
internal system currency is US Dollars.
Therefore, all numbers will be reported in US
Dollars. However, if a currency conversion rate
of 1.5 is specified, all internal values will be
multiplied by 1.5 and then reported
System Cost Base The capital costs basis date of the system. The
Date Adjusted Total Project Cost represents the
calculated capital cost of the project (calculated
at this base date) escalated to the Start Date of
Engineering.
Project Type Project type identified on General Specs form
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process
evaluator
Plant Location Location of the plant
Time Difference Number of days between the date of the
Between System systems Cost Base data (for example, first
Cost Base Date quarter, 2000) and the projects start date for
and Start Date for basic engineering.
Engineering
User Currency User assigned name for the currency
Name
User Currency User assigned description of the currency
Description
User Currency User assigned symbol of the currency. This is
Symbol the symbol used for reporting the cost results in
the reports.
Descriptions for the following parameters are provided in more detail under Investment Parameter
specifications (page 99).
X X
Time Period
Period Description Duration of time
Operating Hours Number of hours in specified period
per Period
Number of Weeks Number of weeks in specified period
per Period
Number of Periods Set to 20 periods for investment analysis

for Analysis
Schedule
Start Date for The beginning date for EPC (engineering,
Engineering procurement, and construction)
Duration of EPC The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Phase
Length of Start-up Number of weeks scheduled for start-up
Period beyond the end of the EPC phase
Duration of The calculated construction duration in weeks
Construction Phase
Completion Date for The calendar date for the end of EPC
Construction
Capital Costs Parameter
Working Capital Percentage of total capital expense per period
Percentage required to operate the facility until the
revenue from product sales is sufficient to
cover costs.
Operating Costs Parameters
Operating Supplies Indicates the lump-sum cost of operating
supplies.
Laboratory Charges Indicates the lump-sum cost of laboratory
charges.
User Entered Indicates the user-entered value for total
Operating Charges operating charges.
(as percentage)
Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratory
(Percent of charges. If the user enters a lump-sum value
Operating Labor for either Operating Supplies or Laboratory
Costs) Charges, the addition of the two values will
override the User Entered Operating Charges
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for
(Percent of services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on.
Operating Labor
and Maintenance
Costs)
G and A Expenses General and administrative costs incurred
(Percent of Subtotal during production such as administrative
Operating Costs) salaries/ expenses, R&D, product distribution
and sales costs.
Tax Rate The percent per period of earnings that must
be paid to the government.
Desired Rate of Indicates the desired (that is,, user- entered)
Return return rate, in percent per period, for the
investment.
Economic Life of Indicates the length of time in terms of periods
Project over which capital costs will be depreciated.
Salvage Value The expected value of an asset at the end of its
(Fraction of Initial usable life for the company. The difference

Capital Cost) between an assets cost and its salvage value
is the amount to be depreciated over the
assets usable life.
Depreciation There are four depreciation methods allowed in
Method Aspen Process Economic Analyzer: Straight
Line, Sum of the Digits, Double Declining
(Balance), Accelerated Cost Recovery System
(ACRS). See Investment Parameters in
Chapter 3 for a detailed definition of each
depreciation method.
Escalation
Project Capital Rate at which project capital expenses may
Escalation increase expressed in percent per period. If the
addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)
period and start-up period is greater than one
whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used
to escalate the capital expenses for periods
beyond the first period.
Products Escalation Rate at which the sales revenue from products
of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in
terms of percent per period.
Raw Material Rate at which the raw material costs of the
Escalation facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms
of percent per period.
Operating and Rate at which the operating and maintenance
Maintenance Labor costs of the facility are to be escalated
(increased) in terms of Escalation percent per
period. The operating labor costs include
operators per shift and supervisory costs.
Utilities Escalation User-entered percentages reflecting the
anticipated utility price increase each period.
Project Summary Output Data

The following OUTPUT data is generated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer :
Project Results Summary

Total Project The total capital cost investment needed for
Capital Cost the project. If the calculated EPC period is
more than a year, the capital costs expenditure
will be spread out over the length of the EPC
period.
Total Raw Materials The total raw material cost of the facility ex
Cost pressed in terms of cost per period.
Total Products The total product sales of the facility expressed
Sales in terms of cost per period.
Total Operating The operating labor (including operators/shift

and Maintenance and supervisors/shift) and maintenance labor
Labor Cost costs in terms of cost per period. The
maintenance cost includes maintenance labor

and supplies.
Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in cost
per period.
Total Operating The total of raw material, utility, operating
Cost labor, maintenance, operating charges, plant
overhead and G and A expenses.
Operating Labor Includes operators per shift and supervisors
Cost per shift costs.
Maintenance Cost Maintenance cost of the equipment including
labor and materials.
Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratory
charges.
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for
services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on.
Subtotal Operating Subtotal cost of raw materials, operating labor,
Cost utilities, maintenance, operating charges, and
plant overhead.
G and A Cost General and administrative costs incurred
during production. This is calculated as a
percentage of the Subtotal Operating Costs.
The costs listed under Project Results Summary are broken down into
individual elements under Project Capital Summary:
Project Capital Summary
Purchased The total material cost of process equipment
Equipment and quoted equipment cost items. Material cost
is accounted for in the codes of account 100 -
299.
Equipment Setting The total construction labor cost for setting
equipment in place.
Piping The cost reported for each of these items
Civil indicates the total material and construction
labor cost calculated for the category. The
Steel
above cost items may have originated from
Instrumentation two sources:
Electrical Installation Bulks (please refer to Icarus
Insulation Reference).
Paint User: The user can add project components
that create cost items in these categories. The
project components may be in the following
categories: Plant bulks, Site development and
Buildings.
Other This item is the total of the following costs:
design, engineering, and procurement costs;
material charges (freight and taxes); and
construction field indirect costs (fringe
benefits, burdens, consumables/small tools,
insurance, equipment rental, field services,
field office construction supervision, and plant
start-up).
Subcontracts The total cost of subcontracted work. This cost
item is normally zero in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
G and A Overheads General and administrative costs associated

with engineering, materials, and construction
work.
Contract Fee The total cost of contract fees for engineering,
material, construction, any subcontracted
work.
Escalation The total capital costs escalation amount. This
cost item is normally zero in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
Contingencies The additional costs required to bring this
project to completion. In Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer, this cost item is
automatically calculated based on the project
type and process complexity.
Total Project Cost The total project capital cost of the plant
calculated by the Icarus Evaluation Engine as
of the System Cost Base Date.
Adjusted Total Indicates the Total Project Cost (described
Capital Cost above) adjusted to the Start of Basic
Engineering. The Total Project Cost is
escalated , using the Project Capital Escalation
Parameter, from the system Cost Base date to
the start date of basic engineering.
Below is the formula used:
C_at=C_t*(1+(t_diff*e)/(w*7*100))
where:
C_at = Adjusted Total Capital Cost
C_t = Total Capital Cost
t_diff = Time difference between System Cost Base Date
and Start Date for Engineering
e = Project Capital Escalation
w = Number of weeks per period
Raw Material Costs and Product Sales

Raw Materials Cost Total raw material usage cost per hour
per Hour specified in the Raw Material Specifications
file.
Total Raw Materials Total cost of raw materials per period. This
Cost number is generated by multiplying Raw
Materials Cost per Hour by Operating Hours
per Period.
Products Sales per Total produced product sales expressed in cost
Hour per hour.
Total Products Sales Total product sales per period. This number is
generated by multiplying Products Sales per
Hour by Operating Hours per Period.
Main Product Name The main product of the plant is considered to
be the product which produces the largest
sales figure per period. This field contains the
description of the main product (assigned by
the user).
Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product.
Main Product Unit The unit cost rate of the main product.
Cost
Main Product The production basis (or unit of measure) of

Production Basis the main product (LB,
GALLONS, and so on.).
Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product per
per Period period .
Main Product Sales The total sales figure of the main product per
period.
By-product Sales The total sales figure per period of the

by-products (that is,, products other than the
main product of the plant).
Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs
Operating Labor
Operators per Shift The number of operators per shift per hour
necessary to operate the plant.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each operator expressed in
cost per operator per shift.
Total Operating Total operating labor cost obtained by
Labor Cost multiplying number of operators per shift by
the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Maintenance
Cost/8000 Hours The cost of maintaining the facility equipment
for 8000 hours of operation of the facility.
Total Maintenance The total maintenance cost of the facility per
Cost period.
Supervision
Supervisors per The number of supervisors per shift per hour
Shift necessary to oversee personnel who operate
the facility.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each supervisor expressed
in cost per supervisors per shift.
Total Supervision Total supervising labor cost obtained by
Cost multiplying number of supervisors per shift by
the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Utilities Costs
The utility cost breakdown is given below for electricity, potable
water, fuel and instrument air as well as user defined process utilities
such as steam.
Note: The Process utilities details are available only when the results
are viewed in Excel. These are made available through separate
spreadsheets.
The description of each utility includes:
Rate The rate of use of the utility in terms of
amount per hour.
Unit Cost The unit cost of the utility in cost per amount.
Total Cost The total cost of the utility in cost per period.

Cashflow
Cashflow (CASHFLOW.ICS) calculates the net present value (NPV), internal rate of
return (IRR), profitability index (PI), payback period, and so on.
The spreadsheet displays the cashflow information shown by period. The beginning part of the
spreadsheet contains data/results carried over from the Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS)
spreadsheet.
Item Description
TW Number of Weeks per Period

T Number of Periods for Analysis
DTEPC Duration of EPC Phase
DT Duration of EPC Phase and Startup
WORKP Working Capital Percentage
OPCHG Operating Charges
PLANTOVH Plant Overhead
CAPT Total Project Cost
RAWT Total Raw Material Cost
PRODT Total Product Sales
OPMT Total Operating Labor and Maintenance Cost
UTILT Total Utilities Cost
ROR Desired Rate of Return/Interest Rate
AF ROR Annuity Factor
TAXR Tax Rate
IF ROR Interest Factor
ECONLIFE Economic Life of Project
SALVAL Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)
DEPMETH Depreciation Method

DEPMETHN Depreciation Method Id
ESCAP Project Capital Escalation
ESPROD Products Escalation
ESRAW Raw Material Escalation
ESLAB Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation
ESUT Utilities Escalation
START Start Period for Plant Startup
PODE Desired Payout Period (excluding EPC and Startup
Phases). Reserved for future use.
POD Desired Payout Period: Reserved for future use.
DESRET Desired Return on Project for Sales Forecasting.
Reserved for future use.
END End Period for Economic Life of Project
GA G and A Expenses
DTEP Duration of EP Phase before Start of Construction
OP Total Operating Labor Cost
MT Total Maintenance Cost
Sales
A number will appear in this category only after the time allotted for all prior phases
(engineering, procurement, construction and startup phases) has expired.
SP (Products The total products sales value per period calculated
Sales) in PROJSUM.ICS.
SPF (Forecasted Reserved for future use.
Sales Annuity
Factor)
SF (Forecasted Reserved for future use.
Sales)
S (Total Sales) Indicates the amount received per period from sold
products. This number is either SP or SF.
Expenses
Includes both capital and operating expenditures per period listed
below.
CAP (Capital Indicates, by period, total funds spent prior to startup.
Costs) Unescalated Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates the
total capital costs spent through the current period.
This is based on the Total Project Capital Cost in
PROJSUM.ICS.
Capital Cost: Indicates, by period, the amount of
initial, non-variable costs associated with the project.
This number is based on the Total Project Capital Cost
found in PROJSUM.ICS.
Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates capital expenditures
through period n. For example, the number in period 4
represents the total capital expenditures beginning in
period 1 and ending in period 4.
Working: Indicates the amount required to operate the
facility before the revenue from product sales is

sufficient to cover costs. Working Capital is a lump-
sum amount which takes effect during the start-up
period. It is escalated at rate equal to the Project
Capital Escalation rate.
OP (Operating Indicates, by period, the total expenditure on the
Costs) following items necessary to keep the facility
operating: Raw Materials, Operating Labor Cost,
Maintenance Cost, Utilities, Operating Charges, Plant
Overhead, Subtotal Operating Costs, and G and A
Costs. This number is the Total Operating Cost
imported from PROJSUM.ICS and entered in this field
after capital expenditures cease.
(R)Revenue
Indicates, by period, the amount of money available after capital and operating
expenses have been paid. This number is obtained by subtracting Capital Costs and
Operating Costs from Sales.
DEP Depreciation Expense: the amount by which the value of the capital cost
decreases each period. The Total Project Capital Cost is depreciated, via the chosen
depreciation method, over the useful Economic Life of the facility. The Straight Line
Method assumes that the item will depreciate by a constant amount over its Economic
life. When the Sum of the Years Method is used, the depreciation expense decreases
during each year of the projects useful life. When the Double Declining Balance
Method is used, the project is depreciated in geometric increments. The Accelerated
Cost Recovery System assumes that the project begins operating in the second half of
the first year, rather than in the beginning of the first year.
E Earnings Before Taxes: funds available after all expenses have been paid. This
number is obtained by subtracting the Depreciation and the Interest Expenses from
the Revenue.
TAX Indicates amount owed to the government. This number is obtained by
multiplying the tax rate by Earnings Before Taxes.
NE Net Earnings: funds available after taxes have been paid. This number is
obtained by subtracting the Taxes from the Earnings Before Taxes.
TED Total Earnings: total cash available from project. This number is computed by
adding the Depreciation Expense to the Net Earnings. Since the depreciation expense
is a non-cash expense (no cash actually leaves the facility in order to pay the
depreciation expense) adding the depreciation to the net earnings gives the total cash
flow obtained from the project. Inclusion of the Depreciation Expenses reduces the
amount of taxable income.
TEX Total Expenses (Excludes Taxes and Depreciation): the total expenses of the
project including capital, operating, and any interest expense.
FVI Future Value of Cumulative Cash Inflows: sums the Sales received through
period n and indicates what the Sales would be if they had been received in the
current period. For example, the value in period 4 is what the sales in periods 1-4
would have been if all of these funds had been received in period 4.
PVI Present Value of Cumulative Cash Inflows: the current worth of all the cash
received through period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value
that the sales generated in periods 1 through 4 would be if those sales were received
in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of sales from prior time
periods adding this amount to sales in the current time period. Using the specified
interest rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time period.
PVOS Present Value of Cumulative Cash Outflows, Sales.

PVOP Present Value of Cumulative Cash Outflows, Products: the current worth of all
of the cash paid through period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the
value that the expenses paid in periods 1 through 4 would be if those expenses were
paid in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of the outflows
(Capital Costs, Operating Costs, Interest Expense) from prior time periods and adding
this amount to the outflows in the current period. Using the specified interest rate, this
total is then discounted back to the first time period .
PVO Present Value of Cumulative Cashflows: represents PVOS or PVOP depending
on whether or not you entered a desired payout period. If you entered a desired
payout period, the basis for the cash outflow calculation is the Forecasted Sales.
Otherwise, the basis is Product Sales.
PV Present Value of Cashflows: the present worth of the Total Earnings received
in the current period. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that
the Total Earnings generated in period 4 discounted back to the first time period.
Final results are shown below:
NPV Net Present Value: the current worth of all the Net Earnings received through
period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the Net
Earnings generated in periods 1 through 4 if those earnings were received in the first
period. This number is obtained by summing all of the Net Earnings from prior time
periods and adding this amount to the Net Earnings in the current time period. Using
the specified interest rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time period.
The sign of this value determines the analysis result. If, in a certain period, the sign of
the net present value is negative, then the proposed investment appears not to be
profitable, thus far. For example, if the sign of the net preset value is negative in
period 3, then the project does not appear to be profitable during periods 1, 2, and 3.
However, if the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable, from period
3 onward. If the net present value equals zero, then the project does not incur any
losses or gains (break-even point).
IRR Internal Rate of Return: the rate at which the present value of all cash flows is
zero. It is also known as the Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return. This value is
calculated at the End Period for Economic Life of Project (that is,, Economic Life of
Project and considering the length of EPC and Startup Period). At the End Period for
Economic Life of Project, it is assumed the salvage value of the plant and the working
capital are recouped. IRR is the after-tax interest rate at which the organization can
borrow funds and break even at the end of the project life.
MIRR Modified Internal Rate of Return: the profitability of the project. The internal
rate of return is the interest rate which equates the present value of a projects
expected cash inflows to the present value of the projects expected costs (or
outflows). The internal rate of return for each period is calculated by dividing the
Present Value of Cumulative Inflows by the Present Value of Cumulative Outflows and
raising this to a power and multiplied by 100. Two criteria are critical in evaluating the
internal rate of return. First, if the sign of the rate of return is negative, the project
appears not to be profitable. If the sign is positive, then the project appears to be
profitable. If the rate of return equals zero then the project incurs no losses or gains
(break-even point). In addition, if the rate of return is greater than the rate which
could be obtained from other opportunities (that is,, investing in a bank), then the
project probably should be undertaken.
NRR Net Rate of Return: the profitability of the project. The net rate of return for
each period is calculated by dividing the Net Present Value by the Present Value of
Cumulative Outflows and then multiplying the result by 100.
PO Payout Period: the expected number of years required to recover the original
investment in the project. This row will indicate the length of time that the facility
needs to operate in order to recover the initial capital investment (total capital cost
plus working capital). If a number is entered for the Desired Payout Period, the

spreadsheet will determine the amount of Sales necessary to meet this desired
payout.
ARR Accounting Rate of Return: measures a projects contribution to the firms net
income. This number is the ratio of the projects Average Annual Expected Net Income
to its Average Investment. For example, the Average Annual Expected Net Income for
the fourth period is determined by summing net earnings from periods 1 through 4
and divided by 4. The Average Investment is determined by finding the Salvage Value,
and adding this number to the Total Project Cost and dividing this total by 2. If the
accounting rate of return is greater than one, then this is an indication that the project
might be a profitable undertaking. If the sign is negative, then the project does not
appear to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the project incurs no losses or
gains (break-even point).
PI Profitability Index: shows the relative profitability of any project; it shows the
present value of the benefits relative to the present value of the costs. For each
period, this number is computed by dividing the Present Value of the Cumulative Cash
Inflows by the Present Value of the Cumulative Cash Outflows. If the profitability index
is greater than one, then the project appears to be profitable. If this index is less than
one, then the project appears not to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the
project incurs no losses or gains (break-even point).
Analysis
Analysis results are shown by period. ( - ) indicates the project in the current
period appears unprofitable, while 0 indicates break-even status.
Depreciation Calculations
This section presents details on the calculation of depreciation.
Executive Summary
Executive Summary (EXECSUM.ICS) contains a project summary intended to be
reviewed by executives and other business decision makers.

It contains the following information:
PROJECT NAME Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
name
CAPACITY Capacity of plant for major product
PLANT LOCATION Location of plant
BRIEF DESCRIPTION Brief description of project, from Project
Properties
SCHEDULE
Start Date for The beginning date for EPC (engineering,
Engineering procurement, and construction)
Duration of EPC The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Phase
Completion Date for The calendar date for the end of EPC
Construction
Length of Start-up Number of weeks scheduled for start-up
Period beyond the end of the EPC phase
INVESTMENT
Currency Conversion Conversion factor between user-selected
currency to the currency used by the
system internally for the selected Country
basis. For example, if the US country basis
is selected, the internal system currency is
US Dollars. Therefore, all numbers will be
reported in US Dollars. However, if a
currency conversion rate of 1.5 is specified,
all internal values will be multiplied by 1.5
and then reported
Total Project Capital The total capital cost investment needed for
the project. If the calculated EPC period is
more than a year, the capital costs
expenditure will be spread out over the
length of the EPC period
Total Operating Cost The total of raw material, utility, operating
labor, maintenance, operating charges,
plant overhead and G and A expenses
Total Raw Materials The total raw material cost of the facility
Cost expressed in terms of cost per year
Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in
terms of cost per year
Total Product Sales The total product sales of the facility
expressed in terms of cost per year
Desired Rate of Desired rate of return expressed in terms of
Return percent per year.
PROJECT INFORMATION
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from
which process data was imported
Version The version of the process simulator
Report File The file name of the process simulator
report file
Report Date Date and time of the process simulator

report file
Economic Analysis The name of the Icarus system used for the
Type evaluation
Version Version number of the Icarus system.
System Cost Base The capital costs basis date of the system.
Date The Adjusted Total Project Cost represents
the calculated capital cost of the project
(calculated at this base date) escalated to
the Start Date of Engineering.
Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer project
Analysis Date Date investment analysis was run.
Country basis Country basis for the capital costs/schedule
analysis
Project Type Project type identified in the standard basis
specs
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process
evaluator
Using the Reporting Assistant

The Reporting Assistant feature lets you create your own customized report
spreadsheets, combining information from all other Icarus generated spreadsheets.
The sections below describe the steps to create such custom reports when viewing the
results within the Icarus Main Window (ICS) and when viewing them in Excel.
Using the Reporting Assistant in ICS
To develop a customized spreadsheet file and template

1 On the Tools menu, click Options | Reporting Assistant.

The Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears.
2 On the Report File tab, click New.

3 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the report file that will contain
your customized spreadsheet. For example, type Custom as shown
below.
4 Click Save.
5 Click the Report Templates tab.

6 In the Template Files section, click New.
7 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the template file (for
example, summary) and click Save.
This example creates a reporting template for future use called Summary.tra.
8 In the Template Entries section, click New Entry. In the Column Label
field, enter a label (for example, Project Name) for the first column on
your custom report spreadsheet. The Display Column box should
automatically display 1.
9 The Entry Definition section defines the data to be entered in the above
column. Select a file name in the Source box, then enter the column and
row of the source data.
For example, in the figure below, the contents of Column C, Row 8 of Project.ics has
been specified to appear in the customized report spreadsheets Project Name column.

10 Follow the same procedure (steps 7 - 8) to add more entries. You can use
a variety of sources. For example, adding the following entries will result
in a report template that uses all three of the previously discussed .ics
files as sources.
Display Source Source
Column Label Column Source Column Row
Project Name 1 projsum.ics C 8

Start Date for
2 projsum.ics C 61
Engineering
Tax Rate 3 projsum.ics C 112
Purchased
4 projsum.ics C 172
Equipment Cost
Total Project
5 cashflow.ics C 14
Cost
Total
Maintenance 6 cashflow.ics C 40
Cost
Completion
Date for 7 execsum.ics B 17
Construction
11 When all the template entries are added, return to the Report File tab
view. To the right of the Template File field, click Browse.
12 Select the newly created template file (for example, Summary.tra) and
click Open.
13 Click OK to exit the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box.
Using the Reporting Assistant in Excel mode

When the results are viewed in Excel, certain additional results are made available to
the user. These include details about the process utilities as well as the individual raw
material and products in the project.
The Excel mode uses two files:

Aspen Process This workbook contains the spreadsheets used to
Economic report the investment analysis results. This is an
AnalyzerWB.xls ICARUS system file and users are recommended
not to modify its contents.
Aspen Process The Aspen Process Economic
Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls file stores the
AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls customizations that are in turn used by the
Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB.xls. You
can modify its contents to customize the Run
Summary worksheet.
The global copy of these files resides in the \Data\ICS folder. The files are copied
into the individual project folder when the investment analysis results are invoked
Note: If copies of these files already exist within the projects, then they may
not be replaced and so may have to be replaced manually by the user. In the
case of ICARUS projects that are migrated from previous versions, any older
versions of these files will be saved as a backup and the newer versions will
be used.
The Run Summary worksheet in the Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB.xls
workbook is the sheet that can be customized by the user. The Aspen Process
Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls file stores the customizations that are in turn used
by the Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB.xls. The Aspen Process Economic
AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls files stores:
The template to be used in the Run Summary worksheet
Any additional user defined functions (UDF) that the user wants to
incorporate.
The default Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls that is provided with
the system can be used to review these aspects of the file. The sections below explain
this further.
Steps to customize the Run Summary

worksheet:
If you want to view a particular piece of information from one of the spreadsheets in
Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB.xls, on the Run Summary sheet, follow these
steps.
1 Close any open ICARUS projects and close ICARUS.
2 Open the ICS>>Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls file.
3 Edit the Template worksheet and add any user-defined functions that you
intend to use (see sections below).
4 Save and close the Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls
file.
5 Re-open the ICARUS project.
6 Delete or rename any previous versions of Aspen Process Economic
AnalyzerWB.xls and Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls
that may exist within the ic_cache>>Current Working Project folder.
7 Run the investment analysis and ensure that your changes are reflected in
the Run Summary worksheet.

Aspen Process Economic
AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>Template
worksheet:
The Template worksheet has three columns that you can modify.
This column denotes
Dest the destination column in the Run Summary worksheet, where a

particular piece of data should be reported.
Column Heading the title that should be used.
Source/Formula the source from which the data should be retrieved. Formulas
could also be used.
Here is an example:
Dest Column Heading Source/Formula
C Time Now()
D Project Name 'Project Summary'!C8
Keep the following in mind when editing the Template:
Entries must begin at cell D10
Processing of entries will end when a cell in column D is empty
The Source/Formula should not contain =; for example, Now(),'Project
Summary'!C8
If you intend to define and use other functions, see the sections below.
Aspen Process Economic

AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>User defined
functions:
All user-defined functions should begin with UDF_,
for example, UDF_UtilCost_Steam100PSI().
Functions that begin with Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerF_ refer to Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer system functions.
Using the Visual Basic Editor, you can view, edit, and add user defined functions in the
Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls workbook. The screen capture
below shows a snippet from this file. Using the samples provided, you could add more
functions in the sections marked Insert your functions here. If you need technical

assistance in this regard, contact the AspenTech Support Team.
Generating the Custom Report
To generate a report developed in Reporting Assistant:

1 Run a project evaluation.
2 On the Run menu, click Add Entry for Reporting Assistant.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer generates the report based upon the template
created in the Reporting Assistant. The data that was entered under List of Entries on
the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears as columns in the spreadsheet.
Every time Add Entry for Reporting Assistant is selected, the latest data is entered
on the bottom row of the report. This way, you can compare results.
Item Evaluation
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you run an evaluation on a single component
and view an Item Report. The type of Item Report displayed can be selected in
Preferences (see page 51).
X X
Run an item evaluation and display the Item Report:

1 Right-click the component in either Project Explorer or the List view, and
then click Evaluate Item on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer runs the item evaluation.
Note: If the evaluation has already been run, you only have to click Item
Report.
2 Right-click the component and click Item Report on the pop-up menu.

You can also click the Evaluate button on the Component Specifications form to
run the item evaluation and display the Item Report.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Item Report.
3 You can include multiple components in the Item Report: on the List view
(area level), select the desired components, right-click one of the
components, and click Item Report on the pop-up window. The resulting
Item Report lists individually the summary data (cost or sizing) for each
selected component.

Appendix A: Equipment and
Slots of Equipment Affected
by Mapping
The following table lists the Equipment and Slots of those Equipment which will be
affected by mapping:
Important: When you do Map Based On Last Session, the slots listed on this table
WILL CHANGE.
Object Name Attributes wiped out during re-size
DAT MIXER CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpDesignGaugePressure CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN PRESS. -GAUGE
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T HEIGHT
DAT OPEN TOP CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T HEIGHT
DAT REACTOR CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpDesignGaugePressure
CpLiquidVolume
DCP ANSI CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidSpecificGravity
Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of Equipment Affected by Mapping 457

CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Liquid specif. grav.
Driver power
Design temperature
Design press. -gauge
Pump fractional efficiency
Pump % efficiency
DCP ANSI PLAST Pump % efficiency
Design temperature
Driver power
Head
Capacity
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDesignTemperature
CpDriverPower
CpFluidHead
CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
DCP API 610 CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DCP API 610 IL CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
458 Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of Equipment Affected by Mapping

CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DCP CENTRIF CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DCP GEN-SERV CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DCP IN LINE CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower

CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DCP MAG DRIVE CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DDDTPACKED CpTrayType
CpTangentTangentHeightTopSection
CpDiameterTopSection
CpDesignTemperatureTopSection
CpDesignPressureTopSection
CpTangentTangentHeightBottomSection
CpDiameterBottomSection
CpDesignTemperatureBottomSection
CpDesignPressureBottomSection
TRAY TYPE
BOTTOM DESIGN PRESS.
BOTTOM DESIGN TEMP.
TOP DESIGN PRESSURE
TOP DESIGN TEMP.
TOP T-T HEIGHT
TOP SECT'N DIAMETER
BOTTOM T-T HEIGHT
BOTTOM SECTION DIAM.
DDDTTRAYED CpTrayType
CpTangentTangentHeightTopSection

CpDiameterTopSection
CpDesignTemperatureTopSection
CpDesignPressureTopSection
CpTangentTangentHeightBottomSection
CpDiameterBottomSection
CpDesignTemperatureBottomSection
CpDesignPressureBottomSection
TRAY TYPE
BOTTOM DESIGN PRESS.
BOTTOM DESIGN TEMP.
TOP DESIGN PRESSURE
TOP DESIGN TEMP.
TOP T-T HEIGHT
TOP SECT'N DIAMETER
BOTTOM T-T HEIGHT
BOTTOM SECTION DIAM.
DF ROTY DISK CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
DF ROTY DRUM CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
DGC CENTRIF CpDesignTemperatureInlet
CpDesignGaugePressureInlet
CpDesignGaugePressureOutlet
CpActualGasFlowrateInlet
ACTUAL CAPACITY
INLET PRESSURE-GAUGE
EXIT PRESSURE -GAUGE
INLET TEMPERATURE
DGC CENTRIF IG INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
EXIT TEMPERATURE
CpDesignTemperatureOutlet
CpDesignTemperatureInlet
DGC RECIP MOTR INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY

DHE AIR COOLER DUTY
[2]CpTubeWallThicknessSecondService
[3] CpTubeWallThicknessThirdService
CpTubeWallThicknessFirstService
CpTubeLength
CpNumberBays
CpNumberTubeRows
[3] CpDesignTemperatureInletThirdService
[2] CpDesignTemperatureInletSecondServ
CpDesignTemperatureInletFirstService
CpHeight
[3] CpDesignGaugePressureThirdService
[2] CpDesignGaugePressureSecondService
CpDesignGaugePressureFirstService
CpBayWidth
[2] CpBareTubeAreaSecondService
[3] CpBareTubeAreaThirdService
CpBareTubeAreaFirstService
No. of tube rows
Height
Number of bays
Bay width
Tube length
Tube thickness/BWG
Inlet temperature
Bare tuo. of identical items
DHE FIXED T S Surface area
Number of shells
Tube pressure -gauge
Tube temperature
Shell pressure-gauge
Shell temperature
No. of tubes/shell
Extended tube length
Tube thickness
Tube pitch
No. of tube passes
Tube outside diam.
Shell diameter
CpTubeLengthExtended
CpNumberTubePasses
CpNumberTubesPerShell
CpNumberShells
CpShellDiameter
CpDesignGaugePressureShell

CpDesignTemperatureShell
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubeOutsideDiameter
CpTubePitch
CpTubeDesignGaugePressure
CpDesignTemperatureTube
CpTubeWallThickness
Required surface area (with overdesign)
RAW SURFACE AREA
DUTY
DHE FLOAT HEAD Surface area
Number of shells
Tube temperature
Shell temperature
No. of tubes/shell
Tube thickness
Tube pitch
No. of tube passes
Tube outside diam.
Shell diameter
CpNumberTubePasses
CpNumberShells
CpShellDiameter
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubePitch
CpTubeWallThickness
RAW SURFACE AREA
DUTY
DHE PRE ENGR Surface area
Tube temperature
Shell temperature
Tube thickness
No. of tube passes

CpNumberTubePasses
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubeWallThickness
RAW SURFACE AREA
DUTY
DHE TEMA EXCH DUTY
RAW SURFACE AREA
CpTubeWallThickness
CpTubePitch
CpHeatTransferArea
CpShellDiameter
CpNumberShells
CpNumberTubePasses
Shell diameter
Tube outside diam.
No. of tube passes
Tube pitch
Tube thickness
No. of tubes/shell
Shell temperature
Tube temperature
Number of shells
Surface area
DHE U TUBE Surface area
Number of shells
Tube temperature
Shell temperature
No. of tubes/shell

Tube thickness
Tube pitch
No. of tube passes
Tube outside diam.
Shell diameter
CpNumberTubePasses
CpNumberShells
CpShellDiameter
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubePitch
CpTubeWallThickness
RAW SURFACE AREA
DUTY
DHT HORIZ DRUM VESSEL T-T LENGTH
DIAMETER
CAPACITY
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CpLiquidVolume
CpDesignTemperature
CpVesselDiameter
CpTangentTangentLength
DHT JACKETED CpTangentTangentLength
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T LENGTH
DHT MULTI WALL CpTangentTangentLength
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature

CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T LENGTH
DRB KETTLE RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
CpDuty
SHELL PRESSURE-GAUGE
TUBE PRESSURE -GAUGE
SHELL TEMPERATURE
TUBE TEMPERATURE
DUTY
surface area
DRB THERMOSIPH RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
CpDuty
SHELL TEMPERATURE
TUBE TEMPERATURE
DUTY
surface area
DRB U TUBE surface area
DUTY
TUBE TEMPERATURE
SHELL TEMPERATURE
CpDuty
CpHeatTransferArea

RAW SURFACE AREA
DTW DC HE TW CpDesignGaugePressure
CpDesignTemperature
CpVesselDiameter
CpTangentTangentHeight
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
Diameter
Vessel t-t height
DTW PACKED CpTangentTangentHeight
CpTrayType
CpTotalPackingHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
TRAY TYPE
Diameter
Vessel t-t height
Total packing height
DTW TRAYED CpTangentTangentHeight
CpTrayType
CpTraySpacing
CpNumberTrays
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
NUMBER OF TRAYS
TRAY TYPE
Diameter
Vessel t-t height
tray spacing
DVT CONE BTM CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
HEIGHT

DVT CYLINDER CpVesselDiameter
CpTangentTangentHeight
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DVT GAS HOLDER CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpGasVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
DVT JACKETED CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T HEIGHT
DVT LIVE BTM CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpSolidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
HEIGHT
DVT MULTI WALL CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T HEIGHT
DVT SPHERE CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume

DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
DVT SPHEROID CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
DVT STORAGE CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolumeGallonsBarrels
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
HEIGHT
EAC CENTRIF M INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
CpActualGasFlowrate
EAC CENTRIF T INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
CpActualGasFlowrate
EAC RECIP GAS INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
DRIVER POWER
CpActualGasFlowrate
CpDriverPower

EAC RECIP MOTR INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
EAC SINGLE 1 S INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
CpActualGasFlowrate
EAC SINGLE 2 S INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
CpActualGasFlowrate
EAD AIR DRYER CpGasFlowrate
CAPACITY
EAT COND CELL VOLUME
CpCellVolume
EAT FLOAT CELL VOLUME PER CELL
NUMBER OF CELLS
CpNumberCells
CpVolumePerCell
ECP AXIAL FLOW CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
Head
Driver power
Temperature
ECP TURBINE CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
Head

Driver power
Temperature
ECR BRADFORD CpCrusherFlowrate
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR CONE CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR ECCENTRIC CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR GYRATOR CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR HAMMER MED RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR JAW CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR PULVERIZER CpFlowrate
CpProductMeshSize
CpProductFeedSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR REV HAMR RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR ROLL RING CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR ROTARY CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
CpCrusherFlowrate
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR S IMPACT RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR S ROLL HVY RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpCrusherFlowrate
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
ECR S ROLL LT RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR S ROLL MED RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR SAWTOOTH CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR SWING HAMR RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECRYBATCH VAC CpLiquidVolume
CAPACITY
ECRYMECHANICAL CpLength
LENGTH
ECRYOSLO CpCrystallizerRate
RATE
ECT ATM SUSPEN CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER

ECT BATCH AUTO DIAMETER
CAPACITY
CpCentrifugeCapacity
[2] CpBatchFlowrate
CpCentrifugeDiameter
ECT BATCH BOTM DIAMETER
ECT BATCH TOP DIAMETER
ECT BOT UNLOAD DIAMETER
ECT DISK CpCentrifugeDiameter
DIAMETER
ECT INVERTING CpCentrifugeDiameter
DIAMETER
ECT RECIP CONV DIAMETER
ECT SCREEN BWL DIAMETER
INSIDE DIAMETER
INSIDE LENGTH
CpBowlDiameter
CpBowlLength
ECT SCROLL CON DIAMETER
ECT SOLID BOWL CpBowlLength
CpBowlDiameter
DIAMETER
INSIDE DIAMETER
ECT TOP UNLOAD CpCentrifugeDiameter
CpCentrifugeCapacity
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
ECT TUBULAR CpBowlDiameter
DIAMETER
ECT VIBRATORY CpProductFeedSize
CpScreenDiameter
DIAMETER
SCREEN DIAMETER
ED ATMOS TRAY TRAY AREA
CpTrayArea
ED PAN CpSurfaceArea
AREA
ED SPRAY CpEvaporationRate
EVAPORATION RATE
ED VAC TRAY TRAY AREA

CpTrayArea
EDC CENTRF PRE FLOW RATE
CpGasFlowrate
EDC CLOTH BAY CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
EDC CYCLONE CpCycloneDiameter
DIAMETER
EDC ELC H VOLT FLOW RATE
CpGasFlowrate
EDC ELC L VOLT FLOW RATE
CpGasFlowrate
EDC MULT CYCLO FLOW RATE
CpGasFlowrate
EDC PULSE SHKR CpGasFlowrate
FLOW RATE
EDC WASHERS SURFACE AREA
EDD DOUBLE ATM CpTrayArea
SURFACE AREA
EDD SINGLE ATM CpTrayArea
SURFACE AREA
EDD SINGLE VAC CpTrayArea
SURFACE AREA
EE FALL FILM Heating area
CpHeatTransferArea
EE FORCED CIR CpHeatTransferArea
Heating area
EE LONG TUBE CpTubeMaterial
Mat'l of construction
CpHeatTransferArea
Tube material
Heating area
EE LONG VERT Area
CpSurfaceArea
EE STAND HOR Area
CpSurfaceArea
EE STAND VERT Area
CpSurfaceArea
EF CARTRIDGE CpLiquidFlowrate
FLOW RATE
EF LEAF DRY SURFACE AREA
CpSurfaceArea
EF LEAF WET SURFACE AREA
CpSurfaceArea
EF PLATE FRAM FRAME CAPACITY
CpFrameCapacity

EF SCROLL CpProductFeedSizeSelection
FEED SIZE
EF SEWAGE CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
EF SPARKLER CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
EF TUBULAR CpLiquidFlowrate
FLOW RATE
EF WHITEWATER CpLiquidFlowrate
FLOW RATE
EFU BOX CpStandardGasFlowrate
CpProcessType
CpDuty
CpDesignTemperature
Duty
Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EFU HEATER CpStandardGasFlowrate
CpProcessType
CpDuty
CpDesignTemperature
Duty
Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EFU PYROLYSIS CpDesignGaugePressure
CpDesignTemperature
CpDuty
CpProcessType
CpStandardGasFlowrate
Duty
Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EFU REFORMER CpStandardGasFlowrate
CpProcessType
CpDuty
CpDesignTemperature
Duty

Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EFU VERTICAL CpDesignGaugePressure
CpDesignTemperature
CpDuty
CpProcessType
CpStandardGasFlowrate
Duty
Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EGC RECIP GAS INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
DRIVER POWER
CpActualGasFlowrate
CpDriverPower
EGP CANNED RTR CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Flow rate
Driver power
EGP GEAR CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Flow rate
Driver power
EGP MECH SEAL Driver power
Flow rate
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
EHE CROSS BORE RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE FIN TUBE RAW SURFACE AREA

CpTubeLength
CpNumberFins

CpHeatTransferArea
Number of fins
No. of tubes/shell
Tube length
Heat transfer area
EHE HEATER ELC Power output
CpHeaterPower
EHE HEATER STM Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea
RAW SURFACE AREA
EHE HEATER-ELC CpHeaterPower
Power output
EHE HEATER-STM RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE JACKETED RAW SURFACE AREA
CpTubeLength
CpHeatTransferArea
CpDesignTemperature
Design temperature
No. of tubes/shell
Tube length
Heat transfer area
EHE ONE SCREW RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE PLAT FRAM DESIGN TEMPERATURE
Surface area
CpDesignTemperature
CpSurfaceArea
CpHeatTransferArea
RAW SURFACE AREA
EHE PLAT+FRAM RAW SURFACE AREA

CpHeatTransferArea
CpSurfaceArea
CpDesignTemperature
Surface area
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
EHE SHELL TUBE Heat transfer area
Tube length
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubeLength
RAW SURFACE AREA
EHE SHELL+TUBE RAW SURFACE AREA
CpTubeLength
CpHeatTransferArea
Tube length
Heat transfer areas
EHE SPIRAL PLT RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer areas
EHE SUC HEATER Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea
RAW SURFACE AREA
EHE SUC-HEATER RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE TWO SCREW RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE WASTE HEAT RAW SURFACE AREA
CpFlowrate
CpHeatTransferArea
Rate
Heat transfer rate
EM ATTRITION CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM AUTOGENOUS CpSolidFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpDiameterInside
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM BALL MILL CpSolidFlowrate
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpDiameterInside
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM MIKRO PULV RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
EM MIKRO-PULV CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM ROD CHARGER RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpRodDiameter
CpProductSize

CpSolidFlowrate
EM ROD MILL CpSolidFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpDiameterInside
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM ROD-CHARGER CpSolidFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpRodDiameter
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER RATE
EM ROLLER
EP DIAPHRAGM CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP DUPLEX CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP RECIP MOTR Driver power
Flow rate
Temperature
Head
CpDriverPower

CpLiquidFlowrate
CpFluidHead
CpTemperature
EP ROTARY CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP SIMPLEX CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP SLURRY CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP TRIPLEX CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
ERD DIRECT CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA

ERD INDIRECT CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
ERD JAC VACUUM CAPACITY
CpDryerCapacity
ERD JAC-VACUUM CpDryerCapacity
CAPACITY
ERD VACUUM CpDryerCapacity
CAPACITY
ETDSATM SYSTEM TRAY SURFACE
CpTraySurfaceArea
ETDSATM-SYSTEM CpTraySurfaceArea
TRAY SURFACE
ETDSTURBO CpTraySurfaceArea
TRAY SURFACE
ETDSVAC SYSTEM
TRAY SURFACE
ETDSVAC-SYSTEM CpTraySurfaceArea
TRAY SURFACE
ETDSVACUUM CpTraySurfaceArea
TRAY SURFACE
ETURCONDENSING CpPowerOutput
Power output
ETURGAS CpPowerOutput
Power output
ETURNON COND Power output
CpPowerOutput
ETURNON-COND CpPowerOutput
Power output
EVP MECH BOOST Actual capacity
CpActualGasFlowrate
EVP MECH-BOOST CpActualGasFlowrate
Actual capacity
EVP MECH-BOOST CpActualGasFlowrate
Actual capacity
EVP MECHANICAL CpDriverPower

CpActualGasFlowrate
Driver power
Actual capacity
EVP WATER SEAL Actual capacity
CpActualGasFlowrate
EVP WATER-SEAL CpActualGasFlowrate
Actual capacity
EVS HUMMER CpNumberDecks
CpSurfaceArea

NUMBER OF DECKS
AREA
EVS ONE DECK CpWidth
CpLength
WIDTH
LENGTH
EVS SIFTER 1 DIAMETER
CpScreenDiameter
CpScreenDiameter
CpScreenDiameter
EVS SIFTER-1 CpScreenDiameter
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
EVS THREE DECK CpWidth
CpLength
WIDTH
LENGTH
EVS TWO DECK CpLength
CpWidth
WIDTH
LENGTH
EVT PLAST TANK CpLiquidVolume
CpTemperature
CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
GAUGE PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
HEIGHT
VOLUME
DIAMETER
EVT WOOD TANK CpLiquidVolume
CpTemperature
CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
GAUGE PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
HEIGHT
VOLUME
DIAMETER

EWFETHIN FILM Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea
EWFEWFE SYSTEM Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea
Size Interactive Slots - AirCooler Overall U
Fin Thickness
Duty
CpTubePitch
CpTubeOutsideDiameterFirstService
CpTubeLength
CpTubeFinHeight
CpPowerPerFan
CpNumberTubeRows
CpNumberBays
CpFinPitch
CpBayWidth
CpBareTubeAreaFirstService
Overall Heat transfer Coefficient
Size Interactive Slots - CpSpecificHeatRatio
Compressor CpDriverPower
CpCompressibilityFactorOutlet
CpCompressibilityFactorInlet
Size Interactive Slots - CpSpecificHeatRatio
TurboExpander CpPowerOutput
CpCompressibilityFactorInlet
Size Interactive Slots - Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor
HeatExchanger Overdesign Factor
Final Surface Area
LMTD
Overall Heat transfer Coefficient
Raw Surface Area
Shell Side Fouling Resistance
Shell Side Heat Transfer Coefficient
Side For Hot Stream
Surface Area with Overdesign
Temperature Correction Factor
Tube Side Fouling Resistance
Tube Side Heat Transfer Coefficient
UA
Overall U
Size Interactive Slots - CpExchangerDepth
HeatExchanger_PlateFin CpExchangerLength
CpExchangerVolume
CpExchangerWidth

CpRemarks2 :
CpMaterialCostPerUnit
CpLaborHoursPerUnit
Size Interactive Slots - Pump CpLiquidFlowrate
CpFluidViscosity
CpFluidHead
Size Interactive Slots - CpViscosityCS
Pump_Gear CpLiquidFlowrate
CpFluidHead
Size Interactive Slots - CpActualGasFlowrate
Pump_Vacuum CpLiquidFlowrate
CpFluidViscosity
CpFluidHead
Size Interactive Slots -
Vessel_Horizontal
Vessel_Spherical
Vessel_Spheroid
Vessel_Vertical
WFE WFE SYSTEM: Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea

Index
Add Stream command

. View menu, PFD 189
.D01 file extension, Icarus Object View menu, PFD 193
files 142 Add Trend Data to Database
.EML file extension, importing cost command
libraries 317 Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
.UCL file extension, importing cost Reporter 462
libraries 317 adding
templates 27
Adding
2
areas 199
2/3 rule 102, 262 project components 200
streams 239243
A Additional Project Component files
importing from 5.0/5.1 20
About command Adjusted Total Capital Cost
Help menu 50 Project Summary spreadsheet
Absolute Basis 484
streams 128, 132, 137138, 194 Air coolers
Accelerated Cost Recovery System design criteria specifications 101
(ACRS) Air supply
Investment Parameters, instrumentation loop 216
Depreciation Method 117 All Crafts Percent of Base
Access Control Systems 218 General Wage Rates 84
Accounting Rate of Return (ARR) Allow Docking command 41
Cashflow spreadsheet 491 Analyzer 2.0B
ACRS See Accelerated Cost importing from 2022
Recovery System (ACRS) Analyzer Economics Module (AEM)
Activate Custom Model option error when re-launching 432
Preferences 59 RESULTS workbook 424430
Add Area command 199 revising premises 430431
Add button saving workbooks 432
Pipe Details form 213 SPECS workbook 420424
Add Entry for Reporting Assistant Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)
Run menu 501 321326
Add Project Component command Analyzer Utility Model (AUM)
200 notes 135
Add Stream button Anchor bolts
toolbar 44, 193 civil installation bulk 214
Index 487
Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure Automatic task backup 58
Design Criteria 102
Apply button B
Develop Stream specifications
form 130, 241 Backup options
Installation Bulks form 206 Preferences 58
Interactive Sizing form 248 Backup/Recovery tab 58
Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments Base Design Value
form 210 Analyzer Economics Module
Preferences dialog box 56 (AEM) 430, 431
Area Base Stream
adding 199 Develop Stream specifications
deleting 229 form 132
icons 30 Develop Streams dialog box
importing 224 137138, 194
List view display of items 33 BaseCase, default scenario name
mapping 164 17
pop-up menu 200 Basis
re-numbering 230 Map dialog box 165
simulator 155, 165, 171, 187 streams 128, 132, 138, 137
type 199 138, 194
Area Dimensions 224 Basis for Capital Costs
Area Information dialog box 199 construction workforce 8286
Area Name 224 indexing 87
Area Networking 217 input units of measure 70
Area Type 224 introduction 69
ARR(Accounting Rate of Return) libraries 139, 140
Cashflow spreadsheet 491 output (reports) units of
ASME measure customization 72
pressure vessel design code selecting defaults 140
selection 76 BFD See Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
Aspen Icarus Reporter Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
accessing 438 displaying 158
creating a user database 465 Drag & Find feature 159
Data trending 461 introduction 157
Excel reports 453460 right-click commands 160
HTML reports 451453 View menu 162
importing data 464 Zoom commands 161162
Management reports 453456 Bottom sump height
menu bar 442 towers, design criteria 102
report mode 442 BS5500
standard reports 443451 pressure vessel design code
Aspen Plus selection 76
link to Aspen Process Economic Buildings 198
Analyzer 146, 151 By-products
map specs 94 escalation 437
models used in sizing towers 267 Stream Input worksheet 438
AspenTech
Aspen Plus simulator program 94 C
Auto Filter 460
Cached project information 52
Automatic Item Evaluation checked
Cancel button
command
Tools menu 48
488 Index
Develop Stream specifications Closed Circuit TV Systems 217
form 130 COA See Code of Account (COA)
Preferences dialog box 56 Code of Account (COA)
Capacity allocating UCL item costs to 309
changing 321 Cold Inlet Stream field 248
Capacity over-design factor See Cold Outlet Stream field 248
Pump overdesign factor Color coding
Capital cost parameters Component Specifications form
Project Input worksheet 435 204
Capital Costs Component Map Information 169,
Cashflow spreadsheet 488 171
depreciation 116117, 489 Component Specifications form
errors 418 accessing 203
escalation 117, 484, 487 color coding 203, 204
Executive Summary spreadsheet Options button 204, 206
494 P&ID button 211, 214
Investment Parameters 118 Component Status 170
Project Summary spreadsheet Components See Project
480, 482, 483484 components
reports 57, 470, 472 Components view
toolbar button 44, 438, 467 Palette 37, 38
View command 47, 163, 188, Compressors
189, 438, 467 design criteria specifications 101
Capital investment sizing 238
Project Input worksheet 434 Configuration options
Capture worksheet mapping 167, 172
Analyzer Economics Module Construction
(AEM) 424 workforce 8286
Cascade command Construction schedule
Window menu 31, 49 Project Schedule Data Sheet 474
Cash Flow Summary Contingency
reports, Icarus Editor 472 General Specs 74, 75, 78
Cash flows Project Summary spreadsheet
Project Input worksheet 433 484
Cashflow spreadsheet 486492 Contingency Percent field
CASHFLOW.ICS General Specs 74, 75
Cashflow spreadsheet 486492 Contractor
CCTV 217 fees 484
ChemCAD reports 474
map specs 95 Control Center button bar 374
simulator report preparation Control centers
147148 instrumentation loop 216
Chemstations Control Panel worksheet
link to IPE 7, Also See ChemCAD Analyzer Economics Module
Civil (AEM) 421
installation bulk 213 Control signal
material costs and man-hours instrumentation loop 216
207 Control valve
Clear All Saved Trends command instrumentation loop 216217
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Copy button
Reporter 461 toolbar, Icarus Editor 468
Close command Copy command
File menu 45 library items 316
Index 489
project components 227, 228 Currency Name 19
Cost libraries Currency Symbol 19
deleting 319 Currency unit for matl cost 223
duplicating 318 Current Map List
Equipment Model Library (EML) Project Component Map
300305 Specifications dialog box 94
importing 317 Custom Model
introduction 299 instructions 230234
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 307312 Preferences 59
Costs See Capital costs; Direct Custom Tasks command
costs; Equipment; Labor; Tools menu 48
Operating costs; Project cost; Cut command
Project direct costs; Total project components 227
direct cost; Total project cost; Cyclone inlet linear velocity
Utility costs design criteria specifications 110
Design Basis worksheet 428
distribution graph, Figures D
worksheet 429
EPC worksheet 425 DAT MIXER 505
Country Base 19 DAT OPEN TOP 505
Craft code 87 DAT REACTOR 505
Craft rates Data trending
construction workforce 8587 Aspen Icarus Reporter 461
Create New Project dialog box 17 DC_V worksheet
Create New Trend in Excel Analyzer Economics Module
command (AEM) 422
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus DCP ANSI 505
Reporter 462 DCP ANSI PLAST 506
Create Stream dialog box 136, DCP API 610 506
138, 241, 242 DCP API 610 IL 506
Create tab view DCP CENTRIF 507
Develop Streams dialog box 136 DCP GEN-SERV 507
Create User Database command DCP IN LINE 507
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter DCP MAG DRIVE 508
442, 465 DDDTPACKED 508
Create User Database dialog box Decision Center worksheet
Aspen Icarus Reporter 465 Analyzer Economics Module
Creating (AEM) 421
project scenarios 1620 Delete button
streams 239243 Pipe Details form 213
Creating a new project 16 Delete Mappings command 171
creating projects by importing Deleting
templates 27 areas 229
Currency components 228
Analyzer Economics Module mappings 171
(AEM) 425 projects and project scenarios 51
Currency Conversion Rate Demolishing a component item 207
creating a project 20 Density
Executive Summary spreadsheet Develop Stream specifications
493 form 132
General Project Data 20, 68 Depreciation expense
Project Summary spreadsheet Cashflow spreadsheet 489
479 Depreciation method
490 Index
Project Input worksheet 436 DIN
Depreciation Method pressure vessel design code
Cashflow spreadsheet selection 76
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 487, 489 Direct costs Also see Total direct
Investment Parameters 116 cost
Project Summary spreadsheet Directories
(PROJSUM.ICS) 481 project, locations - Preferences
Design code 6063
Executive Summary spreadsheet Disconnect command
495 streams 196
Project Summary spreadsheet Disconnected Streams dialog box
479 195
Design Code Discounted cash-flow rate of return
General Specs 76 See Internal Rate of Return
Design Criteria (IRR)
libraries 139 Display results after evaluation
selecting defaults 140 Preferences 57
Design Criteria specifications 99 Docking 41
Design pressure Documentation 12
applying 2/3 rule for 102, 262 Double Declining (Balance)
design criteria specifications 99 Investment Parameters,
sizing agitators 258 Depreciation Method 116
sizing heat exchangers 263 Draw Disconnected Stream button
sizing towers 274 toolbar 195
utility specifications 114 Draw Disconnected Stream button
Design temperature toolbar 44
design criteria specifications 100 Draw Disconnected Stream
sizing agitators 258 command
sizing heat exchangers 263 View menu, PFD 195
sizing towers 274 Draw Disconnected Stream
utility specifications 113 command
Desired Rate of Return View menu, PFD 190
Cashflow spreadsheet Duct installation bulk 213
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 487
Executive Summary spreadsheet E
(EXECSUM.ICS) 494
Investment Parameters Earnings
specifications 116 Cashflow spreadsheet 489
Project Summary Economic Life of Project
(PROJSUM.ICS) spreadsheet Investment Parameters 116
481 Project Summary spreadsheet
Detailed Process Economics reports (PROJSUM.ICS) 481, 487
419 ECOSYS.xls 420, 431
Develop Equipment Library Model Edit Connectivity button
form 303 toolbar 44, 191, 192
Develop Product Specifications Edit Connectivity command
dialog box 126 View menu, PFD 190, 191
Develop Stream specifications form Electrical
130, 241, 242 installation bulk 217
Develop Streams dialog box 136, material costs and man-hours
137, 240, 242 207
Develop Utiltiy Specifications dialog Electricity
box 111
Index 491
operating unit costs Evaluate button
specifications 122 Component Specifications form
E-mail 205, 502
reports 453, 454, 459, 460 Evaluate Item command 502
EML See Equipment Model Library Evaluate Project button
(EML) toolbar 44, 417
Engineering schedule Evaluate Project command
Project Schedule Data Sheet 473 Run menu 46, 417
Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) Evaluation
period item 501
Cashflow spreadsheet Preferences 57
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 487 project 417
Executive Summary spreadsheet Evaluation Engine 12, 265, 465
(EXECSUM.ICS) 493 Excavation and backfill
Investment Parameters 117 civil installation bulk 214
Engineer-Procure-Construct period Excel Custom Model files 230234
Project Summary spreadsheet Excel reports
(PROJSUM.ICS) 480, 481 Auto Filter 460
EPC See Engineer-Construct- descriptions 457
Procure (EPC) period opening 457
EPC Phase Exchange rate See Also Currency
Project Input worksheet 435 Conversion Rate
EQUIP.ICS Analyzer Economics Module
investment analysis (AEM) 425, 433
spreadsheets 476 EXECSUM.ICS 492495
Equipment Executive Summary spreadsheet
adding 200 492495
cost 477 Exit command
Equipment Model Library (EML) IPE File menu 4850
adding an item to 302 Expenses
adding EML item as a component 304 Cashflow spreadsheet 490
creating 300 Export to Excel Trending Report
definition 299 dialog box
Equipment Summary Aspen Icarus Reporter 462
investment analysis Export to Excel Workbook dialog
spreadsheets 476 box
ERROR message 418 Aspen Icarus Reporter 454, 458
Error Messages command Export to SPECS Command
View menu 48 File menu 45
Escalating library costs 316 Export Trend Data into Excel dialog
Escalation box
Cashflow spreadsheet Aspen Icarus Reporter 463
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 487, 488 External Simulation Import Tool
cost libraries 316 command
Investment Parameters 117 Tools menu 48
Project Basis worksheet,
Analyzer Economics Module F
(AEM) 427
Project Input worksheet 436 Facility Type
Project Summary spreadsheet Investment Parameters 119
(PROJSUM.ICS) 481, 484 FATAL message 418
Estimate Class 69 Figures worksheet
Estimate Date 69
492 Index
Analyzer Economics Module project specifications 67
(AEM) 429 General rates
File menu construction workforce 8285
Aspen Icarus Reporter menu bar General Specs 7377
442 Gray borders
IPE menu bar 45 Component Specifications form
Fit into one page 204
Zoom dialog box 161 Green borders
Float in Main Window command 41 Component Specifications form
Flow rate units 204
product specifications 127 Grid Settings command
Fluid classes View menu, PFD 189, 190
utility streams 112 Grids
Foaming tendency viewing in Block Flow Diagram
trayed towers, design criteria (BFD) 163
105 viewing in Process Flow Diagram
Foreman wage rate (PFD) 190
general wage rates 85 Grids Visible command
Form work View menu, BFD 163
civil installation bulk 214 Grout
Fraction basis 133 civil installation bulk 214
Freeze Content button
Properties Window 40 H
Freight
General Specs 75 HD 223
Fuel Heat exchangers
operating unit costs design criteria specifications 102
specifications 122 sizing 262264
Furnace fractional efficiency utility specifications 111
heat exchanger design criteria Help menu 50
101 Helper wage rate
FVI (Future Value of Inflows) general wage rates 85
Cashflow spreadsheet 490 HETP (height equivalent of a
theoretical plate)
packed towers, design criteria
G
104
G and A Expenses Historical Data 223
Cashflow spreadsheet Hot Inlet Stream field 245
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 488 Hot Outlet Stream field 248
Investment Parameters 119 HTML reports
Project Summary spreadsheet descriptions 451
(PROJSUM.ICS) 483 Item Report 57
Galvanizing (for steel) opening 452, 453
paint installation bulk 223 Hyprotech
General and administrative costs link to IPE 7, Also See HYSIM,
Investment Parameters 119 HYSYS
Project Summary spreadsheet HYSIM
(PROJSUM.ICS) 483 map specs 96
General investment parameters models used in sizing towers 267
Project Input worksheet 436 simulator report preparation
General Project Data 149150
creating a new project scenario HYSYS
19 map specs 97
Index 493
models used in sizing towers 267 general wage rates 83
Project Summary spreadsheet
I 483
reports 483
Icarus Editor Unit Cost Library (UCL) 299
printing report 468 Indirects
printing report section 467 general wage rages 83
reviewing results 466475 INFOmational message 418
toolbar 468 Input Units of Measure
Tools menu 48 Specifications dialog box 18,
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) 71
265, 465 Installation bulks
Icarus interface 2842 accessing 205
Icarus Object files 142 civil 213
Icarus Project Component duct 213
Selection dialog box 304, 311, electrical 217
313 instrumentation 214
Icarus Reference 12 insulation 222
IEE See Icarus Evaluation Engine introduction 205
(IEE) material man-hour additions 210
Import command paint 222
File menu 45 pipe details 211
Libraries view, Palette 142, 317 pipe spec 210
Import Connected Streams option Preferences 58
Preferences 59 steel 214
Import Data command Installation manual 12
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter Instrument air
442 operating unit costs
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter specifications 122
464 utility costs, Project Summary
Import Installation Bulks option spreadsheet 486
Preferences 59 Instrument volumetric model 214
Import Selection dialog box 216
Aspen Icarus Reporter 464 Instrumentation
importing installation bulk 214
izp files 23, 24, 25 loop adjustments 216217
project files 23, 24, 25 material costs and man-hours
zip files 23, 24, 25 207
Importing Insulation
areas 224 installation bulk 222
components 224 material costs 207
project from previous version Interactive sizing 237243
2022 Interactive Sizing form 166, 169,
scenarios 226 244, 248
specification files 142 Interest rate
Inch-Pound (IP), units of measure Project Input worksheet 436
18, 141, 142 Interface layout 2842
Incomplete items 34 Save Window States option
Indexing 57
Project Basis specifications 87 Internal Rate of Return (IRR)
Indicating signal Cashflow spreadsheet 491
instrumentation loop 216 Statements worksheet 428
Indirect costs Status worksheet 424
494 Index
Intrusion Detection Systems 218 Libraries
Investment Analysis Basis for Capital Costs 70, 139
project specifications 114128 cost libraries 286319
viewing in MS Excel 476 Design Criteria 139
Investment Analysis View Equipment Model Library (EML)
command 300
View menu 47, 476 input units of measure 7071
Investment Parameters moving to another directory 144
libraries 139 Project Component Map
project specifications 114122 Specifications 139
selecting defaults 140 specification libraries 139143
IP, units of measure 18, 141, 142 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 307
IPE 5.0/5.1 Utility Specifications 139
importing from 2022 view 36
IRR (Internal Rate of Return) Licensor Quote 223
Cashflow spreadsheet 491 Liquid entrainment method 108,
Item evaluation 501 281
Item Report List view
instructions for running 502 description 33
Preferences 57 mapped components 170
Item Report command 502 simulator file name 155
izp files Status column 170, 201
importing 23, 24, 25 Load Data button
toolbar 44, 155
J Load Data command
Run menu 46, 155
JIS Locations
pressure vessel design code plant relocation 321
selection 76 plant/project location 75, 479
Job Number field 69 Preferences 6063
Junction boxes Loops
instrumentation loop 216 instrumentation installation bulks
214
L modifications 216217
LQ 223
Labor cost per unit
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 309
Labor hours per unit M
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 309 Magnification
Labor Unit Costs Aspen Icarus Reporter 445
operating unit costs Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 161
specifications 121 162
Laboratory charges Main product
Project Input worksheet 436 Project Summary spreadsheet
Laboratory Charges 485
Investment Parameters 118 Main Window
Project Summary spreadsheet display options 41
480, 483 interface, default position 29
Ladders, steel - installation bulks printing 45
214 understanding 3032
LAN 217 Management reports 453456
Length of Start-up Period Man-hour indexing 87
Investment Parameters 120 Manufacturing cost parameters
Index 495
Project Input worksheet 435 Develop Stream specifications
Map All Items option form 131
Map dialog box 165 Mixture Specs
Map command developing streams 132
pop-up menu 164 Modify command
Map dialog box 165 simulator block 156
Map Items button streams 196
toolbar 164 Modify tab view
Map Items command Develop Streams dialog box 129
Run menu 46, 164 MTD See Mean temperature
Map Selected Item(s) option difference (MTD)
Map dialog box 165 Multi-core runs
Map Unsupported Models To instrumentation loop 216
Quoted Cost Item
Preferences, Process tab 59 N
Mapping simulator models
instructions 164171 Net Earnings
specifications 94 Cashflow spreadsheet 489
units of measure mapping specs Net Present Value (NPV)
9093 Cashflow spreadsheet 490
unsupported models 59, 94 Statements worksheet 428
Mass flow Status worksheet 424
Develop Stream specifications Net Return Rate (NRR)
form 132 Cashflow spreadsheet 491
Material and man-hour additions New command
installation bulks 210 File menu 16, 21, 45
Material and man-hour New Component Information dialog
adjustments box 201
installation bulks 207, 232 New Project button
Material and man-hour indexing 87 toolbar 16, 44
Material cost per unit NPV (Net Present Value)
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 309 Cashflow spreadsheet 490
Material costs NRR (Net Return Rate)
indexing 87 Cashflow spreadsheet 491
Material Index Info form 88 Number of Periods for Analysis
Material streams Investment Parameters 116
product specifications 125 Number of shifts 83
Mean temperature difference Project Input worksheet 436
(MTD) 263 Number of Weeks per Period
Menu bar Investment Parameters 115
Aspen Icarus Reporter 442
IPE 29, 4850 O
Meteorological Monitoring Systems
OK button
218
Develop Stream specifications
Metric, units of measure 18, 141,
form 130
142
Installation Bulks form 58, 206
Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)
Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments
file 465
form 210
MIRR (Modified Internal Rate of
Open button
Return)
toolbar 26, 44
Cashflow spreadsheet 491
Open command
Mixture button
File menu 25, 45
496 Index
Palette Projects view 26 Component Specifications form
Open Existing Project dialog box 26 204, 206
Open Workbook command Options menu
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter Component Specifications form
442, 461 58, 204, 206
Opening an existing project 25 Options sub-menu
Operating and Maintenance Labor Tools menu 48
Escalation Order Number 229
Investment Parameters 118 Overall column efficiency
Project Summary spreadsheet design criteria specifications 106
(PROJSUM.ICS) 482 tower sizing 275
Operating charges Overdesign factor 249
Cashflow spreadsheet 487 heat exchangers 102, 263
Investment Parameters 118 pumps 101
Project Input worksheet 435 Overtime
Project Summary spreadsheet hours,general wage rates 84
480, 483 rate, general wage rates 84
Operating costs Overwrite Project Backups option
Cashflow spreadsheet 489 57, 58
Figures worksheet 429
introduction to IPE 8 P
Investment Parameters 118
product specifications needed to P&ID button 211, 214
evaluate 126 Packed towers
Project Summary spreadsheet design criteria specifications 103
480 sizing 278, 279
raw material specifications PAGA 217
needed to evaluate 123 Paging and General Alarm Systems
Operating Hours per Period 217
Investment Parameters 120 Paint
Project Summary spreadsheet material costs 207
480 Palette
Operating labor and maintenance Components view 37, 38, 200
Project Input worksheet 436 cost libraries 300319
Operating labor and maintenance description 3539
costs Docking and undocking 41
Cashflow spreadsheet 487, 488 dragging components from 200
Investment Parameters 118, 121 floating in Main Window 41
Project Summary spreadsheet hide/display 38
482, 485486 interface, default position 29
Operating Mode Libraries view 36, 139143,
Investment Parameters 119 300319
Operating supplies opening projects 26
Project Input worksheet 436 Projects view 26, 35, 39, 61
Operating Supplies Recent Items folder 200
Investment Parameters 118 specification libraries 139
Project Summary spreadsheet View menu 47, 188
480 Paste button
Operating Unit Costs toolbar, Icarus Editor 468
libraries 139 Paste command
project specifications 120122 project components 227, 228
selecting defaults 140 Patents and royalties
Options button Project Input worksheet 435
Index 497
Payout period tower configurations 173, 270,
Cashflow spreadsheet 491 272
Period Description Preferences
Investment Parameters 115 accessing 55
Phase durations Backup tab view 58
Project Input worksheet 435 buttons 55
Phases description 55
Stream Input worksheet 437 General tab view 56
PI (Profitability Index) introduction 55
Cashflow spreadsheet 492 Locations tab view 6063
Pile types 79 Process tab view 59
Pipe Details installation bulk 211 prompts 56
Pipe Spec installation bulk 210 saving window states 57
Pipe volumetric model 211213 Tools menu 48
Piping Prepared By field
installation bulks 210, 211213 general project date 69
material costs and man-hours Present Value of Cashflows
volumetric model 212 Pressure vessel design code
Piping and Instrumentation General Specs 76
Drawings (P&ID) manual 211, Primary fluid component 131, 133,
214 241
Plant bulks Print command
component categories 198 IPE File menu 45
difference from installation bulks Print Preview command
205 File menu 45
Plant capacity Print Setup command
changing 321 File menu 45
Plant location Printing
changing 321 Aspen Icarus Reporter 447
Plant Overhead forms and reports in Main
Cashflow spreadsheet 487 Window 45
Investment Parameters 118 Icarus Editor 467
Project Summary spreadsheet Pro/II
481, 483 models used in sizing towers 267
Platforms, steel - installation bulks R/R minimum 103
214 simulator report preparation
PO (Payout Period) 152153
Cashflow spreadsheet 491 Problem description
PODE (Payout Period Desired SimSci report preparation 152
Cashflow spreadsheet 488 Process Complexity
Ports Visible button contingency affected by 78
toolbar 44, 191 General Specs 74, 75
Ports Visible command Process connection
View menu, PFD 189 intrumentation loop 216
Potable water Process Control
operating unit costs specifiations General Specs 75
122 Process Description
utility costs, Project Summary contingency affected by 78
spreadsheet 486 equipment design allowance
Precooler affected by 78
suffix for mapping 168 General Specs 74, 75
498 Index
Process Design specifications 89 specification libraries 139
114 Streams 128139
Process equipment 198 Project Basis view 30
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 187 Project Basis worksheet
196 Analyzer Economics Module
Process Fluids (AEM) 427
Investment Parameters 120 Project Capital Escalation
Process options Cashflow spreadsheet 487, 489
Preferences 59 Investment Parameters 117
Process Stream field Project Summary spreadsheet
product specifications 127 481, 484
raw material specifications 124 Project capital evaluation
Process vessel height to diameter Project Input worksheet 436
ratio Project component
design criteria specifications 106 connecting to stream 192
vessel sizing procedure 283, 285 Project Component Map Preview
Product escalation dialog box 167, 169, 171
Project Input worksheet 437 Project Component Map
Product sales Specifications
per hour, Project Summary dialog box 93
spreadsheet 485 libraries 139
per period, Project Summary project specifications, Process
spreadsheet 485 Design 9398
total, Project Summary selecting defaults 139
spreadsheet 482 Project components
Product specifications adding 200
investment analysis component specifications 203
specifications 125128 copying 226
libraries 140 deleting 228
selecting defaults 140 Equipment Model Library (EML) items
Product Support on the Web 304
command importing 224
Help menu 50 installation bulks 205
Production re-numbering 229
Stream Input worksheet 438 Unit Cost Library (UCL) item 310
Production operations Project cost
Stream Input worksheet 437 Cashflow spreadsheet 487
Productivity adjustments 83 contingency percentage 74
Products Escalation Project Summary spreadsheet
Investment Parameters 117 484
Project Summary spreadsheet Project Data Sheet
481 reports, Icarus Editor 471
Profitability Index Project Description
Cashflow spreadsheet 492 Project Properties 18, 67
Project areas See Area Project Summary spreadsheet
Project Basis 478
Basis for Capital Costs 6987 Project directories
default specifications 139 alternate directories 61
General Project Data 67 copying 54
introduction 66 default, setting 62
Investment Analysis 114128 Project evaluation
Process Design 89114 Preferences 57
Project Properties 66 running 417
Index 499
scan for errors 57, 418 Project Summary spreadsheet
Project Explorer 29, 30 479
Docking and undocking 41 Project view 30
floating in Main Window 41 projects
interface, default position 29 creating from imported
relation to Palette 35 templates 28
View menu 47, 188 Projects
project files copying 54
importing 23, 24, 25 creating 1620
Project in use - message 53 deleting 51
Project Input worksheet opening existing 25
Analyzer Economics Module view 35, 39
(AEM) 422, 430431 PROJSUM.ICS
Analyzer Economics Module investment analysis 477486
(AEM) 432437 Prompts
Project Location Preferences 56
General Specs 75 Properties Window
Project Name description 40
Aspen Plus - Aspen Process Docking and undocking 41
Economic Analyzer simulator floating in Main Window 41
link 146, 151 Freeze Content button 40
Cashflow spreadsheet 493 interface, default position 29
Create New Project dialog box relationship to specifications
17, 21 form 40
Project Summary spreadsheet View menu 47, 188
478 PROVISION See SimSci's Pro/II
Save As dialog box 51 with PROVISION
Project Properties Pump overdesign factor
creating a new project 18 design criteria specifications 101,
Project Basis specifications 66 265
Project scenarios sizing procedures 265
creating new 16 Pumps
deleting 51 design criteria specifications 101
importing 226 sizing 238
opening existing 25 PV (Present Value)
salvaging 52 Cashflow spreadsheet 490
saving 50 PVI (Present Value of Inflows)
unlocking 53 Cashflow spreadsheet 490
Project Schedule Data Sheet PVO (Present Value of Outflows)
reports, Icarus Editor 473 Cashflow spreadsheet 490
Project Summary PVOP (Present Value of Outflows
reports, Icarus Editor 470 Products)
Project Summary spreadsheet Cashflow spreadsheet 490
(PROJSUM.ICS) 477486 PVOS (Present Value of Outflows
Project Title Sales)
General Project Data 68 Cashflow spreadsheet 490
Project Summary spreadsheet
479 Q
Project Type
contingency affected by 78 Question mark in Status column
Executive Summary spreadsheet component specifications 170,
495 203
General Specs 74, 75 Quoted cost item
500 Index
mapping overhead/bottoms split Refrigerant 246
to 269 Relation attributes 465
mapping unsupported models to Relative Basis
59 streams 128, 132, 137138, 194
Quoted cost items Relocating
mapping unsupported models to introduction 9
94 Remarks field
Quoted cost per item 223 project properties 18
Quoted equipment 198, 205 Project Properties 67
Re-number command
R Run menu 229, 230
Re-numbering
Radio Systems 218 areas 230
Rate field project components 229
product specifications 127 Report files
raw material specifications 124 Reporting Assistant 496
Rate Units field Report templates
product specifications 127 Reporting Assistant 496
raw material specifications 124 Reporter See Aspen Icarus
Raw material Reporter
costs, Cashflow spreadsheet 487 Reporting Assistant 495501
costs, Executive Summary Reports
spreadsheet 494 customizing 495501
costs, project specifications 125 data trending 461463
costs, Project Summary Excel 419, 453460
spreadsheet 482, 484 HTML 451453
escalation 117, 482, 487 Item report 501
project specifications 122125 Management reports 453
Raw Material Escalation producing 417, 419, 501
Cashflow spreadsheet 487 Standard reports 443451
Investment Parameters 117 Reroute All Streams command
Project Summary spreadsheet Run menu 188
482 Reset button
Raw Material Specifications Develop Stream specifications
investment analysis, project form 130
basis 122125 Residence time
libraries 140 design criteria specifications 105,
selecting defaults 140 106, 107
Raw materials sizing crystallizers 260
escalation 437 sizing vessels 280, 283, 285
Stream Input worksheet 438 Re-Size command
Rebar project component pop-up menu
civil installation bulk 214 166, 239
Recent Items folder 200 RESULTS workbook
Reconnect Sink command Analyzer Economics Module
stream, Process Flow Diagrams (AEM) 424430
(PFD) 196 Revenue
Reconnect Source command Cashflow spreadsheet 489492
streams, Process Flow Diagram Royalties See Patents and
(PFD) 196 royalties, Project Input
Red borders worksheet
Component Specifications form Run Report command
204
Index 501
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter Project Schedule Data Sheet 473
442 Screens
design criteria specifications 110
S Select command
Project Basis pop-up menu 143
Sales Select Import Type dialog box 22
Cashflow spreadsheet 488 Select Simulator Type dialog box
Salvage Project As dialog box 53 154
Salvage Value Sensor
Project Input worksheet 436 instrumentation loop 216217
Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Separation factor
Capital Cost) design criteria specifications 108
Cashflow spreadsheet 487 sizing vessels 280, 281
impact on depreciation 116 SG 223
Investment Parameters 116 Show Page Bounds
Project Summary spreadsheet View menu, BFD 163
481 View menu, PFD 189
recouped 491 Sieve tray design 277
Salvaging project scenarios 52 Signal cabling, instrumentation -
Save As command installation bulks 214
File menu 45, 51 SimSci's Pro/II with PROVISION
Save button models used in sizing towers 268
toolbar 44, 50 R/R minimum 103, 279
Save command SHORTCUT column operation
File menu 45, 50 279
Save Window States checkbox simulator report preparation
Preferences 57 152153
Saving Simulation reports
cached information 52 Aspen Plus 268, 270
project scenarios 50 ChemCAD 147148
window states 57 HYSIM 149150, 268, 270
Saving Window States 43 HYSYS 268, 270
Scan for Errors before evaluation loading 30
Preferences 57 Pro/II 152153, 268
Scan Messages 418 selecting 154
Scenario Description Simulation Sciences Also See
General Project Data 68 SimSci's Pro/II with
Project Summary spreadsheet PROVISION
479 link to IPE 7
Scenario Name Simulator data
creating a new project 17 loading 153157
importing Standard Basis from mapping 164171
5.0 21 mapping specifications 94
Project Summary spreadsheet unsupported models 59
478 Simulator File Name
Scenario reporting project specifications, Process
Project Input worksheet 433 Design 154
Scenarios Simulator Type
creating 1620 Executive Summary spreadsheet
importing 226 494
opening existing 2528 project specifications, Process
Schedule Design 153
Project Input worksheet 433
502 Index
Project Summary spreadsheet duplicating 142
478 importing 142
Simulator Units of Measure introduction 139
Mapping Specs modifying 142
libraries 140 moving to another directory 144
project specifications, Process selecting 143
Design 9093 Specification libraries
selecting defaults 140 customizing 140143
Single Component Summary introduction 139
Report moving to another directory 144
Preferences 57 SPECS workbook
Single Source Quote 223 Analyzer Economics Module
Site development 198 (AEM) 420424
Size button 237, 244 Spreadsheets
Size Icarus Project Component(s) customizing 495501
options SQL database
Map dialog box 166 exporting to Microsoft Access
Size Item option 193, 237 465
Sizing SS 223
calculations 254285 Stairs, steel - installation bulks 214
ChemCAD items 148 Standard Basis
defaults 254285 file, selecting 143
HYSIM items 149 input file, General Project Data
mapped components 166, 169, 68
237 Standard reports
overview 237 descriptions 443, 448447
parameters 99, 102, 103, 104, navigating 444
105, 107, 108, 111 opening 443
requirements 254285 printing 447
Sizing Expert 111, 166, 193, 237 searching 446
243 Start date, basic engineering
Sizing Method field Executive Summary spreadsheet
Equipment Model Library (EML) 493, 495
303 General Specs 76
sizing parameter symbols 305 Project Summary spreadsheet
Snap to Grid checkbox 479, 480, 484
Grid properties 190 Starting program 15
Snap to Grid command Start-up period, length
View menu, BFD 163 Investment Parameters 120
View menu, PFD 189 Statements worksheet
Soil conditions Analyzer Economics Module
General Specs 76, 78 (AEM) 428
Solids handling information Status bar 29
design criteria specifications 110 View menu 47, 188
Source Status column
Map dialog box 165 List view 170, 201
Source of quote 223 Status worksheet
Specification basis Analyzer Economics Module
product specifications 127 (AEM) 424
raw material specifications 124 Steam utility 246
Specification files Steel
creating 141 installation bulk 214
deleting 143
Index 503
material costs and man-hours Project Summary spreadsheet
207 481
Straight Line Taxes
Investment Parameters, amount owed, Cashflow
Depreciation Method 116 spreadsheet 489
Stream Input worksheet General Specs 75, 77
Analyzer Economics Module indirects, Project Summary
(AEM) 437438 spreadsheet 483
Analyzer Economics Module Telephone Systems 217
(AEM) 430431 Template files
Analyzer Economics Module Reporting Assistant 497
(AEM) 422 templates
Streams adding 27
absolute basis 138 creating projects from 28
adding 136, 193 Templates Tab 41
basis mode 138 TEX (Total expenses)
connecting to equipment during Cashflow spreadsheet 490
sizing 243250 Tile command
connectivity, Process Flow Window menu 31, 49
Diagram (PFD) 191 Time period
creating 136, 193 Project Input worksheet 434
creating from Project Explorer Timed backup 58
239243 Timed Recovery 58
deleting 139, 196 Toolbar
material 125 buttons 43
modifying 129 description 43
process 127 docking 43
product specifications 125 interface, default position 29
relative basis 138 View menu 47, 188
Streams List command Tools menu 48
View menu, BFD 163 Total direct cost
View menu, PFD 189 Capital Cost report, Icarus Editor
Subcooling 475
tower configurations 173 Equipment Summary
Suffixes spreadsheet (EQUIP.ICS) 477
mapping 168 Total earnings
Sum of the Digits Cashflow spreadsheet 489
Investment Parameters, Total Expenses
Depreciation Method 116 Cashflow spreadsheet 490
Supervision Total Manpower Schedule
costs, Project Input worksheet reports, Icarus Editor 471
436 Total Operating Cost, Executive
System cost base date Summary spreadsheet 494
Executive Summary spreadsheet Total project cost
Project Summary spreadsheet Project Summary spreadsheet
479 484
Tower configurations
T mapping 168, 175185, 269
272
Tax Rate Training command
Cashflow spreadsheet 487 Help menu 50
Investment Parameters 116 Transducers
504 Index
instrumentation loop 216 Project Summary spreadsheet
Transmitters, instrumentation - (PROJSUM.ICS) 482
installation bulks 214 Utility costs
Trayed towers Cashflow spreadsheet 487
design criteria specifications 104 Executive Summary spreadsheet
sizing 275, 276, 279 494
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus heat-transfer utilities 114
Reporter 442, 462 non-heat transfer utilities 121
Trending database reports 461 Project Summary spreadsheet
463 486
Trim cooler Utility Specifications
suffix for mapping 169 libraries 139, 140
tower configurations 173, 270, project specifications 110114
272 selecting defaults 140
Utility stream
U creating 111
modifying 111
UCL See Unit Cost Library (UCL) Utility Unit Costs
Unique Project Backup options 59 operating unit costs
Unit Cost field specifications (non-heat
product specifications 128 transfer utilities) 121
raw material specifications 125 utility specifications (heat-
Unit Cost Library (UCL) transfer utilities) 114
adding an item to 308
adding UCL item to a project 310
V
creating 307
definition 299 Valve tray sizing 278
Units of measure Vapor disengagement height
input customization 18, 70 towers, design criteria 103
output (reports) customization VB 223
72 VBL 223
project properties 18 Vendor Budget Quote 223
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 309 Vendor Budget Quote Long Lead
Units of Measure Specification 223
dialog box 90 Vendor Firm Quote 223
Unlock command 53 Vendor Firm Quote Long Lead 223
Unsupported simulator models Vessel
Preferences 59 design criteria specifications
Update button 108110
Develop Stream specifications diameter, General Specs 76
form 130 height to diameter ratio 106,
User Custom Model 230234 283, 285
Utilities sizing 238, 280
escalation 437 VF 223
list of availiable utility resources VFL 223
246 View Existing Trend Data command
Stream Input worksheet 438 Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
usage estimation 134 Reporter 442, 464
Utilities Escalation View menu 47, 188
Cashflow spreadsheet 488
Investment Parameters 118 W
Wage rates
Index 505
construction workforce
specifications 8286
WARNing message 418
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get
Zoom dialog box 161
Window menu 49
Window States
Saving 43
Window states, saving 57
Workbook mode
understanding 3032
View menu 47, 188
Workforce reference base
General Wage Rates 84
Working capital
Working capital percentage
Working Capital Percentage
Investment Parameters 118
WYSIWYG
Zoom dialog box 161
Z
zip files
importing 23, 24, 25
Zoom
Aspen Icarus Reporter 445
Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 161
162
toolbar 44
506 Index

AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV9 0 Usr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV9 0 Usr

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV9 0 Usr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Aspen Technology, Inc.

2 Getting Started ...................................................................................................15

3 Defining the Project Basis ..................................................................................57

4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data .............................................................126

5 Defining Project Components ...........................................................................173

6 Sizing Project Components ...............................................................................208

7 Piping and Instrumentation Models .................................................................255

8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries ................................................................265

9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location ..............................................................287

10 Analyzer Utility Modules .................................................................................304

11 Evaluating the Project ....................................................................................378

Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of Equipment Affected by Mapping .................457

Mapping of Simulator Models to Process

Development of Operating Costs

Investment Analysis and Aspen Process

Alternative Capacities and Locations

Detailed, Interactive Process Economics

Links to Project Evaluation Programs

Understanding Aspen Process

Known Issues and Workarounds

New Features in Aspen Economic

Piping and Instrumentation Drawings

You use the Online Technical Support Center to:

Starting Aspen Process

To start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:

Starting a Project Scenario

Creating a New Project Scenario

Click on the toolbar.

2 Either click an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter a

5 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500 characters in

12 Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.

these and other features now available on the interface.

Importing an Aspen Process Economic

To import an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 or

Click on the toolbar.

2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter

6 Click the project scenario folder; then click OK.

Importing Economic Evaluation Project

4 In the Project Name field, specify the project name.

5 Click OK. The imported project appears in the list of projects.

Click on the toolbar.

To open a project from the Palette :

Working with Templates

Creating a Project by Importing a Template

Note: When opening a project from a template, or opening a template itself,

Understanding the Icarus

The Icarus interface includes the following features:

Status Bar - Displays Aspen Process Economic Analyzer system status.

To expand a tree level:

Project Explorer Views

2 Main Project, containing a group of simulator areas

As in a process simulator, like Aspen Plus or HYSYS, blocks represent different

1 Main Project, containing the default Main Area and any

To limit area-level lists to a single category of component:

To change column settings on the area-level list:

2 To simply hide/unhide a column, click it on the menu.

Customizing the Icarus Interface

To dock to a different edge: